ML093220865

QR-06910327-1, Rev 0, Qualification Report for Square Reactor Trip Switchgear for Three Mile Island, Attachment 2

ML093220865
Person / Time
Site:	Three Mile Island
Issue date:	05/06/2009
From:	Exelon Generation Co, Exelon Nuclear
To:	Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
References
TMI-09-139 QR-06910327-1, Rev 0
Download: ML093220865 (286)

Text

ATTACHMENT 2 Qualification Report for the Square D Reactor Trip Switchgear for Three Mile Island, QR-06910327-1, dated May 2009

QUALIFICATION REPORT FOR SQUARE D REACTOR TRIP SWITCHGEAR FOR THREE MILE ISLAND Qualification Report QR-06910327-1 Revision 0 May 2009 Page 1 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page i ý APPROVAL FOR QUALIFICATION REPORT FOR SQUARE D REACTOR TRIP SWITCHGEAR FOR THREE MILE ISLAND Prepared by: date~/

Verified by: aiQk date 5ýQlcf I

Approved b)

Page 2 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI SPage ii REVISION HISTORY Revision Description Date 0 Original Issue 5/6/09 Page 3 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-0691032 7- 1, Rev.

0 Exelon - TMI Page iii TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0

SUMMARY

OF RESULTS 2.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.1 Test Specimens 2.2 Traceability of the Test Specimens to the Production Units 2.3 Safety Function 2.4 Interfaces 3.0 PLANT CONDITIONS 3.1 Service Conditions

.3.2 Functional Parameters 3.3 Margins 4.0 TEST SEQUENCE 4.1 Pre-seismic Baseline Functional Testing 4.2 Resonant Search 4.3 Seismic Testing 4.4 Post Seismic Baseline Functional Testing 4.5 Environmental Qualification 5.0 EVALUATION OF RESULTS 5.1 Anomalies 5.2 Modifications 5.3 Results and Conclusions 6.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE 7.0 MEASUREMENT & TEST EQUIPMENT 8.0 DOCUMENTATION

9.0 REFERENCES

Appendix A: Seismic Test Response Spectra Plots (17 pages)

Appendix B: Photographs of seismic test setup (10 pages)

Appendix C: Qualification plan (26 pages)

Appendix D: Qualification test data sheets ( Pre-seismic: 30 pages, Siesmic: 10 pages, Post-seismic: 162 pages)

Appendix E: Testing Anomalies (6 pages)

Page 4 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 011 Exelon - TMI Page 1 1.0

SUMMARY

OF RESULTS The test specimen identified in Section 2.1 of this report has been environmentally and seismically qualified in accordance with NLI seismic test plan QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 [9.8],

Three Mile Island purchase order 00428587 [9.4] and TMI specification SP-1 101-11-250 [9.5].

The seismic test response spectra (TRS) have been computed and plotted at 5% damping, and the lower bound envelope from all test runs is shown in Appendix A, Figures 1 - 4 for the test specimen. The required response spectrum (RRS) has been plotted for comparison with the TRS. The TRS enveloped the RRS witlh10% added margin from I to 100Hz for all runs.

There was no evidence of physical damage to the test specimen at the conclusion of the seismic testing. The. test specimen was tested for proper function during the seismic testing during the SSE level tests. The switchgear met all acceptance criteria as outlined in the seismic test plan and functioned properly during the seismic testing except as noted in the test anomalies contained in Appendix E.

Baseline functional testing was performed prior to and after the seismic testing. There were no failures recorded during the pre- and post-seismic baseline functional testing.

There were five test anomalies recorded during the testing. A brief description of the five anomalies is as follows:

1) Step 4.4.4 states that both breakers are tested. During testing only the top two sections where monitored (1 breaker cell and 1 instrument cell).

2) Step 4.4.4 states that the undervoltage relay coil voltage is to be powered from 90-OVdc for the transition test. The coil voltage is 90Vdc, however the sense voltage is 90-OVac to actuate the relay. The AC voltage was reduced to OVac during the test, not the Vdc.

3) The additional accelerometers used for measuring in-panel response were not mounted in the location as specified in the test plan. Step 4.4.2.1 states to install accelerometers on the top of the breaker cradle. The accelerometers were mounted on the front of the breaker.

4) The in-panel test data in the back-to-front (1800) vertical direction for the accelerometer mounted on the front of the breaker was not accurate data and was discarded.

5) The post seismic baseline functional testing was not performed as specified in the qualification plan.

These testing anomalies are discussed in detail in Section 5.1 of this report and documented in Test Anomalies 06910327-1 through -5 contained in Appendix E.

All baseline functional test data is contained in Appendix D.

Page 5 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 2 The testing was successfully completed in accordance with the qualification test plan contained in Appendix C.

All testing was performed at the NLI facility in Fort Worth, TX.

2.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.1 Test Specimens The test specimen is as a Square-D PZ-4 series low-voltage switchgear. The test specimen consists of one (1) 20" wide vertical section with two (2) circuit breakers (the breakers are Square-D Masterpact NT, 800A frame, p/n: NT08NA), associated instrumentation devices and doors are as identified in NLI design drawing 06910327-LD-1, (latest revision) and below.

The switchgear and circuit breaker ratings are as follows:

" Nominal operating voltage: 48OVac.

• Rated current: 800A

• Interrupt Rating: 42,OOOA @ 508Vac

" Nominal control voltage: 125VDC

• UV voltage range: 42 - 84Vac

" Shunt trip voltage range: 70 - 140Vdc

• Trip Unit: None

• Nominal Control voltage (charging and closing): 120VAC The following additional control / indication devices were mounted in the switchgear during testing:

a) Breaker test switch, Electroswitch, series 20K.

b) Undervoltage relay, ABB, catalog number 411 R0175, 125VDC.

c) Indicating light, Square-D, catalog number Z85AVBG1, 125VDC/120VAC.

d) Auxiliary relay, Square-D, catalog number XUD08OV63, 125VDC.

e) Auxiliary relay, Square-D, catalog number XO 1200V02, 120VAC.

f) Fuseblock, Ferraz-Shawmut, AJT type.

g) Fuse, Ferraz-Shawmut, ATDR type.

h) Terminal block, sliding link type.

2.2 Traceability of the Test Specimens to the Production Units Traceability of the test specimens to the production units is established by the following:

• The functional testing of the test specimen and the dedication testing of the production units verify that the equipment was manufactured and performs in accordance with the vendor design documents and instruction manuals.

Page 6 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 3

• The test specimens represent the supplied items based on the same design, physical, mechanical and electrical characteristics.

• The supplied production units will be supplied from the same manufacturer and part numbers as listed on the test specimen Bill of Materials.

Therefore, traceability is established between the supplied units and test specimens.

2.3 Safety Function The safety function of the switchgear is to provide power to safety related loads and interrupt power on a trip signal.

2.4 Interfaces The plant interfaces were used during the testing as follows:

2.4.1 Switchgear Structure The test specimen switchgear structure is a standard Square-D PZ4 section configured the same as the production gear being supplied to TMI. The same components being supplied on the production switchgear were installed on the cell doors and in the instrument sections to simulate the installed components during all testing.

The test specimen was one (1) 20" wide section and was constructed per the same design drawings approved for the production units. The supplied production switchgear for use in the plant will be two (2) vertical sections bolted together. The use of one (1) switchgear section during the qualification testing is considered conservative as follows:

a. The plant installation is two (2) sections bolted together. The larger number of sections in the plant installation is more rigid in the side to side direction than the test specimen with one (1) section resulting in higher in-panel seismic accelerations of the test specimen. Therefore, use of the one section for testing is conservative.

b. The number of switchgear sections has minimal impact on the seismic response of the switchgear in the front-to-back and the vertical directions.

c. The construction of the test specimen switchgear is the same as the switchgear installed in the plant.

d. The test specimen switchgear structure was welded to a rigid fixture with 1/8" x 3" long fillet welds on 6" centers, front and back of the switchgear. The rigid fixture was welded to the shaker table. The supplied switchgear will be welded to steel embeds in the plant with a 1/8" x 3" long fillet weld on 6"centers, front and back of the switchgear. The TMI anchorage of the supplied gear is equivalent to the anchorage of the test specimen.

e. The bus is self contained within the switchgear, which is part of the switchgear sections that are being tested.

Page 7 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-l, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 4

f. The test specimen switchgear has two instrument cubicles (one in the top cubicle and one in the third cubicle from the top) and two circuit breaker cubicles (one in the second and one in the bottom cubicle from the top). A circuit breaker was installed in the bottom breaker cubicle to simulate the actual breaker being installed during testing.

g. No conduit was installed at the top of the test specimen. This is conservative because the conduit provides support for the switchgear when installed.

h. The indicating lights, breaker test switch, undervoltage relay and auxiliary relays are mounted in the top cubicle of the switchgear. This represents the worst case mounting for the components due to amplification of the gear.

2.4.2 Base Mounting The test specimen switchgear was welded to a test fixture to simulate the mounting embedments in the plant. The weld size was 1/8" x 3" long fillet welds on 6" centers. The base text fixture was welded to the seismic shaker table.

The test specimen switchgear welding is shown in Figures 19 and 20 in Appendix B.

2.4.3 Electrical Interfaces The electrical interfaces during the seismic testing were as follows:

• Control wire to operate the breaker and monitor contact chatter was installed. This wire was installed in a convenient configuration to accommodate the testing.

• Power wire and control wire bundles were not installed and hard conduit was not installed. This is conservative because these items would provide support at the top of the switchgear and provide support to the switchgear.

3.0 PLANT CONDITIONS 3.1 Service Conditions The plant service conditions are specified as follows as identified in TMI specification SP-1 101-11-250 [9.5]:

• Operating time: continuous

• Design Temperature: 1040 F

• Humidity: 10 - 90% relative humidity

• Radiation: < 10 4 rads gamma

• Seismic RRS: (see Appendix A)

Page 8 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-l, Rev.O Exelon - TMI 3.2 Functional Parameters The following functional parameters are applicable to the test specimen:

0 Nominal Control Voltage: 120VAC / 125VDC 0 Breaker Charging: 120VAC (90 - 140VAC) 0 Breaker UV: 42 - 84VAC (UVhold in at > 102VAC) 0 Shunt Trip: 70 - 140VDC 3.3 Margins The following margins were applied to the specified service conditions per IEEE 323.

• Seismic RRS: +10% on acceleration across the frequency range.

9 Control voltage: Voltage range specified above.

4.0 TEST SEQUENCE All qualification activities specified in this section were performed on the test specimen.

4.1 Pre-Seismic Baseline Functional Testing Pre-seismic baseline functional testing was performed on test specimen switchgear. Testing and acceptance criteria were accordance with NLI Verification Plan VP-PZ4, (latest revision), CC#'s 1 - 13. The test specimen passed all pre-seismic baseline functional testing successfully. The test data is contained in Appendix D.

4.2 Resonance Search The test specimen switchgear was subjected to a resonance search. The resonance search consisted ofsinusoidal table motion varying in frequency from 1Hz to 35Hz at a sweep rate of 2 octaves per minute. Table motion was controlled to 0.2g maximum and applied separately in each direction. Accelerometers were mounted on the table and on the top of the structure in the horizontal and vertical directions of motion during the resonance search. The resonance search was performed in the front-to-back and the side-to-side directions. Transmissibility plots are provided in Appendix A for information only.

Review of the transmissibility plots identifies the following natural frequencies:

• Side to side: 13.5 Hz.

" Front to back: 8.5 Hz.

" Vertical: None below 33 Hz.

Note: The peaks on the vertical transmissibility plots are coupling with the horizontal natural frequencies and are not natural frequencies in the vertical direction.

Page 9 of 285,

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 6 4.3 Seismic Testing 4.3.1 Shaker Table Instrumentation Horizontal and vertical control accelerometers were mounted to the surface of the shaker table.

The accelerometers time histories were used to compute the test response spectra (TRS).

In addition to the control accelerometers on the table surface, accelerometers were installed on the test specimen switchgear during the OBE and SSE testing in the following locations:

" On the front of the replacement breaker of the test specimen breaker in the highest installed cell. See Figures 21 & 22. This accelerometer was used to document the worst case amplified in-switchgear spectra for the breakers.

• On the top of the back panel in the-upper most instrument section of the test specimen. See Figures 23 & 24. This accelerometer was used to document the worst case amplified in-switchgear spectra for all instrument components.

The accelerometers were installed in the horizontal and vertical directions of motion. Time histories from these accelerometers were used to compute the amplified in-panel response spectra. The amplified in-panel response spectra was computed in these locations for the horizontal and vertical directions for OBE and SSE testing. The OBE and SSE in-panel response spectra at these locations are included in Appendix A for information only.

4.3.2 Excitation The NLI dependant biaxial shaker table was used. A random multi-frequency excitation was used such that the horizontal and vertical excitation is the same. The duration of each test was 30 seconds. The test specimen was subjected to a proof test that was performed in accordance with IEEE 344-1987 [9.3], IEEE 323-1983 [9.2] and TMI specification SP-11101-11-250 [9.5] to demonstrate seismic qualification to the Required Response Spectra.

The OBE tests enveloped the OBE required response spectra and the SSE tests enveloped the SSE required response spectra (RRS) with 10% margin. The OBE testing was performed at the OBE levels (2 of the SSE level) and the SSE testing was performed at the SSE level. All OBE and SSE TRS vs. RRS curves are shown in Figures 1 through 4 in Attachment A.

The excitation consisted of 201 randomly phased sinusoids with frequencies spaced uniformly on a logarithmic scale from 1 to 100 Hz. This exceeds the normal requirement of one-third octave frequency spacing per IEEE 344-1987 [9.3].

The lower bound OBE TRS for all runs was computed at 5% damping and compared against the OBE RRS @ 5% damping as shown in Figures 1 & 2. The lower bound SSE TRS for all runs was computed and compared against the SSE RRS @ 5% damping as shown in Figures 3 & 4.

Page 10 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 7 The lower bound TRS was plotted at 201 frequency values, spaced evenly on a logarithmic scale from 1 to 100 Hz. A 10% margin was added to the required response spectra per IEEE 323-1983

[9.2].

4.3.3 Seismic Testing In accordance with the guidelines of IEEE 344-1987 the test specimens were tested in each of four orientations with respect to the excitation, as follows:

• Front to Back and Vertical (FB/V) In phase (00)

• Side to Side and Vertical (SS/V) In phase (900)

• Front to Back and Vertical (FB/V) Out of phase (1800)

• Side to Side and Vertical (SS/V) Out of phase (2700)

Each set of four orientations constitutes a single test run. Three OBE tests were performed in each direction for a total of 12 OBE runs. The test specimens were unmonitored during the OBE testing. The SSE test runs were performed per Table 1 for the test specimens as described below. The test specimens were monitored during the SSE tests.

SSE testing is required in the open, closed, and transition configurations to fully test the breaker.

IEEE 344 requires 5 OBE's followed by 1 SSE. In this test program, two of the SSE's were substituted for two of the OBE's. This is conservative, since the SSE seismic levels are higher than the OBE levels. The total number of seismic runs meets the requirements of IEEE 344.

4.3.4 SSE Monitoring Configuration Table 1 Switchgear SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 Breakers installed in Contact Chatter on No chatter > 2ms on any contact.

cells, open and charged Main contacts & Breaker did not change state.

in the connect position. One NO & NC auxiliary UV was powered at contact - (OF contact on 90VAC. breaker) 2 Breakers installed in Contact Chatter on No chatter > 2ms on any contact.

cells, closed in the Main contacts & Breaker did not change state.

connect position. One NO & NC auxiliary UV powered at 90VAC. contact - (OF contact on breaker) 3 Transition in the connect Contact state Breaker properly transitioned position. UV powered at during seismic event 90VAC.

4 Disconnect position Structural Integrity Breaker remained in switchgear (0' and 900 directions cell.

only)

Page 11 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 8 During SSE3 the circuit breaker was closed at the start of the test. The breaker was cycled as follows:

• Approximately 5 seconds into test, the breaker was tripped using 70vdc control voltage to the shunt trip. All main contacts changed state and the breaker opened.

" Approximately 5 seconds after the breaker tripped, the breaker was charged and closed using 90Vac control voltage. All main contacts changed state and the breaker closed.

Notes on test configuration:

• Tripping at 70vdc and charging/closing at 90Vac are the minimum motive power and is considered the worst-case condition.

" The SSE testing in the DISCONNECT position envelops the OBE conditions in the DISCONNECT position.

During SSE4 testing the breaker was in the DISCONNECT position. The breaker was tested in the 0' and 90' positions only after the completion of SSE 1 through 3. The testing in the DISCONNECT position is more conservative than the TEST position because the breaker is completely disconnected from the cell. This test is not for operability concerns as the breaker is not connected to the switchgear.

Undervoltage Relay Manufacturer: ABB Part number: 411R0175 SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 De-energized (see note 1) Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 2 Energized (see note 1) Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 3 Transition Contact State (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) Relay transitioned and (Energized to de- maintained state energized)

Note 1:

a) During SSE1 testing the relay had no control voltage or sense voltage applied.

b) During SSE2 testing the relay had 90VDC control voltage applied and 90VAC applied to the sense input (the UV setpoint of the relay was set to actuate at lower than 90VAC).

c) During SSE3 testing the relay was energized with 90VDC control voltage and 90VAC applied to the sense input (the UV setpoint of the relay was set to actuate at lower than 90VAC). Approximately 15 seconds into the test run, the 90VAC was removed to actuate the relay to change state.

Page 12 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear Exelon - TMI QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 I Auxiliary Relay Manufacturer: Square-D Part number: XUD080V63 SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 De-energized Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 2 Energized Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 3 Transition Contact State (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) Relay transitioned and (De-Energized to maintained state Energized)

Auxiliary Relay Manufacturer: Square-D Part number: X01200V02 SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 De-energized Contact chatter (1 N.O. & I N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 2 Energized Contact chatter (1 N.O. & I N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 3 Transition Contact State (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) Relay transitioned and (De-Energized to maintained state Energized)

Breaker Test Switch Manufacturer: Electrocswitch Part number: Series 20K SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 Test switch in the Contact Chatter No chatter > 2ms.

NORMAL position Breaker did not change state.

2 Test switch in the UV Contact Chatter No chatter > 2ms.

Trip position Breaker did not change state.

Indicating Lights SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 2 Energized (AC powered) Light remained illuminated No flickering of light 2 Energized (DC powered) Light remained illuminated No flickering of lig ht SSE # Applied Voltage Contact Loading 2 90VAC N/A 2 90VDC N/A Page 13 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 10 Terminal Blocks SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 N/A Structural Integrity Structural integrity was maintained Fuse Block with Fuse SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 Fuse Installed Structural Integrity Structural integrity was maintained 1 Fuse Installed Electrical Continuity No loss of continuity Note: One of each type of fuse block was monitored during the testing. Each type installed in the test specimen passed all acceptance criteria as listed above.

4.3.5 Acceptance Criteria The following acceptance criteria were met during testing:

1. All test runs: Mounting integrity was maintained for all components and the overall test specimen structure.

2. All test runs: There was no physical damage to the test specimen (components or cell).

3. SSE #1 and SSE #2: There was no electrical malfunction during the test. The breaker did not change state.

4. SSE #1 and SSE #2: There was no contact chatter > 2 ms for the circuit breaker, relays or breaker test switch.

5. SSE #3: The breaker successfully opens, charges and closes.

6. All test runs: The TRS enveloped RRS with 10% margin for all OBE and SSE tests.

7. SSE #4: There was no structural damage to the breaker or the cell, the breaker did not become dislodged and the door remained closed.

8. SSE #3: The relays transitioned and maintained state.

9. SSE #2: The indicating lights remained illuminated without flickering.

10. SSE #1: The fuse continuity through fuse block was maintained with no loss of continuity for all types of fuse blocks.

Page 14 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 11 4.4 Post Seismic Baseline Functional Testing Baseline functional testing was performed after seismic testing to verify proper operation of the test specimens. Testing and acceptance criteria was accordance with the following NLI Verification Plans:

VP-20K-904C8-2, Rev. 0- Electroswitch breaker position switches.

VP-XUDO80V63, Rev. 0 - Square-D auxiliary DC relays (KA-A, KB-A) in the switchgear.

VP-XO1200V02, Rev. 0 - Square-D auxiliary AC relays (K5-A, K5-B, KF-A, KF-B) in the switchgear.

VP-ZB5AVBG1, Rev. 0- Square-D indicating lights.

VP-41 1R07'15, Rev. 0 - ABB undervoltage relays.

The testing was not performed as described in the qualification plan. The post-seismic testing was performed on the individual components of the switchgear instead of the overall assembled unit as documented in Test Anomaly 06910327-05. The VP's are separate controlled documents.

Post-seismic baseline functional testing was performed on the circuit breaker per NLI Standard Verification Plan SVP-109, Rev. 2. SVP-109 is a standard test plan for Masterpact NT type breakers which are used in this application.

The test specimens passed all post-seismic baseline testing. The test data is contained in Appendix D.

4.5 Environmental Qualification Environmental qualification was based on testing, vendor data and material analysis as discussed in this section.

4.5.1 Temperature The temperature rating of the switchgear is -30' to 40'C. The switchgear, circuit breakers and associated component temperature ratings are greater than the highest temperature per Three Mile Island specification SP-1 101-11-250 and are therefore are acceptable for use.

4.5.2 Relative Humidity The maximum relative humidity of 90% (non-condensing) is within the design range for the equipment. The non-condensing conditions will not provide added stress on the equipment, therefore the circuit breakers and associated components are acceptable for use.

Page 15 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 12 4.5.3 Radiation The plant specified radiation dose is <10 4 normal rad gamma. RG 1.89 addresses qualification of equipment exposed to low-level radiation doses. Numerous studies (EPRI NP-1558, EPRI NP-2129, EPRI NP-4172M, DOR Guidelines Appendix C) that have compiled radiation effects data on all classes of organic compounds show that compounds with the least radiation resistance have damage thresholds greater than 1E4 rad gamma. This includes all elastomers, including teflon. The non-metallic, materials of construction of the breaker do not include Teflon or fluorobarbons. Therefore, the lowest damage threshold for all of the non-metallic materials is greater than the plant specified radiation dose and are acceptable for use.

However, for electronic components, studies have shown susceptibility to degradation on metal oxide semiconductor devices at somewhat lower doses of 5E3 rad gamma [ref: documents identified above]. The replacement breaker shunt trip, undervoltage and closing device have an AC/DC inverter and Microcontroller with the integrated Power Supply. The microcontroller monitors the input voltage and when the input voltage exceeds the preset threshold, the activation coil is energized to operate the plunger. After the plunger is activated the microcontroller shuts off the activation coil and energizes the maintenance coil to maintain the plunger in the activated position.

If the input voltage is below the preset operating level of the device, the microcontroller will not energize either coil and the only current draw by the device will be to keep the microcontroller powered. All three devices function the same electronically.

To ensure proper operation of these components radiation testing was performed on the shunt trip, undervoltage and closing coils of the Masterpact breakers. The use of one shunt trip, undervoltage and closing coil is acceptable because all breakers are supplied with identical coils.

4.5.3.1 Pre-Radiation Baseline Functional Testing Pre-irradiation baseline functional testing was performed on the shunt trip/closing coils and undervoltage coils prior to irradition to verify proper operation of the test specimen coils.

Testing and acceptance criteria were accordance with NLI Test Inspection Report TIR-11411320-1, Rev. 0 (for the UV coils) and TIR-11411320-1, Rev. I (for the shunt coils). The test specimen coils operated properly and passed all pre-radiation baseline testing. The pre-radiation baseline testing is included in Appendix D.

4.5.3.2 Radiation Testing The test specimens were irradiated to demonstrate proper operation after being exposed to the specified plant dose of 1.1 E4 (including 10% margin) gamma minimum TID per TMI technical specification SP-110 1-11-250, Rev. 0. The coils were irradiated in a convenient physical orientation since gamma radiation exposure is independent of orientation for this type of equipment. The coils were irradiated unpowered and unnmonitored. The radiation test data is included in Appendix D.

Page 16 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 13 4.5.3.3 Post-Radiation Baseline Functional Testing Post-irradiation baseline functional testing was performed on the shunt trip/closing coils and undervoltage coils after irradition to verify proper operation of the test specimen coils. Testing and acceptance criteria were accordance with NLI Test Inspection Report TIR- 11411320-1, Rev.

0 (for the UV coils) and TIR-1 1411320-1, Rev. 1 (for the shunt coils). The test specimen coils operated properly and passed all post-radiation baseline testing for the TMI required level of 1.1E4 (including 10% margin) gamma minimum TID. The post-radiation baseline testing is included in Appendix D. Note: The coils failed testing when exposed to higher radiation levels.

This testing was for informational purposes. This is not an anomaly because the plant requirements were met.

The proper operation of the coils before and after the radiation exposure demonstrates proper operation.

5.0 EVALUATION OF RESULTS 5.1 Anomalies There were five (5) anomalies documented during qualification testing. The anomalies are as follows:

Anomaly 06910327 Step 4.4.4 states that both breakers are tested. During testing only the top two sections where monitored (1 breaker cell and 1 instrument cell).

The qualification test plan incorrectly stated to monitor both breakers during testing. It is acceptable to monitor only the top two cubicles in the cell (1 breaker cubicle and 1 instrument section cubicle) because these two cubicles and the components mounted internally experienced the highest amplified seismic input during testing. The successful testing of these components qualifies the components mounted in the lower cubicle of the switchgear structure.

At least one of each type of component was mounted in the top instrument cubicle except for the circuit breaker, which was mounted in the second from the top cubicle. This is the highest cubicle that a breaker will be mounted.

The testing is acceptable as performed and demonstrates the qualification of all components in the switchgear test specimen.

Anomaly 06910327 Step 4.4.4 states that the undervoltage relay coil voltage is to be powered from 90-OVdc for the transition test. The coil voltage is 90Vdc, however the sense voltage is 90-OVac to actuate the relay. The AC voltage was reduced to OVac during the test, not the OVdc.

The qualification test plan incorrectly stated to remove the DC voltage applied to the relay. The sense voltage of the relay is the AC voltage. Removal of the AC voltage during the test is the correct voltage to remove during testing. The testing performed is acceptable and shows proper operation of the relay and demonstrates qualification of the relay and is acceptable.

Page 17 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 14 Anomaly 06910327 The additional accelerometers used for measuring in-panel response were not mounted in the location as specified in the test plan. Step 4.4.2.1 states to install accelerometers on the top of the breaker cradle. The accelerometers were mounted on the front of the breaker.

The accelerometer used for measuring in-panel response for the circuit breaker was not mounted in the location as specified in the test plan. The accelerometer could not be mounted as specified in the test plan because of space limitations within the test cubicle. Therefore, the accelerometer was mounted on the top front cover of the breaker. This location provides a representative amplified in-panel spectra for the breaker and is acceptable. The in-panel amplified in-panel spectra circuit breakers is provided for information only.

Anomaly 06910327 The in-panel test data in the back-to-front (180') vertical direction for the accelerometer mounted on the front of the breaker was discarded.

The data obtained for this location for this one particular run was corrupted due to inaccurate data. The accelerometer did not record data and therefore was not used in the calculation of the in-panel spectra at the breaker location. This is acceptable because the same data was recorded in the front-to-back (00) direction and used for the calculation of the in-panel spectra. The in-panel spectra is provided for information only.

Anomaly 06910327 The post seismic baseline functional testing was not performed as specified in the qualification plan.

Baseline functional testing was performed after seismic testing to verify proper operation of the test specimens. Testing and acceptance criteria was accordance with the following NLI Verification Plans:

VP-20K-904C8-2, Rev. 0 - Electroswitch breaker position switches.

VP-XUDO8OV63, Rev. 0 - Square-D auxiliary DC relays (KA-A, KB-A) in the switchgear.

VP-XO1200V02, Rev. 0 - Square-D auxiliary AC relays (K5-A, K5-B, KF-A, KF-B) in the switchgear.

VP-ZB5AVBG1, Rev. 0 - Square-D indicating lights.

VP-41 1R0715, Rev. 0 - ABB undervoltage relays. U' The testing was not performed as described in the qualification plan. The post-seismic testing was performed on the individual components of the switchgear instead of the overall assembled unit as documented in Test Anomaly 06910327-05. The VP's are separate controlled documents.

Post-seismic baseline functional testing was performed on the circuit breaker per NLI Standard Verification Plan SVP-109, Rev. 2. SVP-109 is a standard test plan for Masterpact NT type breakers which are used in this application.

The test specimens passed all post-seismic baseline testing. The test data is contained in Appendix D.

Page 18 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page 15 5.2 Modifications There were no modifications made to the test specimen during qualification testing.

5.3 Results and Conclusions Based on successful completion of NLI qualification test plan QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 along with the test anomalies as documented in section 5.1 of this.report, the Square-D PZ4 switchgear is qualified for use at the Three Mile Island Nuclear Station.

6.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE Project activities were performed in accordance with the NLI Quality Assurance Program which meets the requirements of 10CFR50 Appendix B, 10CFR21 and ASME NQA-1 [9.1].

7.0 MEASUREMENT & TEST EQUIPMENT Measurement & Test Equipment which were used is controlled by the NLI M&TE program (procedure NLI-QUAL-05, latest revision). The test data sheets identify the M&TE that was used. All M&TE used during testing is traceable to NIST standards.

8.0 DOCUMENTATION This qualification report is prepared to summarize the testing and present the results of the testing. Test data sheets and any other relevant data is included in this report.

9.0 REFERENCES

9.1 NLI Quality Assurance Manual, Rev. 6, dated 12/14/07 including applicable Supplements.

9.2 IEEE 323-1983, "IEEE Standard for Qualifying Class lE Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."

9.3 IEEE 344-1987, "IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class lE Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."

9.4 Three Mile Island purchase order 00428587.

9.5 Three Mile Island specification SP-1101-11-250, "Specification for Procurement of Replacement Control Rod Drive Breaker Cabinet and Breakers", Rev. 0.

9.6 NLI Verification Plan VP-PZ4 for Square-D PZ-4 switchgear.

9.7 NLI project 06910327 set of design drawings.

9.8 NLI Qualification Plan QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1.

Page 19 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-069103 27-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A.1I Appendix A Seismic Test Response Spectra Plot Page 20 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A.2 OBE Horizontal TRS vs. TMI OBE Horizontal RRS Three Mile Island Horizontal OBE Required Response Spectra (RRS) vs. Test Response Spectra (TRS) fi

................ ....... ...i..

.i

.h e M..I s an.H oz.t.

.ý4 Three Mile Island Horizontal OBE Test Response Spectra

.2%Dmpn Thre"e Mile Islai Horizontal 6BE Required Response a 2 Da i.....

i/ I -/ n( 14 i I' 0

10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 1 The TRS plotted is the lower bound of all test runs.

Page 21 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A.3 OBE Vertical TRS vs. TMI OBE Vertical RRS Three Mile Island Vertical OBE Required Response Spectra (RRS) vs. Test Response Spectra (TRS) @d 4 5% damping 3 .

Three Mile Island' Vertical I OBE Test @a250/ Response Dampingi Spect....... ai iv1.il1si~ Ver , a l......l...

lhr V erlaticCd

-2(RRS)

........ g....

n-. .......

,............................ e .a .....

SO1E Required Response Spectra + 10%

I.......................

0 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 2 The TRS plotted is the lower bound of all test runs.

Page 22 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A.4 SSE Horizontal TRS vs. TMI SSE Horizontal RRS Three Mile Island Horizontal SSE Required Response Spectra (RRS) vs. Test Response Spectra (TRS) @

5% damping three Mile Island Horizontal SSE Test Response Spectra (RRS) @5n0/ Damping co" 3 .........

i Three lile Island Horizonital SSSE Required Respon e 0

1 10 "100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 3 The TRS plotted is the lower bound of all test runs.

Page 23 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A.5 SSE Vertical TRS vs. TMI SSE Vertical RRS Three Mile Island Vertical SSE Required Response Spectra (RRS) vs. Test Response Spectra (TRS) @

5% damping Dpini ......

• ThreeRSMile Island IsanslVt 00Dmln Vertic'al Three inad Mile \ rt ic ii SSE Test..

Response

2......................

SetrK

. , SS Required Response

(....°/.ap .......... n g " -..........

- ..... .- ... ... l ..... ........

0 1 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 4 The TRS plotted is the lower bound of all test runs.

Page 24 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A.6 OBE Horizontal Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra (iý Top of Breaker Three Mile Island Horizontal OBE Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra at top of top breaker @ 5% damping 20 16 .. . . ........... . ........... ...... ...................

16

~~2 Three Mile Island Horizontal ORE Amplified In Panel 1.0 .. *. .. .i * .. p ............ ......... ................. ....

. .p.

spon..Spectra.at..top "f top.. . ...........

S9 ........... reaker 6* 5%/ Dam ping.................. ......... ........

8** * ... .......................... ...........................

......................... I.,

7 ..............................i.............................. ... . .--- ...........

i ..... ............ ...................

;7 1117  ;......

5 .......... .... ............... .. ........ ....... .......

• ........... ....... t 1 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 5 Note: The in-panel spectra is provided for information only. The accelerometer was located in the top of the highest instrument cubicle as shown in Figures 21 & 22 Page 25 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A.7 OBE Vertical Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra 6) Top of Breaker Three Mile Island Vertical OBE Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra at top of top breaker @!

20 5% damping 19 .................... ..................................

............ ..... .. ...... ...... ...........*....... ..*.............. L . ...*...

18 ............ .... .~ . ----. .....

17 .. .. . ........ .

15 16........ ....... . ..................... ........ ............

I.................................... ...............

14 i iiiiiii~~iiiii~iiiree iiii!reric~iii

\iii~a ti 1 43 . ......................... .. ...... .i..

13 *2~~ SSEeAmplifil ...........

In.......Pa.el-pn

-e

.......~~~~~~~~~~~

. 1 ..... 1..... .... *. .......... . ....... ......... ...........

-o12 : Ae mpos S SE.............. l ife d I ýýaa.. o p e o... . ........... ....-......... .......

-91 ~ Response Spectra at

..... a..

• top ~ to........ b.e.ke

! r ........... . ......

1010 bte-,ker 01~ nfj ........

.'"..".'l.....................................................................................................................'

5~ .'. .. '"..............

...........................................................*................. .... i..................

.. "'i'"'.......

8 ..................2 .......................... ....... ..

.. i............. ............ ..............

i.. ... ............... ........................... .........

II H

. .......... .......i..............

. J... ........... .......... .

0  !!i ___ i 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 6 Note: The in-panel spectra is provided for information only. The accelerometer was located in the top of the highest instrument cubicle as shown in Figures 21 & 22 Page 26 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1; Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A.8 SSE Horizontal Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra (&,Top of Breaker Three Mile Island Horizontal SSE Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra at top of top breaker L 50/% damping 20 ______

19 1186 . .........-i................... ....

i i.....

I

. i I . i. . i .

17 A.

Three Mile Island Horizontal 14 ............... S.SE Am plifi ed .In-Panel.. . .. . . . . . . .

132 .......Response brepne..-kerSpectra ct,%aat-ml).o top -1...1.....

at to. f tp..................... ..

..... .................. i .... ... ..........

p10 14 3J...................................... ........

r ...................

. t ............. t..........

X 1 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 7 Note: The in-panel spectra is provided for information only. The accelerometer was located in the top of the highest instrument cubicle as shown in Figures 21 & 22 Page 27 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A.9 SSE Vertical Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra (O Top of Breaker Three Mile Island Vertical SSE Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra at top of top breaker @

20_ 5% damping 20 .........................

14 .. . .. T.hre...i.e Mi l e i nd PXe l .. .......... ..... ................

13 . . . . A mp......i p e dtr a at to o f op . - ........... ......... ........................... .. .......

............. I............

12Response Spectra at too Of top ...... .... ... ...

~ 1Ibreaiker 1.... .......................... .... ...... ........ ...@. 00Ta~ ' .... . ..In o . ........ ...... . ......... ..

7r .. .....a.. .....e @ 5 .....

...... o.... a l mg .. . .1- ....

...... ...t :................................ ........... . .............. ......

.. ... i +...... .

4,7 ......................... ........... ..........

.. ..................................... III;II

[ 64..

.... ]....... ..........

L. ...., .... .. ................ ... .

4 . ..... ... .... ............ .. .... ... ........... ..

32 ........... ...... .... ... ........ .... ........ ...... ...

1 ........................

. ...................................... ........ ..................... ..............j...

0 "

10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 8 Note: The in-panel spectra is provided for information only. The accelerometer was located in the top of the highest instrument cubicle as shown in Figures 21 & 22 Page 28 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A. 10 OBE Horizontal Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra Three Mile Island Horizontal OBE Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra

(, 5% damping 20 - _ + _____

18 16 .......

. .......... .... ... ..i . . ...... ".. . . . . ....*

. ....- ' ... .i .. . .. . .. .............. ...' ..... ... . .. ' . ..

15 ..................

T hO r e .. mp hIs a d H oi z o n tan .l................... ........................

14 OBE -Amplified Pan.el........................ ..

13 ......... Resp nseS, t~ '~5

~~12 Damiping//

9 ...........

• ,7 . ............  :...... ... .

5 . ...........................

5 ..........-...... ...................

.. ............. ................+ .....

110 100 Frequency (Hz)

" " ,:Figure 9 Note: The in-panel spectra is provided for information only. The accelerometer was located on the top of the highest breaker as shown in Figures 23 & 24 Page 29 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A. 11 I OBE Vertical Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra Three Mile Island Vertical OBE Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra @ 5% damping 20 L-" - _ - -

19 1 8 "*1 .... .....

17 15 L.................. . ................................................ ...... ] .........................

14......

13 1_.... ... ............ Thee M M ii..e eI l n ..b'ertic- ... ..........

............. ... . ......... .. ... i......... ............ ...........

..... i ........ ......., .!ii w12 SSE Amplifiedl In .?a n~ei.. ..

1. R esponse ............ S pect a 4 .t.

r-1013 ........................ ........ Dampin SS.....................

................... . m lfe. ......... ......

.... i............./........................ .........

5 .............

R p...... n e. .S e c r ..t . -5. -.--..-....... ............. . ............... . ........

...i........ ......... - .........

4 ................................................................ ..........- -= .. ...... ............... .........................

0 ..............

.. ......i.................. .....................

. .........i.. .. ..... - ' ......................

i............

i...........

I... ........... ...........

1010 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 10 Note: The in-panel spectra is provided for information only. The accelerometer was located on the top of the highest breaker as shown in Figures 23 & 24.

Page 30 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A. 12 SSE Horizontal Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra Three Mile Island Horizontal SSE Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra

@ 5% damping 20 18 ................-

....... ......... I .............................................

,1176 .. ....... i........ ..... .-.. . ....... . .

....i... i -. . . ...... .. ..... ... .. .. .i.. . ..i . . ..! . . . ..(

.15 Three M ile Island Horizontal .. . ............

14 . SSE Amplified IntPan el ................ L 13 14. Resp' *ise Spectra 5....0/...O............. ... ....

i..... ..............

i ..... ................ i.._.... . . ....

13 ........................................ S e ....... . .... ....

.0/ ......

........ . ./ .................................. *.....................

....... ....J i

-02 Dam' ing 92 ............

. ...-- m n......

.a . .... ..................

[............

...... I... .... .......

8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......

• ......................... ....---..-.....-..- + ............................... ............. .................. .....-.--....

I..............................

00 .

............. i il 4 *................ .............

. ............. ............ T...............................

K .............1....

i...........I............. i..........

3 ............................. ............. ......

........ .............. I 2 ............................... I ....... ............. . .......

i.....

.0 110 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 11 Note: The in-panel spectra is provided for information only. The accelerometer was located on the top of the highest breaker as shown in Figures 23 & 24.

Page 31 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 1 Exelon - TMI Page A. 13 SSE Vertical Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra Three Mile Island Vertical SSE Amplified In-Panel Response Spectra @ 5% damping 20 19 ...............

18 .  ! ..........

17 .......

.... .. ..... i I , ......-ttif 16 .....................

.... e~

• I ...h .......d.a. . .. .... ............

.......... ........ i i... - ........................................................... !...........*-...

15 14 13 02

ý31

.:10 Th e i e s :r an........ i ia . J......... .......

./ !

.9

.28 .....

• 7 S.

. ....... D in p n g i

.......i....

i6 5 ...................

4 3

2 1

0 1 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 12 Note: The in-panel spectra is provided for information only. The accelerometer was located on the top of the highest breaker as shown in Figures 23 & 24.

Page 32 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A. 14 Resonance Search Front-to-Back Horizontal Direction Front-to-Back Horizontal Resonance search of Square-D PZ4 switchgear 25 24 ......................... '. ............. ...... .. ...... .......... .... ..

224 22 2201 . -.

....L / Front-to-BaclkHiirizo'ntal!

20.9 .....

19 18 17

• esonancePZ4 search of Square-D switchgiear .i '

!iii, 16

- 05 13 16 .. . . ... ......

.012 h.1 0 ..........

-6

...... .. .L . . . .. . . .*.... .. .... ... . . .

5 4

2 0

1 6 11 16 21 26 31 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 13 Page 33 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon -TMI Page A. 15 Resonance Search Front-to-Back Vertical Direction Front-to-Back Vertical Resonance search of Square-D PZ4 switchgear 20 19 18 17 16 15 ~Front-to-Back Vertical 14 R~esna~nce seairch o~fSquare- D 13 Ph' switchge r.

, 1372 -0 ......... .. ...........

• ..... ... ...... .... i............

6 ... ..................

IT  : " 7 l'  !................ " .............. ................... .

3.... ........... .......-........................................................ ..........

" .. ......................................+

2. .............

........: I .. ..........

.....I..... .

5 4 . ....'~.... ...

0 1 6 11 16 21 26 31 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 14 Page 34 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page A. 16 Resonance Search Side-to-Side Horizontal Direction Side-to-Side Horizontal Resonance search of Square-D PZ4 switchgear 25 24 23 22 20 4

• i ........... ' '"

17 16 015 - Side.-toSide Horiz ontal Resonance search of Square-D

.12 -- P7>4 switchge: r 6

4 3

2 0

1 6 11 16 21 26 31 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 15 Page 35 of 285

BReactor Exelon -Trip TMISwitchgear QR-06910327-1, PageRev. A.170 Resonance Search Side-to-Side Horizontal Direction Side-to-Side Vertical Resonance search of Square-D PZ4 switchgear 25 24 J 1 23 . ...

22 21 20 198 17 19j 4 Side.......to ....... .Side V ertical-1 ...... ..........

16 ~

eonance se rch of. Squ re-D W-0 ...........!..... .....i.... ..

113186... 16 21.26.31 06 3

S.................... .* J __ ..

( H....

2 '  :  : i f 1 6 11 16 21 26 31 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 16 Page 36 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page B.1I Appendix B Photographs of seismic test setup Page 37 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page B.22 Figure 17 - Front view of the test specimen mounted on the test table.

Page 38 of 285

QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Reactor Trip Switchgear Exelon - TMI Page B.3 Figure 18 - Rear view of the test specimen mounted on the test table.

Page 39 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page B.4 Figure 19 - Test specimen front base welding Page 40 of 285

II Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327- 1, Rev. 0~ Page Exelon - TMI Page B.5 Figure 20 - Test specimen rear base welding Page 41 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page B.6 Figure 21 - Accelerometer mounting on breaker used for calculation amplified in-panel spectra Page 42 of 285

QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Reactor Trip Switchgear Exelon - TMI Page B.7 Figure 22 - Accelerometer mounting on breaker used for calculation amplified in-panel spectra Page 43.of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page B.8 Figure 23 - Accelerometer mounting in the top of the top instrumentation cubicle used for calculation amplified in-panel spectra Page 44 of 285

QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 1 Reactor Trip Switchgear Exelon - TMI Page B.9 I Figure 24 - Accelerometer mounting in the top of the top instrumentation cubicle used for calculation amplified in-panel spectra Page 45 of 285

QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Reactor Trip Switchgear Exelon - TMI Page B.10 Figure 25 - Accelerometer mounted on top of the cabinet for calculation of the natural frequency during resonance testing.

Page 46 of 285

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Exelon - TMI Page C. 1 Appendix C QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Page 47 of 285

QUALIFICATION PLAN FOR SQUARE D REACTOR TRIP SWITCHGEAR FOR THREE MILE ISLAND Qualification Plan QP-06910327-1 Revision 1 October 2008 Page 48 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1I Three Mile Island Page i APPROVAL QUALIFICATION PLAN FOR SQUARE D REACTOR TRIP SWITCHGEAR FOR THREE MILE ISLAND This test plan has been prepared in accordance with the NLI Quality Assurance Program.

Prepared by.:ýý date 101 '0P Verified by date '1 23/

Approved by:. 6\kN9 date toW Page 49 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page ii REVISION HISTORY Revision Description Date 0 Original Issue 8/14/08 1 Revised sections 2.1, 2.3, 2.4.1, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.3.4, 10/23/08 4.4, 4.4.5 & 5.3 Page 50 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page iii TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 SCOPE 2.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.1 Test Specimen 2.2 Traceability of the Test Specimen to the Production Units 2.3 Safety Function 2.4 Interfaces 3.0 PLANT CONDITIONS 3.1 Service Condition 3.2 Functional Parameters 3.3 Margin 4.0 TEST SEQUENCE 4.1 Pre-Radiation Baseline Functional Testing 4.2 Radiation Testing 4.3 Post-Radiation/Pre-Seismic Baseline Functional Testing 4.4 Seismic Testing 4.5 Post-Seismic Baseline Functional Testing 5.0 MILD ENVIRONMENT QUALIFICATION 5.1 Temperature 5.2 Relative Humidity 5.3 Radiation 5.4 Time Temperature Effects 5.5 Operational Cycles 6.0 EVALUATIONS 6.1 Anchor Loads 6.2 Switchgear Qualification 7.0 EVALUATION OF RESULTS 7.1 Anomalies 7.2 Modifications 8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE 9.0 MEASUREMENT & TEST EQUIPMENT 10.0 DOCUMENTATION

11.0 REFERENCES

ATTACHMENT A: Required Response Spectra ATTACHMENT B: Test Anomaly Form Page 51 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page 1 1.0 SCOPE The qualification program consists of one section of Square-D model PZ-4 switchgear with one (1) breaker and instrumentation installed. The switchgear and associated circuit breaker are a replacement for the original Control Rod Drive Breaker Cabinet, breakers and associated relay circuits. The existing switchgear is GE AKD-5 with GE model AK circuit breakers.

Qualification will be performed in accordance with IEEE 344-1987 [10.3], IEEE 323-1983

[10.2] and TMI specification SP-1101-11-250 [10.5]. Seismic qualification will be by proof testing and mild environment qualification will be performed by analysis.

All qualification testing will be performed at the NLI facility in Fort Worth, Texas.

2.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2.1 Test Specimen The test specimen is identified as a Square-D PZ-4 series low-voltage switchgear. The test specimen consists of one (1) 20" wide vertical section with one (1) circuit breaker (the breaker is located in the highest breaker cell available in the vertical section. The breakers is a Square-D Masterpact NT, 800A frame, p/n: NT08N1), associated instrumentation devices and doors are as identified in NLI design drawing 06910327-LD-1, (latest revision).

The switchgear and circuit breaker ratings are as follows:

• Nominal operating voltage: 48OVac.

• Rated current: 800A

" Interrupt Rating: 42,OOOA @ 508Vac

• Nominal control voltage: 125VDC

" UV voltage range: 42 - 84Vac Rev. I

• Shunt trip voltage range: 70 - 140Vdc

• Trip Unit: None

• Nominal Control voltage (charging and closing): 120VAC Rev. I The followini additional control / indication devices are mounted in the switch~ear during testing:

a) Breaker test switch, Electroswitch, series 20K.

b) Undervoltage relay, ABB, catalog number 41 1R0175, 125VDC.

c) Indicating light, Square-D, catalog number Z85AVBG1, 125VDC/120VAC.

d) Auxiliary relay, Square-D, catalog number XUD08OV63, 125VDC.

e) Auxiliary relay, Square-D, catalog number XO1200V02, 120VAC.

f) Fuseblock, Ferraz-Shawmut, AJT type.

g) Fuse, Ferraz-Shawmut, ATDR type.

h) Terminal block, sliding link type.

Page 52 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page 2 2.2 Traceability of the Test Specimen to the Production Units Traceability of the test specimen to the production units will be performed and documented in the qualification report. The following methodology will be used to document the traceability:

• NLI will verify that the production units and test specimen were manufactured in accordance with the same design drawings, procedures, and specifications.

• NLI will perform design reconciliation between the qualification specimen and the production units. Any differences will be evaluated for the impact on the seismic and mild environment qualification.

2.3 Safety Function The safety function of the switchgear is to provide power to safety related loads and interrupt power on a trip signal. Rev. 1 2.4 Interfaces The plant interfaces will be simulated during the testing as follows:

2.4.1 Switchgear Structure The test specimen switchgear structure is a standard Square-D PZ4 section configured the same as the production gear being supplied to TMI. The same components being supplied on the production switchgear will be installed to the cell doors and in the instrument sections to simulate the installed components during all testing.

The test specimen will be one (1) 20" wide section and will be constructed per the same design drawings approved for the production units. The supplied production switchgear for use in the plant will be two (2) vertical sections bolted together. The use of one (1) switchgear section during the qualification testing is considered conservative as follows:

a. The plant installation is two (2) sections bolted together. The larger number of sections in the plant installation is more rigid in the side to side direction than the test specimen With one (1) section resulting in higher in-panel seismic accelerations of the test specimen. Therefore, use of the one section for testing is conservative.

b. The number of switchgear sections has minimal impact on the seismic response of the switchgear in the front-to-back and the vertical directions.

c. The construction of the test specimen switchgear is the same as the switchgear installed in the plant.

d. The test specimen switchgear structure will be welded to a rigid fixture with 1/8" x 3" long fillet welds on 6" centers, front and back of the switchgear. The rigid fixture will be welded to the shaker table. The supplied switchgear will be welded to steel embeds with a 1/8" x 3" long fillet weld on 6"centers, front and back of the switchgear. The TMI anchorage of the supplied gear is equivalent to the anchorage of the test specimen.

Page 53 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page 3

e. The bus is self contained within the switchgear, which is part of the switchgear sections that are being tested.

f. The test specimen switchgear has two instrument cubicles (one in the top cubicle and one in the third cubicle from the top) and two circuit breaker cubicles (one in the second and one in the bottom cubicle from the top). A circuit breaker or dummy weights will be installed in the bottom breaker cubicle to simulate the actual breaker being installed during testing. Rev. I

g. No conduit will be installed at the top of the. test specimen. This is conservative because the conduit provides support for the switchgear when installed.

h. The indicating lights, breaker test switch, undervoltage relay and auxiliary relays are mounted in the top cubicle of the switchgear. This represents the worst case mounting for the components due to amplification of the gear.

2.4.2 Base Mounting The test specimen switchgear will be welded to a test fixture to simulate the mounting embedments in the plant. The weld size will be 1/8" x 3" long fillet welds on 6" centers. The base text fixture will be welded to the seismic shaker table The weld size and locations will be documented in the qualification report.

2.4.3 Electrical Interfaces The electrical interfaces during the seismic testing will be as follows:

• Control wire to operate the breaker and monitor contact chatter will be installed. This wire will be installed in a convenient configuration to accommodate the testing.

0 Power wire and control wire bundles will not be installed and hard conduit will not be installed. This is conservative because these items would provide support at the top of the switchgear and provide support to the switchgear.

Page 54 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. I4 Three Mile Island .Page 4j 3.0 PLANT CONDITIONS 3.1 Service Conditions The plant service conditions are specified as follows [10.5]:

0 Operating time: continuous 0 Design Temperature: 1040 0 Humidity: 10 ý-90% relative humidity 0 Radiation: < 10 4 rad 0 Seismic RRS: (see Attachment A) 3.2 Margin The following margin will be applied to the specified service conditions per IEEE 323-1974.

. Seismic RRS: +10% on acceleration across the frequency range.

Page 55 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page 5 4.0 TEST SEQUENCE All qualification activities specified in this section will be performed on the test specimenl, except as identified in the specific section.

4.1 Pre-Radiation Baseline Functional Testing Pre-irradiation baseline functional testing will be performed on the shunt trip, undervoltage and closing coils prior to seismic testing to verify proper operation of the test specimen coils. The test specimen coils Will be removed from the Masterpact NT breaker test specimens supplied with the test specimen switchgear. Testing and acceptance criteria will in accordance with NLI Verification Plan VP-PZ4, (latest revision), CC#'s 4a, 4b and 4c. The VP is a separate controlled document.

4.2 Radiation Testing Radiation testing will be performed. on the shunt trip, undervoltage and closing coils of the Masterpact NT breakers. The use of one shunt trip, undervoltage and closing coil is acceptable because all breakers are supplied with identical coils.

The test specimens will be irradiated to demonstrate proper operation after being exposed to the specified plant dose of 1.1 E4 (including 10% margin) gamma minimum TID per TMI technical specification SP- 1101-11-250, Rev. 0.

The coils will be irradiated in a convenient physical orientation since gamma radiation exposure is independent of orientation for this type of equipment. All exposure will be gamma radiation since the amount of material degradation by radioactive particles of concern in nuclear power plants is virtually independent upon radiation type. The coils will be irradiated unpowered and unmonitored. The proper operation of the coils before and after the radiation exposure demonstrates proper operation.

4.3 Post-Radiation/Pre-Seismic Baseline Functional Testing Post-irradiation/Pre-seismic baseline functional testing will be performed on test specimen switchgear. The shunt trip, undervoltage and closing coils will be reinstalled in the test specimen circuit breakers prior to seismic testing to verify proper operation. Testing and acceptance criteria will in accordance with NLI Verification Plan VP-PZ4, (latest revision),'

CC#'s I - 13. The VP is a separate controlled document. Rev. 1 4.4 Seismic Testing The test specimen will be subjected to a proof test that is performed in accordance with IEEE 344-1987 [10.3], IEEE 323-1983 [10.2] and the specification SP-1101-11-250 [10.5] to demonstrate seismic qualification to the Required Response Spectra in Attachment A.

Page 56 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page 6 4.4.1 Resonance Search The test specimen switchgear will be subjected to a resonance search. The resonance search shall consist of sinusoidal table motion varying in frequency from 1Hz to 35Hz at a sweep rate of 2 octaves per minute. Table motion shall be controlled to 0.2g maximum and applied separately in each direction. Accelerometers will be mounted on the table and onwthe top of the structure in the horizontal and vertical directions of motion during the resonance search. The resonance search will be performed in the front-to-back and the side-to-side directions. Transmissibility plots will be provided in the qualification report for information only.

4.4.2 OBE and SSE Testing The OBE and SSE testing will be performed as specified in this section.

4.4.2.1 Seismic Table Instrumentation Horizontal and vertical control accelerometers will be mounted to the surface of the shaker table.

The accelerometers time histories will be used to compute the test response spectra (TRS).

In addition to the control accelerometers on the table surface, accelerometers will be installed on

'the test specimen switchgear during the OBE and SSE testing in the following locations;

• Top of the replacement breaker cradle of the test specimen breaker in the highest installed cell. This will document the worst case amplified in-switchgear spectra for the breakers.

" At the top of the highest mounted relay, indicating light, etc. mounted in the top cubicle.

Only the highest component in the switchgear will have the accelerometer mounted above it to record the in-panel spectra as this is the worst-cast amplified in-cabinet spectra for all devices.

Accelerometers will be installed in the horizontal and vertical directions of motion. Time histories from these accelerometers will be used to compute the amplified in-panel response spectra. The amplified in-panel response spectra will be computed in these locations for the front-to-back and side-to-side directions for OBE and SSE testing. The OBE and SSE in-panel response spectra at these locations will be included in the qualification test report.

4.4.2.2 Excitation The NLI dependant biaxial shaker table will be used. A random multi-frequency excitation will be used such that the horizontal and vertical excitation is the same. The duration of each test will be 30 seconds. The OBE tests will envelop the OBE required response spectra contained in Attachment A. The SSE tests will envelope the SSE required response spectra (RRS), contained in Attachment A. The OBE levels are 1/22 of the SSE level. The vertical level is 2/3 of the horizontal level. All OBE and SSE RRS curves are shown in Figures 1 through 4 in Attachment A. All testing will be performed using the horizontal levels, which is conservative.

Page 57 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. I Three Mile Island Page 7 The excitation will consist of 201 randomly phased sinusoids with frequencies spaced uniformly on a logarithmic scale from 1 to 100 Hz. This exceeds the normal requirement of one-third octave frequency spacing per IEEE 344-1987 [10.3].

The lower bound OBE TRS for all runs will be computed at 5% damping and compared against the OBE RRS @ 5% damping for the Three Mile Island Nuclear as shown in Figures 1 & 2. The lower bound SSE TRS for all runs will be computed and compared against the SSE RRS @ 5%

damping for the Three Mile Island Nuclear Plant as shown in Figures 3 & 4.

The lower bound TRS will be plotted at 201 frequency values, spaced evenly on a logarithmic scale from 1 to, 100 Hz.

A 10% margin has been added to the required response spectra per IEEE 323-1983 [10.2].

The TRS will envelope the RRS from 1Hz to 100Hz including any amplification and margin, except as limited by the shaker table stroke at lower frequencies. In such cases that the TRS does not envelope the RRS at lower frequencies, testing will be performed to the shaker table limit at those frequencies, and an anomaly will be written to document and justify this condition.

4.4.3 Test Sequence In accordance with the guidelines of IEEE 344-1.987 the test specimens will be tested in each of four orientations with respect to the excitation, as follows:

• Front to Back and Vertical (FB/V) In phase (00)

" Side to Side and Vertical (SS/V) In phase (90°)

• Front to Back and Vertical (FB/V) Out of phase (1800)

" Side to Side and Vertical (SS/V) Out of phase (2700)

Each set of four orientations constitutes a single test run. Three OBE tests will be performed in each direction for a total of 12 OBE runs. The test specimens will be unmonitored during the OBE testing. The SSE test runs will be performed per Table 1 for the test specimens as described below. The test specimens will be monitored during the SSE tests.

SSE testing is required in the open, closed, and transition configurations to fully test the breaker.

IEEE 344 requires 5 OBE's followed by 1 SSE. In this test program, two of the SSE's are substituted for two of the OBE's. This is conservative, since the SSE seismic levels are higher than the OBE levels. The total number of seismic runs meets the requirements of IEEE 344.

Page 58 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-, Rev. I1 Three Mile Island Page 8 4.4.4 SSE Monitoring Configuration Table 1 Switchgear SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 Breakers installed in Contact Chatter on No chatter > 2ms on any contact.

cells, open and charged Main contacts & Breaker does not change state.

in the connect position. One NO & NC auxiliary UV powered at 90VAC. contact - (OF contact on breaker) 2 Breakers installed in Contact Chatter on No chatter > 2ms on any contact.

cells, closed in the Main contacts & Breaker does not change state.

connect position. One NO & NC auxiliary UV powered at 90VAC. contact - (OF contact on breaker) 3 Transition in the connect Contact state Breaker properly transitions position. UV powered at during seismic event 90VAC.

4 Disconnect position Structural Integrity Breaker remains in switchgear (00 and 90' directions cell.

only) turing SSEt3i testing orthe circuit breaker snail be closed at tue start of tne test. Cycle tne breaker as follows:

• Approximately 5 seconds into test, trip the breaker using 70vdc control Voltage to the shunt trip. Verify all main contacts change state and the breaker opens.

• Approximately 5 seconds after tripping breaker, charge and close the breaker using 90Vac control voltage. Verify all main contacts change state and the breaker closes. Rev. I Notes on test configuration:

• Tripping at 70vdc and charging/closing at 90Vac are the minimum motive power and is considered the worst-case condition. Rev. 1

• The SSE testing in the DISCONNECT position envelops the OBE conditions in the DISCONNECT position.

During SSE4 testing the breaker shall be in the DISCONNECT position. The breaker shall be tested in the 00 and 900 positions only after the completion of SSE 1 through 3. The testing in the DISCONNECT position is more conservative than the TEST position because the breaker is completely disconnected from the cell. This test is not for operability concerns as the breaker is not connected to the switchgear..

Page 59 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page 9 Undervoltane Relay Manufacturer: ABB Part number: 411R0175 SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 De-energized (see note 1) Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 2 Energized (see note 1) Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 3 Transition Contact State (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) Relay transitions and (Energized to de- maintains state energized) Rev. I SSE # Coil Voltage Contact Loading 1 0 N/A 2 90VDC N/A 3 90 - OVDC N/A Note 1:

a) During SSE1 testing the relay will have no control voltage or sense voltage applied.

b) During SSE2 testing the relay will have 90VDC control voltage applied and 90VAC applied to the sense input (ensure that the UV setpoint of the relay is set to actuate at lower than 90VAC).

c) During SSE3 testing the relay will be energized with 90VDC control voltage and 90VAC applied to the sense input (ensure that the UV setpoint of the relay is set to actuate at lower than 90VAC). Approximately 15 seconds into the test run, the 90VAC will be removed to actuate the relay to change states. Rev. I Auxiliary Relay Manufacturer: Square-D Part number: XUD080V63 SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 De-energized Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 2 Energized Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter> 2mS 3 Transition Contact State (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) Relay transitions and (De-Energized to maintains state Energized) Rev. 1 SSE # Coil Voltage Contact Loading 1 0 N/A 2 90VDC N/A 3 0 - 90VDC N/A Page 60 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear. QP-06910327-1, Rev. I Three Mile Island Page 10 Auxiliary Relay Manufacturer: Square-D Part number: X01200V02 SSE# I Functional State Monitorinp- Acceptance Criteria 1 De-energized Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 2 Energized Contact chatter (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) No chatter > 2mS 3 Transition Contact State (1 N.O. & 1 N.C.) Relay transitions and (De-Energized to maintains state Energized) Rev. I SSE # Coil Voltage Contact Loading 1 0 N/A 2 90VAC N/A 3 0 - 90VAC N/A Breaker Test Switch Manufacturer: Electrocswitch Part number: Series 20K SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 Test switch in the Contact Chatter No chatter > 2ms.

NORMAL position Breaker does not change state.

2 Test switch in the UV Contact Chatter No chatter > 2ms.

Trip position Breaker does not change state.

Indicating Lights SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 2 Energized (AC powered) Light remains illuminated No flickering of light 2 Energized (DC powered) Light remains illuminated No flickering of light SSE # Applied Voltage Contact Loading 2 90VAC N/A 2 90VDC N/A Terminal Blocks SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 N/A Structural Integrity Structural integrity is maintained Page 61 of 285

Qualification PlnfrSquare-D RXTrip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. I SThree Mile Island Page I11 Fuse Block with Fuse SSE# Functional State Monitoring Acceptance Criteria 1 Fuse Installed Structural Integrity Structural integrity is maintained 1 Fuse Installed Electrical Continuity No loss of continuity Note: One of each type of fuse block will be monitored.

4.4.5 Acceptance Criteria The following acceptance criteria are applicable to the test specimens:

1. All test runs: Mounting integrity is maintained for all components.

2. All test runs: No physical damage to the test specimen (Components or cell). Rev. 1

3. SSE #1 and SSE #2: No electrical malfunction during test. The breaker does not change state.

4. SSE #1 and SSE #2: No contact chatter.> 2 ms for circuit breaker, relays or breaker test switch.

5. SSE #3: Breaker successfully opens, charges and closes.

6. All test runs: TRS envelops RRS with 10% margin.

7. SSE #4: No structural damage to the breaker or the cell, the breaker does not become dislodged and door remains closed.

8. SSE #3: Relays transition and maintain state.

9. SSE #2: Indicating lights stay illuminated without flickering.

10. SSE #1: Fuse continuity through fuse block is maintained with no loss of continuity.

4.5 Post-Seismic Baseline Functional Testing Baseline functional testing will be performed after seismic testing to verify proper operation of the test specimens. Testing and acceptance criteria will in accordance with NLI Verification Plan VP-PZ4, (latest revision), CC#'s 3 - 12. The VP is a separate controlled document. Rev. I 5.0 MILD ENVIRONMENT QUALIFICATION Mild environment qualification is based on vendor data as discussed below.

5.1 1.Temperature The temperature rating of the switchgear is -30' to 40'C. The switchgear and circuit breakers temperature ratings are greater than the highest temperature per Three Mile Island specification SP-11101-11-250 and are therefore are acceptable for use.

Page 62 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page 12 5.2 Relative Humidity The maximum relative humidity of 90% (non-condensing) is within the design range for the equipment. The non-condensing conditions will not provide added stress on the equipment, therefore the circuit breakers are acceptable for use.

5.3 Radiation The plant specified radiation dose is <104 normal rad gamma.

RG 1.89 addresses qualification of equipment exposed to low-level radiation doses. Numerous studies (EPRI NP-1558, EPRI NP-2129, EPRI NP-4172M, DOR Guidelines Appendix C) that have compiled radiation effects data on all classes of organic compounds show that compounds with the least radiation resistance have damage thresholds greater than 1E4 rad gamma. This includes all elastomers, including teflon. The non-metallic materials of construction of the breaker do not include Teflon or fluorobarbons. Therefore, the lowest damage threshold for all of the non-metallic materials is greater than the plant specified radiation dose and are acceptable for use.

However, for electronic components, studies have shown susceptibility to degradation on metal oxide semiconductor devices at somewhat lower doses of 5E3 rad gamma [ref: documents identified above]. The replacement breaker shunt trip, undervoltage and closing device have an AC/DC inverter and Microcontroller with the integrated Power Supply. The microcontroller monitors the input voltage and when the input voltage exceeds the preset threshold, the activation coil is energized to operate the plunger. After the plunger is activated the microcontroller shuts off the activation coil and energizes the maintenance coil to maintain the plunger in the activated position.

If the input voltage is below the preset operating level of the device, the microcontroller will not energize either coil and the only current draw by the device will be to keep the microcontroller powered. All three devices function the same electronically.

To ensure proper operation of these components at the plant specified dose of 104 or less the shunt trip, undervoltage and closing devices will be irradiated as specified in section 4.2. Rev. I Page 63 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page 13 6.0 EVALUATION OF RESULTS 6.1 Anomalies Any anomalous behavior which is identified during any phase of testing will be documented and evaluated. The evaluation will determine whether the anomaly was due to test conditions or an unrelated cause such as improper test setup. If the anomaly was due to the test conditions, its impact on the safety function of the specimen will be determined. The anomaly disposition will be in one of the following manners based on engineering evaluation:

• No impact on operational requirements or safety function.

• Anomaly acceptable.

• Retest.

• Item not suitable for function/service conditions.

Anomalies which are due to unrelated causes will be identified as such, and the testing continued. Anomalies will be documented using the included Test Anomaly Form 7.1 in Attachment B.

6.2 Modifications Any modifications made to the test specimen during the testing sequence will be fully documented and evaluated.. The impact on the qualification of each specimen will be determined. If the modification has an impact on the qualification or the ability of each specimen to pass the qualification testing, a retest of the test specimen will be performed. If the modification has no impact on the qualification or the ability of the specimen to pass the qualification testing, a retest will not be required. Evaluation of the impact of any modifications will be based on each specimen's safety function and the test parameters.

Any modifications to the test specimen found necessary to maintain seismic qualification will be implemented on the production breakers.

7.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE Project activities will be performed in accordance with the NLI Quality Assurance Program which meets the requirements of 10CFR50 Appendix B, 10CFR21 and ASME NQA-l [10.1].

8.0 MEASUREMENT & TEST EQUIPMENT Measurement & Test Equipment which are used will be controlled by the NLI M&TE program (procedure NLI-QUAL-05, Revision 4). The Qualification Report will identify the M&TE which was used. A statement will be made in the Qualification Report as to whether the M&TE are traceable to NIST or equivalent standards.

Page 64 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page 14 1

9.0 DOCUMENTATION A qualification report will be prepared which summarizes the testing, and presents the results.

The test data sheets, supporting calculations, and any other relevant data will be included in the report, where applicable.

10.0 REFERENCES

1. NLI Quality Assurance Manual, Rev. 6, dated 12/14/07 including applicable Supplements.

2. IEEE 323-1983, "IEEE Standard for Qualifying Class IE Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."

3. IEEE 344-1987, "IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class lE Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."

4. Three Mile Island purchase order 00428587.

5. Three Mile Island specification SP-1101-11-250, "Specification for Procurement of Replacement Control Rod Drive Breaker Cabinet and Breakers", Rev. 0.

6. NLI Verification Plan VP-PZ4 for Square-D PZ-4 switchgear.

7. NLI project 06910327 set of design drawings.

Page 65 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page A.1 Attachment A Required Response Spectra Page 66 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page A.2 Three Mile Island Vertical OBE Required Response Spectra (RRS) (q 5%

(lam ing 5

4 Three Mile Island Vertical OBE Required Response Spec p (RRS) 100/6 I

0 1 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 1 - Three Mile Island Vertical OBE RRS @ 5% Damping Page 67 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page A.3 Three Mile Island Horizontal OBE Required Response Spectra (RRS) ( 5%

5 4

U 1

0 1 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 2 - Three Mile Island Horizontal OBE RRS @ 5% damping Page 68 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. .1 Three Mile Island Page A.4 Three Mile Island Vertical SSE Required Response Spectra (RRS) @ 5%

5 4

2 0u 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 3 - Three Mile Island Vertical SSE RRS @ 5% Damping Page 69 of 285

Qualification, Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page A. 5 Three Mile Island Horizontal SSE Required Response Spectra (RRS) @ 5%

5 4

73

• 0.

1 0

1 10 100 Frequency (Hz)

Figure 4 -Three Mile Island Horizontal SSE RRS g 5% Damping Page 70 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page B.l Attachment B Test Anomaly Form Page 71 of 285

Qualification Plan for Square-D RX Trip Switchgear QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 Three Mile Island Page B.2 TEST ANOMALY Form 7.1 date:

Anomaly #:

A. IDENTIFICATION Test Specimen/Procedure/Equipment:

Test Procedure/Step:

Description:

B. DISPOSITION Prepared by: date:

Reviewed by: date:

Approved by: date:

Page 72 of 285

QR-06910327-1, Rev. 0 Reactor Trip Switchgear Exelon - TMI Page D. 111 Appendix D Qualification test data Page 73 of 285

QR-06910327-1, Rev. 011 Reactor Trip Switchgear Exelon - TMI Page D.211 Pre-Seismic Baseline Functional Testing Data Page 74 of 285

Check off appropriate tests:

N LI IPRE-SEISMIC NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET El POST-SEISMIC El VERIFICATION D OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: 1 Job #: 069-10327 P.E C" Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Square-D Model/Part No. :

- - /

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC # I CC # 1 con't CC # 1 con't Dimensions & Configuration Dimensions & Configuration Dimensions & Configuration Test Temperature NIA N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A NIA N/A ZAI OHLayout of components/ conduit entrance location Locking circuit breakers in place while in the High; and size are in accordance with NLI design connected or disconnected position is installed U Ape- W- drawing: Yes,9 No 0 on the switchgear:

___ ___mw Width: 10. c0r _/_ _.... YesO No f

-o Channel A breaker door is painted Red: All indicating lights are LED type:

Depth: 6&. Yes ] No [. N/A DO Yes 9 No l]

o~ Switchgear has 1 vertical sections, 4 Channel B breaker door is painted Green: Safety related wiring has minimum 6" cubicles high: Yes 0 No 0 N/A

• separation from the other safety related Yes,) No [1 Channel C breaker door is painted Yellow: channels:

Yes ] No E N/A YesU No 0_ N/A)*

Each vertical section has 2 cubicles for Channel D breaker door is painted Blue: Safety related wiring is fed in thermosleve and breakers and 2 cubicles for instrumentation Yes 0 No 0 N/A . is color code to distinguish it from Non-safety Yes V No 0 Control wiring is Rockbestos, SIS, 90 C wire: related wiring:

Yesf No ] Yes [ No 0 N/A Each vertical section has a 15KVA CPT Instrument sections have the following:. aeDCt154F e o[

Square-D Cat15S40F: Yes; No ,1

a. Breaker test sltch with a key lock.

...-- vd5Wq rlQ.G 20t Ring tongue lugs are used on control wiring to

b. UVrelav. - terminal blocks. Yes 0 No 0 2-5

.. 1RO175"- Ground bus color:

Note: Test performed section 1 c. 6 white indicating lights.

d. Auxiliary relays. X(4DCW V6 Circuit breakers have operation counter installed:

Channel A and C only Is

,______,________ YesA NoD)

No[_

/ Circuit breakers have contact indicators:

_*/a Yes,) No D_

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. P.KT._/_.g

_of

• Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5

Check off appropriate tests:

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET IK'PRE-SEISMIC El POST-SEISMIC El VERIFICATION El OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: i Job #: 069-10327 P.E j*y Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Scuare-D Model/Part No.: -.-

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# 3 CC# 4a CC# 4.a Con't Circuit breaker fit up Proper operation of close circuit Proper operation of close circuit Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Breaker fits into breaker compartment Place breaker test switch in NORMAL: Applied jurnper across points TB2 (2&3):

without any binding: Yes,9 No 0 YesX No 0]

Applied voltage to TBA (l&3) (+) and TBA Applied voltage to points TB40 (1&4) for

_ ,___ ____________________Yes N No 0] (2&4) (-): q40 \C. channel A and close breaker A: c 0lUA...

-o= Compartment door closes without 'Shunt Trip Power' and 'DC Power Available'

-4 excessive gap: Yes

• No'] lights illuminate for channel A & C:

0) ormutdcmonnsd o nefr Channel A breaker charges and can be closed:

0 Door mounted components do not interfere with removal of the breaker from Yes [ No [

switchgear cell: 'Shunt Trip Signal Present' 'UV Device Attempt to close channel C breakers.

Yes Nou] Energized' and' 'UV Trip Power' lights are not The channel C breakers will not close:

illuminated for channel A & C YesU No 0 Yes,0 No 0 Applied voltage to TBA (5&6) and TBC (l&2): Open channel A breaker:

_~_ _UAL YesJ4 No 0]

'UV Trip Power' and 'UV Device Energized' Remove voltage from points TB40 (1&4):

lights are illuminated for channel A & C: Yes P No D Remove jumper across points TB2 (2&3):

12 A l Yesl No [] YesJP No []

Ensure the 27A & C relays are reset:

Note: Test performed section 1 Yesa No ] A Attempt to close all breakers.

Channel A and C The breakers will not close: _7-,AU Yesý No ]

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or FPe Pag ,2_ .fFo of Form No.. T-1004,4,. Rev. 5

11 Check off appropriate tests:

NA 1OGTEST DATA SHEET NUCLEAR LOGISTCS INC PRE-SEISMC : POST-SEISMIC 1 VERIFICATION OTHER__

TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: 1 Job #: 069-10327 P.E r Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Sauare-D Model/Part No. :

f /

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# 4.a Con't CC# 4.b CC# 4.b Con't Proper operation of close circuit Proper operation of under-voltage circuit Proper operation of undervoltage circuit Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Applied jumper across point TB2-12 & TB3- Place all breaker test switch in NORMAL: Ensure the 27A, C relays are reset:

Yesd No D Yes No 0 YesP No LD Applied jumper across SSTB7 & 8 and ' Applied jumper across points TB2 (2&3) and Closed A & C breakers:

__, _______'____Applied voltage to point TB40 (2&5) for (TB2-12 & TB3-1): Yes)O No 0 Yes4 No El

"-o channel C and close breaker C:

(aO\JA. Breaker test switch for channel A in the 'UV Trip' position: YesK No []

0 N Channel C breaker charges and can be closed: Applied voltage to point TB40 (1 &4) and TB40 'Shunt Trip Power' light for channel A is not Yes, No [] (2&5) in section 1: !l0k )AC illuminated: Yes,. No 0 Attempt to close channel A breakers. Applied voltage to TBA (1&2) and TBA (3&4) 'UV Device Energized' and 'UV Trip Power' The channel A breakers will not close: in section 1 (channel A&C): 'W)

• iY.- lights are illuminated for channel A:

'Shunt Trip Power' and 'DC Power Available' Yes lZ No 0 Yes No 0 lights illuminate for channel A & C:

Open channel C breaker: Removed voltage from point TBA (5&6) and YesX No [ Yes A No . verify channel A breaker trip: Yes)d No I]

Remove voltage from points TB40 (2&5): 'Shunt Trip Signal Present', 'UV Device 'UV Device Energized', ' LV Trip Power' and Yes X No D Energized' and ' LTV Trip Power' lights are not 'Shunt Trip Signal Present' lights are not Remove jumper across points TB2 -12 & illuminated for channel A & C: illuminated for channel A:

TB3-1: Yes/O No ] YesP No 0 Yes.___ No E_

Applied voltage to TBA (5&6) and TBC (1&2) Breaker test switch for channel A in NORMAL Note: Test performed section 1 in section 1: qO Vposition: Yes P No 11

' UV Trip Power' and UV Device Energized' 'Shunt Trip Power' light is illuminated for Channel A and C "2 . v lights are illuminated for channel A & C channel A: Yes No 11 Yes a No E]

A,, wa Page-,,*_z of Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5 NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. aofr o.-0rv

Check off appropriate tests:

N L NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET ZPRE-SEISMIC L] POST-SEISMIC El VERIFICATION r-l OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: 1 Job #: 069-10327 P.E e Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Square-D Model/Part No.:

J - /

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# 4.b Con't CC# 4.b Con't CC# 4.c Proper operation of under-voltage circuit Proper operation of under-voltage circuit Proper operation of shunt trip circuit Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Applied voltage to points TBA (5&6): Applied voltage to points TBC (1&2): Place all breaker test switches in 'NORMAL':

_____go______ ej'UAL Yes,% No 0 Applied jumper across points SSTB7, 8 and

'UV Trip Power' and 'UV Device Energized' 'UV Trip Power' and 'UV Device Energized' TB2 (2&3) and (TB2-12 &TB3-1): YesA k6" lights are illuminated for channel A: lights are illuminated for channel C:

,o Applied voltage to points TB40 (1&4) and Ba Yesd No [ Yes Y No [ TB40,(2&5) in sectionl:1: 0 AG Breaker test switch for channel C in the 'UTV Reset the target on the 27A, C relays: Applied voltage to TBA (1&2) and TBA Cn Trip' position: Yes P No [I Yes.R No 0 (3&4) in section 1: e O U bC

'Shunt Trip Power' light for channel C is not Removed all control power: 'Shunt Trip Power' and 'DC Power Available' illuminated: Yes I No [D . Yes,2 No 0 lights illuminate for channel A & C:

'UV Device Energized' and 'LUV Trip Power' Removed jumper across point TB2 (2&3),

lights are illuminated for channel C: TB2-12 & TB3-1 No D

'Shunt Trip Signal Present', 'tJV Device N]lEnergized' Yes______o___Yes__YNo and ' UV Trip Power' lights are not Removed voltage from points TBC (l&2) and illuminated for channel A & C verify channel C breaker trips: Yesl No El Yes No [

'UV Device Energized', ' UV Trip Power' and

'Shunt Trip Signal Present', lights are not illuminated for channel C:

Note: Test performed section 1 Yes 0 No El A. A Breaker test switch for channel C to the Channel A and C 'NORMAL' position: Yes A No El -/02.

'Shunt Trip Power' light is illuminated for channelC: /T YesN No __

NOTE: Initial and date after performancpof eaech CC#! Indicate Pass or Fail. Page _/ of AL Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5

Check off appropriate tests:

N L I TEST DATA SHEET 1PRE-SEISMIC NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC El POST-SEISMIC El VERIFICATION OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: 1 Job #: 069-10327 P.E CT Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Sguare-D Model/Part No. :

,'- /

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# 4.c (Con't) CC# 4.c (Con't) CC# 4.c (Con't)

Proper operation of shunt trip circuit Proper operation of shunt trip circuit Proper operation of shunt trip circuit Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Applied voltage to TBA (5&6) and TBC Breaker test switch for channel A to the 5/A - (l&2) 1 i section 1:

in gC _ the 27A relay:position and reset the target on

'NORMAL' Breaker trips when test switch is moved to

'Shunt Trip' position and the 27C relay drops out:

'UV Trip Power' and 'UV Device Energized' Yes ! No ou YesN. No E

• /.lights are illuminated for channel A & C:

-4 'UV Device Energized', ' UV Trip Power' Breaker test switch for channel C to the 0N

____________Yes,* No El'hn rpPwr[n]'CPwr'OML

'Shunt Trip Power' and 'DC Power oiio and

'NORMAL' position n reset ee the h target agtoon Available' lights are illuminated for channel the 27C relay:

Ensure the 27A, C relays are reset: A:

Yes*, No l YesU Nol0 esA NoE Close A & C breaker: 'Shunt Trip Signal Present' light is not UV Device Energized', ' UV Trip Power' Yes ) No D illuminated for channel A: Yes,*1 No 0 'Shunt Trip Power' and 'DC Power Breaker test switch for channel A in the Available' lights are illuminated for channel

'Shunt Trip' position: Yes A No 0 Close the breaker for channel A C: Yes, No El Breaker for channel A close: 'Shunt Trip Signal Present' light is not

'LUV Trip Power' light for channel A is not illuminated for channel C: Yes/W No illuminated: Yes d No [] Yes)O No E1l

'UV Device Energized', " Shunt Trip Power', Breaker test switch for channel C in the Close the breaker for channel C

'Shunt Trip Signal Present' and 'DC Power 'Shunt Trip' position: Yes,] No E Breaker for channel C close:

Available' lights are illuminated for channel 'UV Trip Power' light for channel C is not A: Yes ý No El illuminated: Yess No U Yes R No E Breaker trips when test switch is moved to 'UV Device Energized',' Shunt Trip Power', Remove all control power:,

Note: Test Derformed section I 'Shunt Trip' position and the 27A relay drops 'Shunt Trip Signal Present' and 'DC Power YesV No 0 out: Available' lights are illuminated for channel Remove jumpers across points TB2 (2&3)

No D C: Yes] No l and (TB2-12 &TB3-1): Yeso No El I

NOTE: Initial and date after performanca 00-5 Indicate Pass or Fail. KTL Page of 1-2

" _V571 '290 Form No,, T-1004, Rev. 5

Check off appropriate tests:

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET IEPRE-SEISMIC L'I POST-SEISMIC E] VERIFICATION ['- OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: I Job #: 069-10327 P.E - Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Souare-D Model/Part No.: P'--e7i -

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# 4.d CC# 4.d (con') CC# 4.e (con't)

Proper operation of UV trip timing Proper operation of UV trip timing Proper operation of 27 relay & Shunt trip time Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Place all breaker test switches to the UV trip Place all breaker test switches in the

ýXl! 2' Cr7'O-4W .. QtX )/ position: YesA] No 0] NORMAL position: Yes;K No ]

Place jumpers across points TB2 (2&3) and The opening time for the breakers main poles Remove fuse F3 & F7 in section 1:

___ _ ..--- _______TB2-12 &TB3-1: YesO No El After removal of the 90VAC: Yes!b No 0]

.Applied n Place jumpers across points TB2 (2&3) and Wq0Q voltage acrossOpointsC_ TB5 (1&2): TB2-12 &TB3-1: YesA No []

voltage to TB40 (l&4) and TB40 'UV

'Applied Trip Power' and 'UV Device Energized' Applied voltage across points TB5 (l&2):

_______________(2&5) in section 1: 10 0'C-- light are not illuminated:

Appled

(&2)andTBAApplied oltge o TA voltage to TB40 (1 &4) and TB40 Applied voltage to TBA (1&2) and TBA ] (&) nscin1 r)vA 9e~N (34 secmoveIupr in]).. (Channe pointsX No2 (2(25)i3)ton1 0~ \)C Remove jumpers across points, TB2 (2&3) and TB2-12 & TB3-1: Yes./O No [] Applied voltage to TBA (1&2) and TBA Applied voltage to TBA (5&6) and TBC (3&4) in section I (Channel A&C):

(1&,2)in section 1: clC)*4C_,,eO *;-

Ensure the 27A, C relays are reset: Applied voltage to TBA (5&6) and TBC Yes)4 No D (1&2) in section 1: q o NA1C Close A & C breakers: Ensure the 27A, C relays are reset:

YesA No [ Yes 1 No [

Remove voltage to TBA (5&6) and TBC Close all breakers:

Note: Test performed section 1 (l&2) in section 1: Yes 1 No El YesA No b Channel

_ _ A and C _ _ _ _ ____ _.....__ -__

_____.7A _ _ _ _ _ _ _

-yj -J NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page e of /Q Form No. To1004, Rev. 5

Check off appropriate tests:

NLJ NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET IKIPRE-SEISMIC r-1 POST-SEISMIC L- VERIFICATION El OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: 1 Job #: 069-10327 P.E C Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Sciuare-D Model/Part No.

• 1 4 -/Z 7 Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# 4.e (con't) CC# 4.f CC# 4.f (con't)

Proper operation of 27 relay & Shunt trip time Proper operation of Shunt Trip Signal from Proper operation of Shunt Trip Signal from TMR control system TMR control system Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Remove 90VAC control power to points TBA- Place all breaker test switches to the KB-A relay is pick-up:

VA/ L'70 6LCZ (5&6) and TBC (l&2) in section 1: NORMAL position: Yes). NOD Yes Y No []

Place jumpers across points TB2 (2&3) and KB-C relay did not pick-up:

.// _ Yes). No!] TB2-12&TB3-1: Yes)N3 No!] YesX No CD Remove the jumper across points TB1- 12 &

The opening time for the breakers main poles Remove te ssp o T R After removal of the 90VAC: Applied voltage to TB40 (1&4) and TB40 TB2-.. Yesg No [

co 37 rc (2&5) in section 1: Place a jumper across points TB2-10'& TB2-C 5 11 in section 1 channel C: Yes% No ]

'Shunt Trip Signal Present' light are not Applied voltage to TBA (1&2) and TBA illuminated: (3&4) in section 1 (Channel A&C): qO.)QD Channel C breaker trips and 'Shunt Trip Applied voltage to TBA (5&6) and TBC Signal Present' light is illuminated:

Yes) No ] (l&2) in section 1: nl A"*

.- C* Yes X No Remove all control power: Ensure the 27A, C relays are reset: KB-C relay is pick-up:

__ __ _ _ _Yes, No ] Yes 0 No O Yes No ]

Remove jumpers across points TB2 (2&3) and Close all breakers: KB-A relay did not pick-up;

..TB2-12 & TB3-1: Yes, No ! Yesfl No ] Yes No ]

Replace fuse F3 & F7 in section 1: Place a jumper across points TBI -12 & TB2-Yes,, No 0 1 in section 1 channel A: YesO No!] _ _....

Channel A breaker trips and 'Shunt Trip Note: Test performed section 1 ,Signal Chne AadCAA-A Present' light is illuminated:

CCYesk No K

.1 NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page of la Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5

N L I TEST DATA SHEET Check off appropriate tests:

IPRE-SEISMIC LI POST-SEISMIC I-IVERIFICATION I] OTHER NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: I Job #: 069-10327 P.E I Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Sauare-D Model/Part No. "

Critical characteristic (CC#) GC#f5 CC# 6 CC# 6 (con't)

Trip Free Operation Anti-pump operation Anti-pump operation Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Applied I,,SQ0 Vdc and 420.0 Vac Applied /2,,7, Vdc and /,20,0 Vac Applied 1-,,?.O Vdc and 1a49-0 Vac

,o0 -, control power to the switchgear and charge all control power to the switchgear and charge all control power to the switchgear and charge all breakers. breakers, breakers.

Depress the push to trip button and hold in on Applied and maintain a close signal on the Applied and maintain a close signal on the ID Channel A breaker: Yesfd No 5 Channel A breaker: Yes 20 No [1 Channel C breaker: Yes JU No []

0 Depress the push to close button on Channel A Breaker closes when close signal is applied: Breaker closes when close signal is applied:

_a breaker: YesX No 0 Yes), No I. Yes . No _

Breaker A should not close: Applied a momentary trip signal to the Applied a momentary trip signal to the Yes)3 No [ Channel A breaker while maintaining the Channel C breaker while maintaining the close Applied 1;7 .. O Vdc and IPO. 0 Vac close signal: Yes11V No El signal: Yes A' No D control power to the switchgear and charge all breakers. Breaker trips when trip signal is applied and Breaker trips when trip signal is applied and does not re-close: YesX No 0 does not re-close: Yes Vi No 0 Depress the push to trip button and hold in on Release the close signal and then re-apply the Release the close signal and then re-apply the Channel C breaker: Yes,& No 0 close signal: Yes O No 0 close signal: Yes 06 No 0 Depress the push to close button on Channel C Breaker closes when close signal is reapplied: Breaker closes when close signal is reapplied:

breaker:, YesK No 0 Yes,4 No 0 Yes ; No El Breaker C should not close:

Note: Test performed section 1 Yes, No . A 1C.fir Channel A and C 9-- 3 41-6.

. 2 Jo NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page If of Aq Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5

Check off appropriate tests:

N L I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET PPRE-SEISMIc El POST-SEISMIC, , VERIFICATION OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: 1 Job #: 069-10327 P.E C 71 Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Square-D Model/Part No.

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# 7 CC# 8 CC# 9 Breaker Interlock Breaker UV Trip Voltage Remote Close Test Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A '_'_N/A Rack the breaker for Channel A to Test Applied /12 0Z.Vde and 40,C9 Vac Place all breaker test switches to the 4A4 2M'- g- Z position: YesV No [ Control power to the switchgear: NORMAL position: Yes-d No D rClose breaker: Charge and close breaker for Channel A: Applied voltage across points TB5 (1&2):

es,, No 11 Yes X No 0 U,m

,C._

ID Attempt to rack the breaker to the Reduce the AC control voltage until the Applied voltage to.TB40 (l&4) and TB40 W CONNECT position: YesA No [] breaker trips: YeslJ No 0 (2&5) in section 1: q "1C C-Breaker racking tool cannot be inserted into the breaker unless TRIP button is pushed: Applied voltage to TBA (1&2) and TBA (3&4) in section 1 (Channel A&C):

.. Yes,) No 0 9 pijbC.

Applied /W.C* Vde and /P2,-1 Vac Applied voltage to TBA (5&6) and TBC

.. _Control power to the switchgear: (1&2) in section 1: i c kc.

Rack the breaker for Channel C to Test Charge and close breaker for Channel C: Ensure the.27A, C relays are reset:

position: Yes No 0 Yes g No U YesM No ]

Close breaker: Reduce the AC control voltage until the Attempt to close all breakers:

Yes ) No I] breaker trips: Yes)# No 0 Yes , No Di Attempt to rack the breaker to the Breaker should not close:

CONNECT position: Yes P No 0 Tripped voltage: /L.

i/o/ __. YesW No ]

Breaker racking tool cannot be inserted into Place jumpers across points TB2 (2&3) and Note: Test performed section 1 the breaker unless TRIP button is pushed: A TB2-12 & TB3-1: Yes I No Li Channel A and C Yes"~ No!]_, W 14

____ I~> /43 i V--~ ,e10 2 -Ia I?/*

Page -7 of 1- Form No. T-1004, R,,. 5 NOTE: Initial and date after performance/of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail.

Check off appropriate tests:

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISCS INC TEST DATA SHEET [PRE-SEISMIC-] POST-SEISMIC El VERIFICATION El OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: 1 Job #: 069-10327 P.E C_2 Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Souare-D Model/Part No. :

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# 9 (con't) CC# 10 CC# 10 (con't)

Remote Close Test Proper operation of trip confirm circuit Proper operation of trip confirm circuit Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A N/A N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Attempt to close all breakers: Place all breaker test switches to the Place jumper across points TB 1 (3&4) and Yes 6 No [ NORMAL position: Yes No El TB1 (3&5): Yeswg No El Breakers should not close: 'Train A Trip Confirm Status' light is not YesJ9 No [ illuminated: YesA No El C Place jumper across points TB5 (6&7) Close breaker A:

YesA No 0 Applied voltage to TB40 (l&4) and TB40 'Train A Trip Confirm Status' light is not Close all breakers: (2&5) in section 1: illuminated: YesN) No El Yes /1 No 0 0 A Breakers should close: Open breaker A:

Yes

• No El Applied voltage to TBA (1 &2) and TBA YesX No El Remove jumpers across points TB2 (2&3) (3&4) in section 1 (Channel A&C):

andTB2-12_&_TB3-1: Yes,, Nog0 !7 (' __)

Remove jumpers across points TB5 (6&7) Applied voltage to TBA (5&6) and TBC Close breaker C:

Yes8 No 00 C-t.&L/t J(l&2) in section 1: !t3 0DAC 'Train A Trip Confirm Status' light is not Remove all control power: Ensure the 27A, C relays are reset: illuminated: Yes ,! No 11 YesJg No D Yes,4 No El Place jumpers across points TB2 (2&3) and Close breaker A & C:

,,,_TB2-12 & TB3-1: Yes 9 No D 'Train A Trip Confirm Status' light is illuminated: Yesýg No El A

Note: Test performed section 1 Channel A and C 3/ 'f__ Open breaker A & C:

A YesX No l NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page A9 of _ Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5

Check off appropriate tests:

IN L I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET RPRE-SEISMIC E POST-SEISMIC El VERIFICATION 0 OTHER_

TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: 1 Job #: 069-10327 P.E _ Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Sauare-D Model/Part No.: 1/- 1r Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# I1 CC# 12 CC# 13 CPT operation Megger Test AC Hi-Pot test Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical N/A NIA N/A H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Applied voltage:. Breaker closed position IQ, *Applied M, voltage: Control circuit (DC) Applied voltage: . L.A4._

to the primary side (HI & H2) of the CPT Phase A to Ground hwwlla -

__________ Control circuit (DC) to ground: Phase B to Ground to.";r4 __.

Phase C to Ground ,ta. -

CPT secondary voltage at TB40 (l&4) and Resistance: .- 0 Any insulation breakdown after 1 minute? I TB40 (3&6) in section 1: Breaker closed position

/,____'. 7 2J9,,C1..., Control circuit (AC) to ground: Applied voltage: ag Z .At(..C Phase A to Phase B /AP/,0 .-

Resistance: a f"> V "<Z Phase A to Phase C Phase B to Phase C/j,*,*'

Any insulation breakdown after 1 minuteAi'O Breaker open position A____,-___ Applied voltage: gveo e.~-

Line Ito Load I

... Line 2 to Load 2 Line 3 to Load 3 a/.'23/e,  : Any insulation breakdown after 1 minute?

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page _ff- of L2 Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5

Check off appropriate tests:

NUL I NUCLEAR LOGXSM]S INC TEST DATA SHEET PRE-SEISMic El POST-SEISMIC EL VERIFICATION El OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- PZ4 Rev: 1 Job #: 069-10327 P.E C:T Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

Switchgear, 480VAC, 3 phase, 3W Manufacturer: Square-D Model/Part No.: -

/

Provide Summary of Test Results Check appropriate boxes:

rAlI Items Passed. Discrepancy Report(s): If yes, identify below: CYes ;5No ON/A List S/N or E1)passed below. Qty passed: /

-%A~~ 2U76~ -

46-JG OOL-S 5 V-mo"__ 40_zz;:C'e__ Y SiNs or ID# CC# DR# 7 QAcceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

1Acceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

IAcceptable []Not Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

"C OD CD ElAcceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

0) QAcceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

0 co M

Other (where applicable) 0)

Ca, Record All M&TE Used:

NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date

" /3/gý/0o9" IQ /iXe(*_ 7 "" e-Ar ~ . ..f~ý'e'e Load , ZI 2ir __.

fl]Update M&TE log on omputer Ii KIL X/7at - efre y ae !t!

Initials &2D'ate Performed By: Date NOTES: DttEt jS m AL -6c" 2/zq'o-? Verified by: Date Approved by: (_*9Q * . Date:

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page _a_ of /9 Fom No. T-1 004, Re,. 5

RWj4 ATa -Ti~s-sJ4 o 4v Cot%-S TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section B Results Items Inspected Type: ,z.rn,/- g 7ý4l c(e-VZC 4 ioo-/00-/0' Mfgr/Model: 'e P-"re _5"x0 I Part/Serial Number: ,.Y i 5--oeo-a - 1A7/,oe./-oooo/)

Equipment Used:

,,tlA4I,' r _______¥- A /

7J (Type) " /,,a db r &. oation Due Date)

Results: 1) -Z' ,po-t 44g5- c. - cAt,/ ,,( e4/oeZ /4.e {f'ad-e

- 1,r-f A, ,Ae ..... I-A r ......c.,

'.7.4 -a 2T, tL/Wk. Ar-k6 & ,,,i eg rak e-( ,L/e

-. , 7 J h#..-4eJ~r Results Met Acceptance Criteria: ,.0fes No DNA Discrepancy Report #:

Prepared By: Date: 3-17-69 Reviewed By: Date: 31 g02 Approved By: Date: 3/19(05 Report #: TIR-11411320-I Rev. 0 Client: Various Page 3 of 1/20/09 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I Page 87 of285 ce I9./

Continuation Sheet

-7) Ae APIA 24-1i d~sq e kt,-1rt "J 4hxe(6

) *,, "-e.ri ,o.1 <$.,<s,<_.,.<{oL ,4, *<.,.1,.

A4.47r D& *46, dJ/eedLA &CL33.630 6/24/2003 NLI-PROC-04, Rev. 12 Page 88 of 285 Attachment I

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section A Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation Procedure:

Shunt Trip I. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element' (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33812 also.)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (p/n:. 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33821 also.)

3. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control voltage to 90VDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 four more times.

9. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

10. Charge, close and trip the breaker five times.

11. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

12. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vda to the shunt trip coil.

13. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

4A MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: d,/ (Criteria is

• 5OmS) 4B MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is < 50mS)

• C MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is:< 50* S)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: \ (Criteria is < 62mS)

UV Trip, I. Apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2, Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc. 12r t*c.

4. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page).

8. Repeat steps I through 7 two more times.

Report :TIR- 1I411320-1 Rev. 0 Client: Various Page 1 oFkW- 0?#

1120/09 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I e 5 ~J/c0

~k~

rage

LIV Trip Test

/_.V (5ý: .7/3-T 4- 00/'- 0000 Ib!Test 29dTest 3 rd Tst Acceptance Criteria tA 15____&_____ ______ &1*ms:95OMS A :B 14.Sa7,1*. ___,_______ __,,.,_,7 _-_ *50mS I !k7- A , e -. _1 ______T *5QMS Auxiliary Contact ww "JO" ...... _, .62mS !9 Acceptance Criteria: As stated in procedure steps.

Samplitng Plan: 100% E]NA

Reference:

N/A Release for Testin Inspection Prepared By: -Date:

Reviewed By: Date:

Approved By: Date:

Report #: TIR-11411320-1 Rev. -/0 Client: Various Page,2,f 115109 NLI-QUAL-07, RS Attachmcýt I Paae 90 of 285

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section A Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation aV,* dAJ :.dlg'l-,(D /- 0000/

Procedure:

Shunt Trip I. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33812 also.)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (p/n: 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33821 also.)

3. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control voltage to 90VDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 four more times.

9. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

10. Charge, close and trip the breaker five times.

11. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

12. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

.13. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

ýA MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: ,./A (Criteria is _ 50mS) 4B MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is

• 50mS)

ýC MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is < 50mS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: .(Criteria is < 62mS)

UV Trip

1. Apply a voltage of I05Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2. Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc. i ,

4. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page).

8. Repeat steps I through 7 two more times.

Report #: TIR-I 1411320-1 Rev. 0 Client: Various Page i of 1/20/09 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I Page 91 of 285 91of285Q5 Page -Q W /4)

1W Trin Test 1sT Test 2-"' Test 3 rd Test Acceptance Criteria

ý, ,11 e,. A--6 c- -*, SOmS 499, &V.,.. ,o., .,,..*- _,,, ,,. _ *5OMS Auxiliary Contact ;7. _. ,, ,c_ .62mS 5

Acceptance Criteria: As stated in ptocedure steps..

Sampling Plan: 100% EINA

Reference:

N/A NLI-QUAL-07. R5 Attachmwit I Page 92 of 285 PGe 4'~

N

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section A Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation Procedure:

Shunt Trip

1. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33812 also.)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (p/n: 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33821 also.)

3. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control voltage to 90VDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 7OVDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Repeat steps 3 .through 7 four more times.

9. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

10. Charge, close and trip the breaker five times.

11. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

12. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

.13. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

4A MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: J/A (Criteria is _ 50mS)

OB MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is < 50mS)

OC MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is _<50mS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: _ (Criteria is _<62mS)

UV Trip I. Apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2. Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc. f'y t/c

4. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page).

8. Repeat steps I through 7 two more times.

Report#: TIR-I1411320-I Rev. 0 T Client: Various Page i of -oj 1/20/09 NLI-QUAL-07, K5 Attachment I Page 93 of 285 7 ý-a,6P lo

UV Trip Test

• _ ' _" i_ i _ _ _ _ _ _

IsT Test 2"ý Test 3.d.Test Acceptance

....... 1 Criteria A Contat J 3A_,*ee- I._o, A, . .___ <_5OmS 6A4~C

&7di-34* 72 00 A. 3;.9 5OmS Auxiliaiy Contact _ _ __  ;;6,,~,e

_ t.___

_7 _ _ :562mS Acceptance Criteria: As stated in procedure steps.

Sampling Plan: 100% LINA

Reference:

N/A Release for Testinls pection Prepared By:Dae bc Reviewed By:-Date:

Approved By: Date:

Report#: TIR-11411320-1 Rev. 0O Client: Various Page 2 of,-'- .

115109 NLI-QUAL-07, R3 Attachmtsit I Page R4 of 285

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section A Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements' Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation dV ,l: 0V4 79 -Oo/--4d5.7 Procedure:

Shunt Trip

1. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33812 also.)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (pin: 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33821 also.)

3. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control'voltage to 90VDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 four more times.

9. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

10. Charge, close and trip the breaker five times.

11. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

12. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

13. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

4A MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: , (Criteria is < r50mS)

ý1B MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is - 50mS) 4C MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is - 50mS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: (Criteria is

• 62mS)

UV Trip I. Apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2. Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc. 9/L~

4. Re-apply a voltage of I05Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page).

8. Repeat steps I through 7 two more times.

Report #: TIR-! 1411320-I Rev. 0 T is Client: Various Page 1 of -i 1120109 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I Page 95 of 285 ae

UV Trip Test 15T Test 2 "'Test 3 rd Test Acceptance Criteria

ýA .6. at_____

60b-VAI -. !5OrnS

ýBC ,; o .1 &%A ._ wI &

_,S__ _-*__ _ _ 5OmS

ýc 10_W________ - 46 g~ - ,5OmS Auxiliary Contact , _ _. ___,. !. . ___. _____ _ _62mS Acceptance Criteria: As stated in procedure steps.

Sampling Plan: 100% ElI NA

Reference:

N/A Release for Testin qn.spection Report#: TIR-11411320-1 Rev. 0 Client: Various Page 2 115109 Attacbmbiil I 10 Page 96 of 285

sjis. 2ZV 3tW l,hcI~ooI 41ACV)OOO 4 TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section A Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation Procedure:

Shunt Trip ýVAJ:Z.8*2J4-Oe4- oe00

1. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33812 also.)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (p/n: 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33821 also.)

3. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control voltage to 90VDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

9. Charge, close and trip the breaker one time. lRev. I

10. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

11. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

12. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

• A MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 3p.OMh,._ (Criteria is < 50mS)

OB MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: W.Q2026 _ (Criteria is

• 50mS)

OC MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 31.o7wi5 (Criteria is < 50mS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: 4A.3.,Mqs (Criteria is < 62mS)

UV Trip I. Apply a voltage of i 05Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2, Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc.

4. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page). Perform the test only once unless otherwise specified. 1Rev. I Report #: TIR-11411320-1 Rev. I Client: Various Page I of o 4/9/09 Attachment I Page 97 of 285

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section A Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation Procedure:

Shunt Trin 5/1l.; 2.-981 -00o1- oo,:c2-

1. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33812 also.)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (p/n: 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33821 also.)

3, Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control voltage to 9OVDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

9. Charge, close and trip the breaker one time. Rev. t

10. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

11. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

12. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

4A MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: .36.33rn-s (Criteria is < 50mS)

OB MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 3*.,7,-. (Criteria is < 50mS)

ýC MAIN POLE OPENING TIME:_. 3* 1, _ (Criteria is < 50mS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: 49-.7n rnas (Criteria is < 62mS)

UV Trip I. Apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2, Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc.

4. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page). Perform the test only once unless otherwise specified. Rev. I Report #: TIR-1 1411320-I Rev. I Client: Various Page/of 419)09 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I Page 98 of 285

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section A Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation Procedure:

Shunt Trip S/ : 2.BBOt,.o/-ooo3

1. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33812 also.)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (p/n: 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: $3382 Ialso.)

3. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control voltage to 90VDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

9. Charge, close and trip the breaker one time. Lev. 1

10. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

11. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

12. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

ýA MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 4,.1-ngm (Criteria is _ 5OmS) cjB MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: _____/_ __n (Criteria is < 5OmS) 4C MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 3867*,ons (Criteria is < 50rnS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: S56,S.i-i_ (Criteria is < 62mS)

UV Trip

1. Apply a voltage of I05Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2, Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc.

4. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page). Perform the test only once unless otherwise specified. Rev. I Report#: TIR-11411320-1 Rev. 1 Client: Various Page/of 6 4/9109 3 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Page 99 of 285 Attachment I

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section A Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation Procedure:

Shunt Trip $/g: ,

I. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33812 also.)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (p/n: 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33821 also.)

3. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control voltage to ý90VDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

9. Charge, close and trip the breaker one time. Rev. I

10. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

11. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

12. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

ýA MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: -38.67&,U, (Criteria is !550mS)

ýB MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 33 .cm5 (Criteria is 5 50mS)

ýC MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: ýzs.1-7rr 5 (Criteria is < 5OmS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: 4!8. ,7vw.* (Criteria is < 62mS)

UV Trip I. Apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2, Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc.

4. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page). Perform the test only once unless otherwise specified. Rev. I Report #: TIR-1 1411320-1 Rev. 1 Client: Various Page off 4/9/09 C4 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I Page 100 of 285

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section B Results Items Inspected Type: itri-T-r9 (..a._

Mfgr/Model: S uI,_, *-13 Part/Serial Number: 53. FA) -/ZBt&/n-10oot061 -"k--ooo+-

Equipment Used:

87 *_?

(Type) (M&TE #) (Calibration Due Date)

Results: O0M& "-r--HqFex-p/'T- -P/" , /,.

-. o 6 iezhetyav v

M7, ejC4 r PI ~ ~ & i&A C)L,LNOH.\IA Results Met Acceptance Criteria: E Yes [1 No [DNA Discrepancy Report #: I NA Prepared By: Date: 4"15_.O Reviewed By: Date: '.Iio I

Approved By: Date: q/LI71L _

Report #: TIR-11411320-1 Rev. 1 Client: Various Pageof 4/3/09 '5 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Page 101 of 285 SAttachment I

Continuation Sheet 3).Ak *_ ,' ic*,* Cm . - C -*-X*,A.

1() KI ;k°\Iy

~US~i ~i r~r~AeJAs kX/A.

I I') ~ (' ~ '10 CAIAA.s N~z\~Y~ ~ur~xt

-'mus.

W~r~Tk1 LX~c. Lit-r~p'j ~~x~vXw ~-~i i\ . -r-r P -114)320-1 i~ I I Or "LLQAL 07Z-.v5 A r I~i5~u~sp~~

, . .. . 4 . *. , , .

6/'24/2003 NLI-PROC-04, Rev. 12 Attachment I Page 102 of 285

QR-06910327-1, Rev. 011 Reactor Trip Switchgear Exelon - TMI Seismic Testing Data Page 103 of 285

SEISMIC TEST DATA SHEET Page: of NLI ZUCULAR LOGISTICS INC QP:

S/N:

P/N:

06910327-1 Rev. 1 Test Specimen PZ-4 Test Facility: NLI, Fort Worth, Texas Test Date: 3 -to - 0 ProjectNo: OG7 -(d') 7 Client/Plant: Vi ý4( tlILL_6 . tit S-L4,VA, Test Conditions: Temperature: A/'/ Relative Humidity: ______Barometric Pressure: _ __ __

Specimen

Description:

'5 tv I T,C H 6 S.AP Weight: I (Q ' L-5, Seismic OBE input data file name: q OBE .HST Scale factor: _ Gain: 10 Duration: 30 Sec el .5e, F Seismic SSE input data file name: .14T Scale factor: ' Gain:1 00 Duration: 30 Sec Il)

"0 0 Seismic output data folder name: 0 & q 103 >

03 U,

Control Accelerometer Horizontal M&TE: k " S/N: Calibration due date:

5-'3&71 Control Accelerometer Vertical M&TE: ot"-pJ SN: Calibration due date:

Response Breaker Horizontal M&TE: Og/Ro /) S/N: Calibration due date:

(,.I-a Y Response Breaker Vertical M&TE: /N: 30 (TglOf70$ Calibration due date:

Response Top Cell Horizontal M&TE: I0410 L SIN: Lt ,710 Calibration due date: 1O -&oy Response Top Cell Vertical a*l L--/ Calibration due date:

) -- * -,'?

Response Res. Search Horizontal M&TE: 0 ,Lf S/N: Calibration due date:

Response Res. Search Vertical M&TE: 4Y S/N: Calibration due date:

Form No. SVP-40, Rev. 3

SEISMIC TEST DATA SHEET Page:____ of NLI NUCLEAR lOGISTICS INC QP:

S/N:

P/N:

06910327-1 Rev. I Test Specimen PZ-4 Test Specimen Mounting FASTNERSTORUE. FIXTURKEDESCRIPfTION AND ORIENTATION' V*h. . .- ... . .o...-, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

wFLpS A-LELO(ArEro OM 9;HE FtzakT 4_-o 1 A Cr OF ?IJE 5%--jrcH &Ea(' ____ H02 T 7d, AL XD- 1, -týras F :rk2-'1wR4 CD Cr' 0

CO Form No. SVP-40, Rev. 3

SEISMIC TEST DATA SHEET Page: '3 of '7 NLI NmtlER LOrsT~Sn c QP:

S/N:

P/N:

06910327-1 Rev. I Test Specimen PZ-4 OBE Tests Run Log RunNoTie isory Fie. Test Orentation Name (c9010,7 Results/Comments 1 OBE1.HST 00 2 OBE2.HST 0 StructupI and mounting integrity maintained?

00 OsNo 3 0BE3.IST 4 OBE4.HST .900 5 OBE5.HST 900 6 OBE6.HST 900 7 OBE7.HST 1800 8 OBEM.HST 1800 CD 9 OBE9.HST 1800 0 10 OBEIO.HST 2700 00 U, 11 OBE11.HST 2700 12 OBE12.HST 2700 Form No. SVP-40, Rev. 3

SEISMIC TEST DATA SHEET Page:_ _ Of A NLJ NJUCLEAR LOGISTIS INC QP:

S/N:

P/N:

06910327-1 Rev. I Test Specimen PZ-4 SSE Tests Run Log Run Time6 Test Orientation Test Specien Catter >i2ms Cha6e onat change, A Irae Lights Flicker~ Loss of Fuse Breaker Remains in No. History Functional State Present State: and maintain state Continuity: Switchgear Cell File Name 4RO N/A N/A DYES ,NO N/A 13 SSE.HST 0° Non-Operating DYES ,IqO DYES N/A DYES IWO N/A N/A 00 Operating DYES ,*NO DYES 4O 14 SSE2.HST AYES ONO N/A N/A N/A 0° Transition N/A N/A 1" SSE3.HST W*O N/A K 6 SSE4.HST 900 Non-Operating DYES aNO DYES NO N/A N/A DYES N/A N/A

• O DYES ýNO N/A DYES b0 17 SSE5.HST 900 Operating DYES AYES ONO N/A N/A N/A 900 Transition N/A N/A 18 SSE6.HST 1800 Non-Operating DYES . aqO DYES ýNO N/A N/A DYES MID N/A 19 SSE7,HST ______ ______ ______

-V co 1800 Operating DYES ANO DYES WO N/A UYES 2#O N/A N/A 20 SSE8.HST 0

1800 Transition N/A N/A 'YES DNO N/A N/A N/A 0

21 SSE9.HST co N/A N/A N/A N/A E S F_

22 SSE.HS Front To Back Disconnect N/A Non-Operating DYES '"NO DYES "O N/A N/A DYES A4O N/A .

2.3_ SSE1q.HST 2700 24 ST 2700 Operating DYES *0 DYES 5pkO N/A DYES NO N/A N/A 2700 Transition N/A N/A AYES .* ONO N/A N/A N/A 225 SSE13.HST _______ ______ ______

Side to Side Disconnect N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A XES 28 SSE14.HST Structural and mounting integrity maintained?

. #es []No Form No. SVP-40, Rev. 3

SEISMIC TEST DATA SHEET Page: 5-_ of f NLI N~ucLEaw0ISTnCS INC QP: 06910327-1 Rev. I S/N: Test Specimen P/N: PZ-4 Resonance Search Tests Run Log Run Number - FileName Fil X. SweepRate we eSpecimen Fe cyRne-. Acceierometer Accelerometer Loctin Orientation Orientation 1 FBTH1.HST 2 Octave/Min. 1-10Hz Table Horizontal Front to Back 1 FBTV1.HST 2 Octave/Min. 1-10Hz Table Vertical Front to Back 1 FBCHI1.HST 2 Octave/Min. 1-10Hz Cabinet Horizontal Front to Back I FBCV1.HST 2 Octave/Min. 1-1 0Hz Cabinet Vertical Front to Back

.2 FBTH2.HST 2 Octave/Min. 10-20Hz Table Horizontal Front to Back 2 FBTV2,HST 2 Octave/Min. 10-20Hz Table Vertical Front to Back 2 FBCH2.HST 2 Octave/Min. 10-20Hz Cabinet Horizontal Front to Back 2 FBCV2.HST 2 Octave/Min. 10-20Hz Cabinet Vertical Front to Back

-a 3 FBTH3.HST 2 Octave/Min. 20-35Hz Table Horizontal Front to Back 3 FBTV3.HST 2 Octave/Min. 20-35Hz Table Vertical Front to Back (0

3 FBCH3.HST 2 Octave/Min. 20-35Hz Cabinet Horizontal Front to Back 00 Cn 3 FBCV3.HST 2 Octave/Min. 20-35Hz Cabinet Vertical Front to Back 4 SSTH1.HST 2 Octave/Min. 1-10Hz Table Horizontal Side to Side 4 SSTVI.HST 2 Octave/Min. 1-10Hz Table Vertical Side to Side 4 SSCH1.HST 2 Octave/Min. 1-10Hz Cabinet Horizontal Side to Side 4 SSCV1.HST 2 Octave/Min. 1-10Hz Cabinet Vertical Side to Side 5 SSTH2.HST 2 Octave/Min. 10-20Hz Table Horizontal Side to Side 5 SSTV2.HST 2 Octave/Min. 10-20Hz Table Vertical Side to Side 5 SSCH2.HST 2 Octave/Min. 10-20Hz Cabinet Horizontal Side to Side 5 SSCV2.HST 2 Octave/Min. 10-20Hz Cabinet Vertical Side to Side 6 SSTH3.HST 2 Octave/Min. 20-35Hz Table Horizontal Side to Side 6 SSTV3.HST 2 Octave/Min. 20-35Hz Table Vertical Side to Side 6 SSCH3.HST 2 Octave/Min. 20-35Hz Cabinet Horizontal Side to Side 6 SSCV3.HST 1 2 Octave/Min. 20-35Hz Cabinet Vertical Side to Side Form No. SVP-40, Rev. 3

SEISMIC TEST DATA SHEET Page: &____ of_____

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC QP:

S/N:

P/N:

06910327-1 Rev. I Test Specimen PZ-4 SSE TESTS Specimen Monitoring (Chatter, Voltage, Current Pressure, Function):

ni-Operatin7 O rangTnition Disconnect Chatter on contacts listed on next page Chatter on contacts listed on next page Contacts change and maintain state Structural Integrity Breaker Does not change state Light Illumination Structural Integrity Structural Integrity Fuse Continuity Specimen Contact Loading (Voltage, Current Time Constant L/MO:

No-O pe rating...p i -ition.

Opeati T.Disconnet trQ (0 6Vdc applied to contacts listed on next page 6Vdc applied to contacts listed on next page 6Vdc applied to contacts listed on next page N/A CO 0

50 Specimen Operating Parameters (Voltage, Current. Pressure, Settings as applicable):

.No-pe.rat..g petng . .. ... ransiton..

OVac applied to components 90Vac applied to components 0-90Vac applied to components OVdc applied to components 9OVdc applied to components 0-90Vdc applied to components UV Relay-90Vdc applied 90-OVac Breaker-Breaker tripped with 70Vdc then

..... ___c .harged and closed with 90Vac U'\.- Form No. SVP-40, Rev. 3

SEISMIC TEST DATA SHEET Pap: 2 Of NLI NUCLEARLOGISTICS INC QP:

S/N:

P/N:

06910327-1 Rev. 1 Test Specimen PZ-4 Wiring Schematics Non-operating CO 0n 0o 01 Form No. SVP-40, Rev. 3

SEISMIC TEST DATA SHEET Page: ___ of NLI NUCLEAR LOGSnCS [NC QP: 06910327-l Rev. 1 S/N: Test Specimen P/N: PZ-4 TEST SPECIMEN

SUMMARY

Anomalies N/A o #: Reatso n:_.. _......... ... _________... ___ ...

4 #:___ Reason:

1. .o4'~tq~7-l-- ReasOn: iE r~etr

1. ,1I!o'Q7--Reason:$,2IA*2..h P C~. *trzg,1grEz ._#:,,,._....Reasonl:._______________

1. .03)7-3 Reason: OA.b, I .Ar,. #: Reason:_ __ ___ ___

1. Reason: #: Reason:_.......___ *_ r___ :_ ___

NLI MTE#.......DESCRIPTION .DUE DATE.. NL.TW . DESCRIPT-ION.....U ATE

-u cn Ll4T ~ESpt.1c TA 9 -~ 37 FL LK~6.* Pc ,7-145~ L-2A CqELU-' 'L t4XA F-C-7 M2? -b aS >)--I7o/

FL-vKE c~ SJL C) .sr ~F$ L r -iC;-~7I - \CJ&LTS c_____

____ VEK (Z 7i -=__7 4 91 b(: POL~t,Eg S LiP PLY W L-,4 q7v KI: 0, j.

__ q___ c cpd a .5 i~L4noI-__ .

Form No. SVP-40, Rev. 3

SEISMIC TEST DATA SHEET Pag,.: T' of _

NLI

• NCLEAR LOGISTrCS INc QP:

S/N:

P/N:

06910327-1 Rev..

Test Specimen PZ-4

NLI MTE?. DECRPTO D[UE:DAT.

,. ,I ...

tAc' -/_<_

• "Ar

-u al Co 0 NOTES:

Performed by:__ ____ __ _I

_Date:_

Reviewed by:,,,., Date: .. ,

Verified by:... Dae Form :No. SVP-40, Rev. 3

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. 01 Exelon - TMI Post-Seismic Baseline Functional Testing Data Page 113 of 285

Item Verification Plan Verification Plan #VP-41 IR0175, Rev.0

Description:

UV Relay, single phase, type 27, instantaneous, 60 - 1 10V range, 125VDC control voltage, 2 form C output contacts Manufacturer / Model: ABB / 411 RO 175 Safety Function: To reliably detect undervolta e conditions in Class 1E circuits Critical Characteristic~ Sample" ~> Acceptance~

_______________________Criteria ~ . R....f. M~ethod <

Dimensions & Configuration Normal All dimensions are nominal. 1,2 Measure and record dimensions.

CC #1 Sampling Face Width = 6.88" Face Height = 4.88" Overall Length = 8.25" Relay has a 16 point terminal block on the back. Visual Inspection No evidence of physical damage. Perform visual inspection of the relay for

-u any physical damage.

CD Correct contact configuration 100% 10 - 11, R< 1IQ 1 Measure and record the contact resistances 4ý 0

CC#2 11 - 12, R> 40Mf between the following terminals:

f-o 13- 14, R< IQ 10-11, 11-12, 13-14, 14-15 14 - 15, R> 40Mn Set the time setting to 1. Set the voltage setting to 90. Apply 125VDC to points 7

(+) and 8 (-). Apply 120VAC to points 3 and 4 and reset the relay by depressing the target reset on the front panel.

10 - 11, R:<S1 2 Measure and record the contact resistances 11 - 12, R > 40ME2 between the following terminals:

13- 14, R< 12 10- 11, 11-12, 13-14, 14-15 14 - 15, R > 40M9 Remove the AC voltage applied. Measure 10 - 11, R >40M and record the contact resistances between 11 - 12, R < 1( the following terminals:

13- 14, R>40M:1 10- 11, 11-12, 13-14,14-15 14 -15, R <1(

Page 1 of 4

Verification Plan #VP-411RO175. Rev.0

Description:

UV Relay, single phase, type 27, instantaneous, 60 - 110V range, 125VDC control voltage, 2 form C output contacts Manufacturer / Model: ABB / 41 1RO175 Safet Fi1mntinna Tn rolinhlk rltf-rt iintIrpinlt~ia ,nnclt-nc in 11* 1 P"irP'uni Critical Characteristic Sample ,.*Acceptance

____________________C _____Critenla Ref Method Proper Operation 100% Time for relay to change state 15ms maximum Set the time setting to 1. Set the voltage CC#3 setting to 60. Apply 125VDC to points 7

(+) and 8 (-). Apply 120VAC to points 3 and 4 and reset the relay by depressing the target reset on the front panel.

Remove the AC voltage applied to points 3

& 4 and measure the time between removal of the AC signal until the relay changes state.

(0 CD Cr' Set the time setting to 1. Set the voltage 0

('.3 setting to 110. Apply 125VDC to points 7 (31 (+) and 8 (-). Apply 120VAC to points 3 and 4 and reset the relay by depressing the target reset on the front panel.

Remove the AC voltage applied to points 3

& 4 and measure the time between removal of the AC signal until the relay changes state.

Contact current carrying EQ test Verify that closed contact resistance after current 1 Apply 5A for 30 minutes through a closed capacity specimen application is < 1Q contact. Measure contact resistance after CC#4 test.

Dielectric Strength 100% Resistance _>16MO 3 Withdraw the relay from the case enough to CC#5 break the rear connections. Apply 2200VDC and megger between the points shown on the attached megger data sheet.

//

Verification Plan #VP-41 IRO 175. Rev.0

Description:

UV Relay, single phase, type 27, instantaneous, 60 - I IOV range, 125VDC control voltage, 2 form C output contacts Manufacturer/ Model: ABB/411R0175 Safety Function: To reliably detect undervoltame conditions in Class IE circuits

-Critical Characteristic Sample Acceptance Size Criteria Ref Method

References:

1. ABB Instruction Booklet IE 18.4.7.2, Issue E.

2. Guideline for Sampling in the Commercial-Grade Item Acceptance Process, EPRI, Palo Alto, CA: 1999. Report TR-01 7218-RI

3. V = 1OOOVDC + 2(rated voltage)

R = I OMQ + 102(rated voltage) MN/V.

Tu wD cc CD VP Approval Prepar e Q ' 1 *2 at Reviewed:

• q, 5 Approve$ Y& 102

.dat date date 0

CD, Page 3 of 4

NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET I--PRE-SEISMIC L' POST-SEISMIC 0I DEDICATION r'OTHER VP-411R0175, Rev. 0 TYPE: UV Relay, single phase, type 27, instantaneous, 60 - 110V range, 125VDC control voltage, 2 form C output contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 5 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #

2200VDC TEST VOLTAGE: 2200 VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION Q: 16MO TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (Mp) FROM TO VOLTAGE (V) (MM)

(v) 1 3 10 17 10 Ground 2 3 11 18 11 12 3 3 12 19 11 Ground "u 4 3 Ground 20 12 13 5 4 11 21 12 Ground 0 6 4 12 22 13 14 co c"

7 4 13 23 13 Ground 8 4 Ground 24 14 15 9 7 8 25 14 Ground 10 7 15 26 15 Ground 11 7 14 12 7 Ground 13 8 15 14 8 Ground 15 8 11 16 10 11 Page 4 of 4

A IIII PItop IB 18.4.7-2 Issue E I NSTRUCTIONS Single-Phase Voltage Relays UNDERVOLTAGE RELAYS and OVERVOLTAGE RELAYS TYPE 27, TYPE 27D, TYPE 27H Catalog Series 211 Standard Case TYPE 27, TYPE 27D, TYPE 27H Catalog Series 411 Test Case TYPE 59D, TYPE 59H Catalog Series 211 Standard Case TYPE 59D, TYPE 59H Catalog Series 411 Test Case ABB POWER T&D COMPANY INC.

ALLENTOWN, PENNSYLVANIA Page 118 of 285

IB 18.4.7-2 Single-Phase Voltage Relays Page 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction .................. Page 2 Precautions ................... Page 2 Placing Relay into Service .... Page 2 Application Data .............. Page 3 Testing ....................... Page 13 INTRODUCTION These instructions contain the information required to properly install, operate, and test certain ABB Circuit-ShieldTM single-phase undervoltage and overvoltage relays, Types 27, 27D, 27H, 59D, and 59H. See the section on Testing for single-phase voltage relays covered by earlier issues of this instruction book.

The relay is housed in a case suitable for conventional semiflush panel mounting.

All connections to the relay are made at the rear of the case and are clearly numbered. Relays of the 411B, 411R, and 411C catalog series are similar to relays of the 211B, 211R, and 211C series. Both series provide the same basic functions and are of totally drawout construction; however, the 411B, 411R, and 411C series relays provide integral test facilities. Also, sequenced disconnects on the 411 series pre-vent nuisance operation during withdrawal or insertion of the relay if the normally-open contacts are used in the application.

Most settings are made on the front panel of the relay, behind a removable clear plastic cover. The target is reset by means of a pushbutton extending through the relay cover.

PRECAUTIONS The following precautions should be taken when applying these relays:

1. Incorrect wiring may result in damage. Be sure wiring agrees with the connection diagram for the particular relay before energizing. Important: connections.for the 411 catalog series units are different from the 211 series units.

2. Apply only the rated control voltage marked on the relay front panel. The proper polarity must be observed when the dc control power connections are made.

3. For relays with dual-rated control voltage, withdraw the relay from the case and check that the movable link on the printed circuit board is in the correct position for the system control voltage.

4. High voltage insulation tests are not recommended. See the section on testing for additional information.

5. The entire circuit assembly of the relay is removable. The unit should insert smoothly. Do not use excessive force.

6. Follow test instructions to verify that the relay is in proper working order.

CAUTION: since troubleshooting entails working with energized equipment, care should be taken to avoid personal shock. Only competant technicians familiar with good safety practices should service these devices.

PLACING THE RELAY INTO SERVICE

1. RECEIVING, HANDLING, STORAGE Upon receipt of the relay (when not included as part of a switchboard) examine for shipping damage. If damage or loss is evident, file a claim at once and promptly notify Asea Brown Boveri. Use normal care in handling to avoid mechanical damage.

Keep clean and dry.

Page 119 of 285

Single-Phase Voltage Relays IB 18.4.7.-2 Page 3

2. INSTALLATION Mounting:

The outline dimensions and panel drilling and cutout information is given in Fig. I.

Connections:

Internal connections are shown on page 7. Typical external connections are shown in Figure 2. Important: connections are different for 411B, 411R, and 411C series units compared to 211B, 211R, and 211C units. Control power must be connected in the proper polarity.

For relays with dual-rated control power: before energizing, withdraw the relay from its case and inspect that the movable link on the lower printed circuit board is in the correct position for the system control voltage. (For units rated 110vdc, the link should be placed in the position marked 125vdc.)

Relays rated for use with 120vac control power have an internal isolation transformer connected to relay terminals 7 and 8. Polarity of the ac control power to these terminals need not be observed.

These relays have metal front panels which are connected through printed circuit board runs and connector wiring to a terminal at the rear of the relay case. The terminal is marked "G". In all applications this terminal should be wired to ground.

3. SETTINGS PICKUP (VOLTS)

The pickup taps are labelled by the actual value of'ac input voltage which will cause the relay to operate. Note: operating voltage values other than the specific values provided by the taps can be obtained by means of an internal adjustment potentiometer. See section on testing for setting procedure.

On these relay models there is no adjustment for the differential between the operate and reset voltage values.

TIME DIAL The time dial taps are identified as 1,2,3,4,5,6. Refer to the time-voltage charac-teristic curves in the Application section. Time dial selection is not provided on relays with an Instantaneous operating characteristic.

4. INDICATORS Target:

An operation target is provided. The target is set electronically when the output contacts transfer. The target will retain its indication on loss of dc control power. In order to reset the target, normal dc control power must be present and a

'normal" ac voltage condition must exist; in other words, for an undervoltage relay the voltage must be higher than the set point, and for overvoltage relays, lower.

APPLICATION DATA The ABB Circuit-ShieldTM single-phase voltage relays covered by this instruction book provide a wide range of application including undervoltage protection for motors, over and undervoltage protection for generators, and automatic bus transfer. The relays provide good accuracy and repeatability, and have a flat response over a frequency range of 15 to 400 hertz.

Undervoltage Relay, Type 27, catalog series 211B. 211R. 411B, and 411R:

Typical applications include general purpose undervoltage protection for incoming lines, and initiation of transfer in automatic bus transfer schemes.

Typical external connections are shown in Figures 2.

The relay has an inverse time curve as shown in TVC-605817.

Page 120 of 285

IB 18.4.7-2 Single-Phase Voltage Relays Page 4 Undervoltage Relay, Type 27D, catalog series 211B. 211R. 411B and 411R:

Typical applications include the initiation of transfer in automatic bus transfer schemes.

Typical external connections are shown in Figure 3.

The Type 27D relay has a definite-time characteristic with 2 ranges available: 0.1-1 second and 1-10 seconds, as shown in TVC-605820 and TVC-605821.

Undervoltage Relays, Type 27H, catalog series 211B, 211R. 411B. 411R:

Typical applications include instantaneous undervoltage detection for bus transfer schemes, and for generator intertie schemes. The low range relay is used as a residual voltage detector in motor bus transfer schemes.

Typical connections are shwon in Figure 3.

The relay has an instantaneous operating time as shown in TVC-605819.

Overvoltage Relays, Type 59H and Type 59D. catalog series 211C and 4110:

These instantaneous and definite time overvoltage relays are companions to the Type 27H and Type 27D undervoltage relays, and offer *similar characteristics where overvoltage protection is required.

The time voltage characteristic for the Type 590 is given in TVC-605839. For the Type 59H the maximum operating time above 1.05 times pickup is 16 milliseconds.

Notes on the Use of AC Control Power In general the use of a station battery to provide a reliable source of tripping and control power is preferred. However, many of the relay types described in this IB are available for use with 120 vac control power. The output contacts may be used in a 120 vac circuit or in a capacitor trip circuit where the capacitor voltage is no more than 170 vdc nominal. (Consult factory if the higher rating is required: "-CAP" catalog suffix.) The control power for these relays should never be taken from a capacitor trip circuit as the voltage is too high and the relay will drain the capacitor in the event of loss of AC supply.

Type 27 and Type 27D Undervoltage Relays used with 120 vac control power in the "self-powered" mode, with both signal and control power taken from the same source, will not maintain their timing characteristics if the voltage drops below approximately 65 volts. The relay will trip immediately. If this characteristic is undesirable for a particular application, the Type 27H instantaneous relay should be used followed by a pneumatic timer with time delay on dropout. A contact from the timer would be used to trip. The timer would be picked up by a contact of the Type 27H under "normal" line conditions. With undervoltage or loss of voltage, the timer would time out and close its contact in the tripping circuit. If the voltage loss were momentary, the timer would allow riding through the loss without tripping.

This arrangement thus makes the time delay independent of control power and retains the benefits of accurate voltage sensing provided by the Type 27H relay.

Page 121 of 285

Single-Phase Voltage Relays IB 18.4.7-2 Page 5 SPECIFICATIONS Input Circuit:

Rating: 160V, 50/60 Hz. continuous.

300V, 10 seconds.

Burden: 1.2 VA, 1.0 pf at 120 volts.

Taps: available models include:

Types 27, -27D, -27H : 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110v Types 27D, -27H: 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55v 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30v Types 59D, -59H: 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150v 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90v Differential between Operate and Reset Voltages:

Type 27: less than 0.5 percent.

Types 27D, -27H, ITE-59D, -59H: approximately 3 percent.

Operating Time: See Time-Voltage characteristic curves that follow.

Output Circuit:

Each contact @ 125 Vdc: 30 ampere tripping duty.

5 ampere continuous.

0.3 ampere break.

Operating Temperature Range: -30 to +70 deg. C.

Control Power:

Models available for 48/125 vdc @ 0.08 A max.

48/110 vdc @ 0.08 A max.

24/ 32 vdc @ 0.08 A max.

120 vac 50/60 Hz. @ 0.08 A.

Allowable variation: 24vdc nominal: 19- 29 vdc 32vdc 25- 38 48vdc 38- 58 11 Ovdc 88-125 125vdc 100-140 120vac 95-135 vac Tolerances: Operating Voltage: +/- 5% These tolerances are based on the Operating Time: +/-10% printed dial markings. By using the calibration procedures given later in this book, the relay may be set precisely to the desired values of operating voltage and delay with excellent repeatability.

Repeatability: variation in operating voltage for a 10 volt variation in control voltage: 0.2 volt, typical.

variation in operating voltage over the temperature range 20-40 deg C: 0.5 volt, typical.

Dielectric Strength:

1500 vac, 50/60 Hz., all circuits to ground.

Seismic Capability:

More that 69 ZPA biaxial broadband multifrequency vibration without damage or malfunction. (ANSI C37.98-1978)

Page 122 of 285

IB 18.4.7-2 Single-Phase Voltage Relays Page 6 6.8-D5 HOLES29536.6 DIMENSIONS AIIE *MM 9.156 FRONT VIEWSI(vr 8.25 l61j.O62 DIMENSIONSIIUoU, ARE INCH 6

fl* fllfl flsf4fl3 zf~f 8 5 4 3 2 I 6.62F -- 6 16 80.V STUD NUMBERS (SACK VIEW) STUD NUU"EKI' (SAGa VEW)

.68.28 16 point block 12 point block Figure 1: Relay Outline and Drilling F .4I (

Figure 2: Typical External Connections Note: Refer to Internal Connection Diagrams and Contact Logic Chart on page 7 to select the specific terminal numbers for the output contact ("X" and "Y") for the particular relay being used. Additionally, a table has been provided on page 15 as a cross-reference.

Page 123 of 285

Single-Phase Voltage Relays IB 18.4.7-2 Page 7 INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS AND OUTPUT CONTACT LOGIC The following tables and diagrams define the output contact states under all possible conditions of the measured input voltage and the control power supply. "AS SHOWN" means that the contacts are in the state shown on the internal connection diagram for the relay being considered. "TRANSFERRED" means the contacts are in the opposite state to that shown on the internal connection diagram.

FOR DIAGRAM 12D211C Condition Contact State Cat. Series: 2llRxxx5 211Bxx55 21lCxxx5 Normal Control Power As Shown As Shown As Shown AC Input Voltage Below Setting Normal Control Power Transferred Transferred Transferred AC Input Voltage Above Setting No Control Voltage Transferred As Shown As Shown FOR DIAGRAM 16D210A Condition Contact State Cat. Series: 411Rxxx5 411Bxx65 411Cxxx5 Normal Control Power Transferred Transferred As Shown AC Input Voltage Below Setting Normal Control Power As Shown As Shown Transferred AC Input Voltage Above Setting No Control Voltage As Shown Transferred As Shown Single-Phase Voltage Relays Sinigie-Phase Voltage Relays 2D211C Std. + 163)216A Case Std. or Test Case

$5 5 041 $3 2 1 O6 O5$'4$3 02 01

____IS______

T9 Aý1 100151 0 S1 T1 T

Page 124 of 285

IB 18.4.7-2 Single-Phase Voltage Relays Page 8 CHARACTERISTICS OF COMMON UNITS The following chart gives the basic characteristics of various Circuit-ShieldTM single-phase voltage relays from their catalog number breakdown. The relay catalog number will always be found on the front panel of the relay. Do not interpret this chart as a way to specify a relay for purchase as not all combinations are available. For new projects refer to current catalog pages for the latest listing of standard relays, or contact the factory.

2 11 R 1 1 7 5 BASIC FUNCTION AND PACKAGE STYLE 211 Single-phase voltage relay in Standard Case 411 Single-phase voltage relay in Test Case RELAY TYPE AND FUNCTION

-- - TYPES --- ---- ,----v rv l a e e a B TYPES 27, -27D, -27H Undervoltage Relay with Type II contact logic C TYPES 59, -59D, -59H- Overvoltage Relay D TYPE 27/59 Under/Overvoltage Relay (obsolete, replaced by 410D series)

E TYPE 59G Ground Voltage Relay (obsolete, replaced by 21OE/410E series)

L TYPE 27/59 Undervoltage Relay (obsolete, replaced by TYPE 27N)

Q TYPE 27G 180 Hz. Undervoltage Relay (obsolete, replaced by 410Q)

R TYPES 27, -27D, -27H Undervoltage Relay with Type I logic TIME DELAY CHARACTERISTIC 1 Inverse Time Delay Characteristic 4 Definite Time Characteristic 1-10 second range 6 Definite Time Characteristic O.1-1 second range O Instantaneous Characteristic VOLTAGE TAP RANGE 1 Standard Range: Types 27,-27D,-27H = 60-110v; Types 59,-59D,-59H = 100-150v; Type 59G = 3-18v 2 Low Range: Types 27D,-27H = 30-55v; Types 59D,-59H = 60-90v, Type 27G = 1-12v; Type 59G = 1-6v 5 Special Range: Types 27D,-27H = 15-30v CONTROL VOLTAGE 6 120 vac 7 48/125 vdc OUTPUT CONTACTS 9 24/ 32 vdc 1 2 normally open 0 48/110 vdc 5 2 form C Page 125 of 285

Single-Phase Voltage Relays IB 18.4.7-2 Page 9 TIME-VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS is 18 14 12 10, 8

6 4

2 a

0 0.2 0.4 0.8 0.8 1.0 MULTIPLES OFTAP SETTING ABB Circuit-ShieldT" TYPE 27 UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY INVERSE (Medium Time)

MAY 1, 1975 r TVC-- 17 Page 126 of 285

TIME-VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS TIME-VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS 12.0 1.2 6

10.0 1.0 TIME tO TAPS TIME TAPS 8.0 to I 0.s 5 to)

_a 6.0 w

0.6 4

GO I 4 0,

= r--

4.0 0.4

_ _ 3 3

2 2.0

____________1 2 04 0.2

__ _ I _ _ 1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.0 1.0 1.2 0 0.2 0.4 aB as 1.0 1.2 MULTIPLES OF TAPSETTING MULTIPLESOFTAPSEnINN co II ABB Circuit-ShieldTM TYPE 27D UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY ABB Circuit-ShieldTN TYPE 27D UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY DEFINITE TIME (Medium)

DEFINITE TIME (Short)

Catalog Series 211x4xxx and 411x4xxx Catalog Series 211x6xxx and 411x6xxx o0 MAY 1, 1975 Tvc-60s820 MA 1, 197VC-03

OVERVOLTAGE RELAY TIME-VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS TIME-VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS ABB Circuit-ShieldTM TYPE 59D OVERVOLTAGE RELAY DEFINITE TIME 1.2 50 VOLTAGE TAP SETTINGS 1.0 GD,.70.8D.90, 100. 110 30.35.40.40.5 TIME I C13 TAMS 30 0.6 CD U

4 0

z, U U 20 00 0.4 c,'

MAXIMUUM _____

3 10 2 _______ c o al 02 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 0 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 MULTIP*ES OF TAPSETTIKS NU IPLESOF 1 SETTIN1

• I SHORT TIME Catalog Series 211C6xxx and 411C6xxx ABB Circuit-ShieldTN TYPE 27H UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY TIME DELAY AS SHOWN Instantaneous MEDIUM TIME Catalog Series 211C4xxx and 411C4xxx MULTIPLY TIME DELAY SHOWN BY 10 MAY 1. 197S I TVC 005880 MAY 1, 1975

IB 18.4.7-2 Single-Phase Voltage Relays Page 12 TESTING

1. MAINTENANCE AND RENEWAL PARTS No routine maintenance is required on these relays. Follow test instructions to verify that the relay is in proper working order. We recommend that an inoperative relay be returned to the factory for repair; however, a schematic diagram, and in some cases a circuit description, can be provided on request. Renewal parts will be quoted by the factory on request.

There are many earlier versions of these single-phase voltage relays which are now obsolete and have been superseded. If you have a relay which has its front panel stamped with Instruction Book IB 18.4.7-2, but which is not covered by this Issue E of the book, you should request Issue D from the factory. Also see paragraph 6 on obsolete relays.

211 Series Units Drawout circuit boards of the same catalog number are interchangible. A unit is identified by the catalog number stamped on the front panel and a serial number stamped on the bottom side of the drawout circuit board.

The board is removed by using the metal pull knobs on the front panel. Removing the board with the unit in service may cause an undesired operation.

An 18 point extender board (cat 200X0018) is available for use in. troubleshooting and calibration of the relay.

411 Series Units Metal handles provide leverage to withdraw the relay assembly from the case. Removing the unit in an application that uses a normally closed contact will cause an operation. The assembly is identified by the catalog number stamped on the front panel and a serial number stamped on the bottom of the circuit board.

Test connections are readily made to the drawout relay unit by using standard banana plug leads at the rear vertical circuit board. This rear board is marked for easier identification of the connection points.

A test plug assembly, catalog 400X0002 is available for use with the 411 series units. This device plugs into the relay case on the switchboard and allows access to all external circuits wired to the case. See Instruction Book IB 7.7.1.7-8 for details on the use of this device.

2. HIGH POTENTIAL TESTS High potential tests are not recommended. A hi-pot test was performed at the factory before shipping. If a control wiring insulation test is required, partially withdraw the relay unit from its case sufficient to break the rear connections before applying the test voltage.

3. BUILT-IN TEST FUNCTION Be sure to take all necessary precautions if tests are run with the main circuit energized.

The built-in test is provided as a convenient functional test of the relay and assoc-iated circuit. When you depress the button labelled TRIP, the measuring and timing circuits of the relay are actuated. When the relay times out, the output contacts transfer to trip the circuit breaker or other associated circuitry, and the target is displayed. The test button must be held down continuously until operation is obtained. For the undervoltage relays, the timing is equivilent to that for a complete loss of voltage.

Page 129 of 285

Single-Phase Voltage Relays IB 18.4.7-2 Page 13 4, ACCEPTANCE TESTS Follow calibration procedures under paragraph 5. On inverse or definite-time relays, select Time Dial #3. For undervoltage relays check timing by dropping voltage from 120 to 0 volts. For overvoltage relays check timing by increasing voltage to 150%

of pickup. Tolerances should be within +/-5%for pickup and +/-10%for timing.

Calibration may be adjusted to the final settings required by the application at this time.

5. CALIBRATION A typical test circuit is shown in Figure 3. Connect the relay to a proper source of control voltage to match its nameplate rating and internal plug setting for dual-rated units. The ac test source should be harmonic-free. Sources using ferro-reso-nant-transformer regulators should not be used due to high harmonic content.

For relays with time delay, the time-dial tap pin should be placed in position #1 (fastest) when checking pickup and dropout voltages. The voltage should be varied slowly to remove the effect of the time delay from the voltage measurements.

Pickup may be varied between the fixed tap values by adjusting the internal pickup calibration potentiometer. For 211 series units the 18 point extender board provides easier access to the internal pots. Place the voltage tap pin in the nearest value and adjust the internal pot, repeating the test until the desired operating voltage is obtained. If the internal pot has insufficient range, move the tap pin to the next closest value and try again. Similarly the time delay may be adjusted higher or lower than the values shown on the time-voltage curves by means of the internal pot.

The internal calibration pots are identified as follows:

Relay Type Pickup Time Delay Type 27, Type 59 RIO R25 *

• Note: RT can also be used as a secondary Types -27D, -27H R13 R38 means of adjustment.

Types -59D, -59H

6. OBSOLETE UNITS The chart on page 8 indicates that certain of the 211 and 411 series single-phase voltage relays have been replaced by improved versions. The following gives a quick reference to the instruction books for the newer units. Should you need the instruc-tion book for the earlier units that are nameplated to call for IB 18.4.7-2, request issue D from the factory.

Type 59, Inverse-time Overvoltage Relay:

Catalog series 21lCllxx replaced by 210C0lx5 and 41OC11x5 series, see IB 7.4.1.7-1.

Type 59G, Ground Overvoltage Relay:

Catalog series 211E replaced by 210E and 410E series, see IB 7.4.1.7-9.

Type 27G, Third Harmonic Undervoltage Relay:

Catalog series 211Q replaced by 410Q series, see IB 7.4.1.7-9.

Type 27/59, Under/Overvoltage Relay:

Catalog series 211D replaced by 410D series, see IB 7.4.1.7-1.

Types 27/59A, -27/59D, -27/59H Under/Overvoltage Relay:

Catalog series 211L replaced by Type 27N, catalog series 211T and 411T, see IB 7.4.1.7-7. (Note: the 211L relays were not used for overvoltage protection; they were undervoltage relays with adjustable pickup and dropout voltages.)

Page 130 of 285

IB 18.4.7-2 Single-Phase Voltage Relays Page.14 SELECTOR 10'3LTMETER IIIfI TIMER SET I I/'

TST3URE 1 S53URCE 2 * -n l~

T ME I

TIMEIR SET 2 TEST SET DC ECNTROL O 05 q 3 02 Oi INV, T TU)JJT 0I6 svis'&H T1" i 12:='I 10 09 T 1 T2 Figure 3: Typical Test Connections Notes: Test connections shown for a 411C or 411R series unit. For other relays consult the Internal Connection Diagrams and Contact Logic Chart on pg 7 before selecting the output contact to use to stop the timer.

If the test set voltage level adjustment does not have sufficient resolution to properly check and set the pickup voltage, then insert a Variac (adjustable autotransformer) and external voltmeter between the test source and the relay input terminals.

Page 131 of 285

Single-Phase Voltage Relays IB 18.4.7-2 Page 15 Additional Notes on Figure 2. Typical External Connections:

The note with Figure 2 indicates that the terminal numbers associated with the output contact labelled "X" and "Y" in the diagram must be selected by referring to the internal connection diagram and contact logic chart for the particular relay being considered. As a cross-reference in this selection, the following table lists the terminals associated with the normally-open contacts that close for tripping for the basic relay function. In other words, for an undervoltage relay, the contacts that close for undervoltage, and for an overvoltage relay the:contacts that close on over-voltage. An "x" in the catalog number represents any digit ("don't care").

Undervoltage Relays Contacts that CLOSE on Undervoltage

• Cat Series 211Rxxx5 5 - 6 11 - 12 211Bxx65 5 -6 11 - 12 411Rxxx5 11 - 12 14 - 15 4llBxxx5 11 - 12 14 - 15 Overvoltage Relays Contacts that CLOSE on overvoltage

• Cat Series 211Cxxx5 1 - 2 9 - 10 411Cxxx5 11 - 12' 14 - 15

• (Contact closure is after appropriate time delay.)

Page 132 of 285

Addendum to IB 18.4.7-2 Issue E Instructions Single-phase Undervoltage Relays for 25Hz These instructions cover special versions of the Types 27D and 27H Single-phase Undervoltage Relays for use on 25 Hz. systems or in variable frequency applications. Information in the basic book, IB 18.4.7-2 Issue E applies to these relays with the exception of the operating time curves.

These relays have been modified to provide operation at frequencies down to 20 Hertz with improved performance compared to the "standard" units of the Type 27H series. The main improvements are in the reduction of contact chatter and in the stability of the operating voltage threshold over the frequency range of 20 to 60 Hz.

The variation in ac operating voltage threshold is less than 5% of tap over the frequency range of 30 to 60 Hertz for any tap setting, and less than 10% over the range of 20-60 Hertz. (at constant temperature and constant dc supply voltage.)

Type 27H, Instantaneous Relay, with tap range 30-55vac, designated by catalog numbers of the form 411 R02x5-TF, where "x" represents the digit that determines the dc control voltage rating.

The operating time curve TVC-605819 shown in the basic instruction book does not apply to this model. These relays have an operating time of 150 milliseconds or less.

Type 27D, Definite Short-Time Relay, with tap range 30-55vac, designated by catalog numbers of the form 411 R62x5-TF, where "x" represents the digit that determines the dc control voltage rating.

Operating time curve TVC-605820 shown in the basic instruction book does not apply to this model. These relays have the following nominal operating times for a 25Hz signal:

Time Dial # 1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 Operating Time (sec) 0.20 0.30 0.37 0.54 0.70 1.0 Rev 1: 7/12/2000 Power Automation and Protection Division Allentown, PA 18106 USA Tel: 610-395-7333 Page 133 of 285

Check off appropriate tests:

N LI NUCLARLOGISICS INC TEST DATA SHEET OPRE-SEISMIC tý POST-SEISMIC IM VERIFICATION 0 OTHER TESTDATAFOR:VP- q9J19071'Z Rev: C) Job#: 2 .- j/j527 P.E_. Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

4,-Sne Qe_

• e Manufacturer: -A Model/PartNo.": .4JIMO176" Critical characteristic (CC#) "CC# I CC# 2 CCO# 3 Dimensions & Configuration Correct contact configuration Proper operation Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical V V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Face width= Set the time setting to1.1. )

S/N: -..

.'* :5

-,2. Contact resistance between the following terminals:

Face height (10-11 1 ): &.5-<z (11-12): b-1OA '2-- Set the voltage setting to 60.ieJý D/C: 2,, /(13 - 14 ):,. (14 -15):

Overall length Set the time setting to 1.

• Apply voltage to points 7(+) and 8(-): 12 5"1i

.________ *,Set the voltage setting to 90. __-_ _ _--

Relay has a 16 points terminal Apply voltage to points 7(+) and 8(-): ) .15UeLA-- Apply voltage to points 3 and 4: I/O 13 block on the back? Apply voltage to points 3 and 4: 1Z d) 2eA R rl Reset the relay? 1 q- Reset the relay?.

Contact resistancdbetween the following terminals:-,

(10-11):II , 7_ f( 11-12): 4* ,*A-t 2 Remove voltage AC point 3 and 4, Any evidence ofphysical (13-14):I (14 -15):

damage? ARemove AC voltage? Time relay to change state: I;m 5 e_.

A________ Contact resistance between the ollowing terminals: . r,., S (10-11): :.* ,,*.5"Z ((11-12): 0.3.<2.

_-_ _....0 (13-14): OA. (14-15):

............ /

(2Th)qtq iDe*:

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page../__or_ýK- Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5

Check off appropriate tests:

NLI NUCLEAR L*OGITICS INC TEST DATA SHEET DPRE-SEISMIC ,, POST-SEISMIC P VERIFICATION 0 OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- kilI101l1'* Rev: 0 Job#: (6 - 10VI P.1 CT CatlD#: N/A Itemn

Description:

11 ga ,U; S.Wje ?*,aSe. Manufacturer: - B Model/PartNo.: j I Igor.y-Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# 3 (con't) CC #4 Proper operation Contact current carying capacity Test Temperature N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A Set the time setting to 1. Closed contact resistance (before):

Set the voltage setting to 110. e, D/C: , I Apply current: S",t, 7Apply voltage to points 7(+) and 8(-): W.e CC Time: A .,mimej, Apply voltage to points 3 and 4: (X0 U2 c-- Closed contact resistance (after):

Reset the relay? I __ _

Remove voltage AC point 3 and 4.

Time relay to change state: e&- / '1

_ _ )/07_ _ L~x

--- &YA),

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page .. 2 -of.7__ Form No. T-1 004, Rev. 5

MEGGER DATA SHEET E PRE-SEISMIC ED POST-SEISMIC DEDICATION -'OTHER.

VP-41 IRO 175, Rev. 0 TYPE: UV Relay, single phase, type 27, instantaneous. 60 - I IOV range, 125VDC control voltage, 2 form C output contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 5 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL # ,e-,'q1_g_0321 =-9 TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION 92: I6MQ TEMPERATURE: ,,_

TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MQ) FROM TO VOLTAGE (V) (Me) 1 3 10 17 10 Ground 2 3 11 18 11 12 3 3 12 19 11 Ground 4 3 Ground 20 12 13 5 4 11 21 12 Ground (0

00 6 4 12 22 13 14 CA, 7 4 -13 23 13 Ground 8 4 Ground 24 14 15 9 7 8 25 14 Ground 10 7 15 26 15 Ground L L 11 7 14 12 7 Ground 13 8 15 14 8 Ground 15 8 11 16 10 11 AN ,1

/7X1 1- 4fte-ý kt

ýYl

Check off appropriate. tests; LNid TEST DATA SHEET O3PRE-SEISMIC E POST-SEISMIC 1I VERIFICATION E0 OTHER NUCLSAAR L*GStCS WiC A/llfz.O'/5 Rev:. 0_ Job #: pj5-J P.E CL Cat ID#:

TEST DATA FOR: VP-uV & . S jagie_ PASet, Manufacturer: Model/Part No.: _411 0oI1"5 Item

Description:

I im iii w-

• w Jd 1 /

Provide Suninar of Test Results Check appropriate boxes:

13Ali Items Passed,. Discrepancy Report(s): If yes, identify below, rDYes 21No ON/A List S/N or ID passed below. Qty passed: I 7 [.OF- -4.2, '7aA'e 1 )

• < /AlI' ~ f~7 -1 S/Ns 6r ID# CC# DR# FAcceptable [Not7Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

Q3Acceptable- ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

rAcceptable .'ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

OAcceptable 3NotAcceptable Initials/Date by PE:

Co QAcceptable 'Not Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

I 0

Other (where applicable)

. 'A1.

Record All M&TE Used:

Cal. Due Date NI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date NLI MTE# Description

B:' Dt:

,lUpdate M&TE log -on computer- Da-

,Itals*,zate Performed By:

NOTES:

Verified by: ___,_ ____"__,_, Date:

/ *(

Aporoved. by:. Date:

Form No. T- 1004, Rev NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page of

Item Verification Plan Verification Plan #VP-ZB5AVBG1, Rev.0

Description:

Indicating Light, 24V - 120VAC/1 1OVDC Manufacturer / Model: Square-D / ZB5AVBG1 Safety Function: To provide reliable visual indication in Class 1E circuits Critical Characteristic Sample .Acceptance. '~~

Size; , ~

__Crteri ~Ref -<Method j 3 Dimensions & Configuration Normal All dimensions are nominal. 1,2 Measure and record dimensions.

CC #1 Sampling Face Diameter = 1.12" Body Height = 1.63" Body Depth = 1.26" Visual Inspection Light lens is white.

CO No evidence of physical damage. Perform visual inspection of the relay for CD any physical damage.

CD 00 Indicating light is an LED light. Visual Inspection OD (Jn Correct contact configuration 100% Light illuminates with 21.6VAC applied. 1 Apply 21.6VAC to the light.

CC#2 The light illuminates with 140VAC applied without Raise the AC voltage to 140VAC.

damage.

The light illuminates with 19.2VDC voltage applied. Remove the AC voltage and apply 19.2VDC to the light.

The light illuminates with 140VDC applied without Raise the DC voltage to 140VDC.

damage.

Remove the DC voltage.

Dielectric Strength 100% Resistance > 16MQ 3 Apply 2200VDC and megger between the CC#3 points shown on the attached megger data sheet.

Verification Plan #VP-ZB5AVBG1, Rev.0

Description:

. Indicating Light, 120VAC/I I VDC Manufacturer / Model: Square-D / ZB5AVBGI Safety Fuinetin- Tn nr-nvic1e reliable, yic~ii inciirntinn in C1 IT**1 t-irr-iit*

Critical Characteristic Sample Acceptance

____________ Size Cteria C Ref Method

References:

1. Square-D 9001CT0001 Pushbutton's and Operator Interface Specifier's Guide, dated 4/2005.

2. Guideline for Sampling in the Commercial-Grade Item Acceptance Process, EPRI, Palo Alto, CA: 1999. Report TR-0 17218-RI

3. V = 1000VDC + 2(rated voltage)

R = 10MO +,10 2(rated voltage) MON.

"0 VP Approval Prepared  : -2 Reviewed: ,5 *I/14Approved:. a

.ate -'/f date date 0

CO1 Page 2 of 3

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET -- PRE-SEISMIC 11 POST-SEISMIC El DEDICATION -OTHER VP-ZB5AVBGl, Rev. 0 TYPE: Indicating Light I 120VAC/1 1OVDC CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 3 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION E: 16MQ TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (Me) FROM TO VOLTAGE (V) (MM) 1 1 Case 2 2 Case

-u CD 01 Il Page 3 of 3

ProductData Sheet ZB5AVBGI Pilot Light Light Module, Type: XB5, Size: 22mm List Price $57.00 USD Availability Non-Stock Item: This item is not normally stocked in our distribution facility.

Technical Characteristics UL Listed File Number E164353 CCN NKCR - CSA Certified File Number LR44087 Class Approvals 321103 - CE Marked Catalog Reference Number 900lCT0001 Enclosure Rating NEMA 1/2/3/4/4X/12/13; IP65 Head Type Round Light Module Supply Voltage 24/120V Light Module Type LED (White)

Terminal Type Screw Clamp Size 22mm Type XB5 Shipping and Ordering Category 22469 - Push Buttons, Accessories, 22mm, ZB4, ZB5, ZBE Discount Schedule Article Number 785901613374 Package Quantity 1 Weight 0.15 lbs.

Availability Code Non-Stock Item: This item is not normally stocked in our distribution facility.

Retumability N As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this document.

Gt.:.e a :-: O1i'-O; § :01:28

@ 2009 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Sch-neider VElectric

Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated General Characteristics Environment Protective treatment "TH" standard version Ambient air temperature Storage -40 to +158 'F (-40 to +70 °C) around the device Operation -13 to +158 'F (- 25 to +70 'C) unless otherwise stated Electric shock protection Conforming to IEC 60536 Class II Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65, unless otherwise stated IP 66, for booted push button heads Conforming to UL 50 and CSA C22.2 No. 94 Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12, and 13, unless otherwise stated Resistance to 1,015 psi (70 x 105 Pa-70 bars); distance: 3.94 in (0.1 m) high pressure cleaner Temperature: 131 *F (55 'C)

Mechanical shock protection Conforming to EN 50102 Non illuminated heads: IK 03 Illuminated heads: IK 05 Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-4, EN 60947-1, JIS C 4520, CE UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14 Product certifications UL Listed, CSA Certified Standard single contacts with screw clamp terminals: A600; Q600 Double contacts with screw clamp terminals: A600; 0600 File E164353(* File LR 44087

• File E164353 Contacts with "Quick-Connects": A300; 0300

\_-/CCN NKCR iClass 3211 03 "UCCN NKCR 2 Light modules with screw clamp terminals JOYSTICK XD4-PA: A600; R300 UL Recognized, CSA Certified Standard single contacts for plug-in connector: A300; R300 Standard single contact for printed circuit board: B300; R300 BV, RINA, LROS, DNV, GL (pending) Standard single contacts and double contacts with screw clamp terminals Terminal identification Conforming to EN 50005 and EN 50013 Characteristics of Operators and Contact Blocks Mechanical Characteristics Contact operation N/C or N/O Slow break Positive operation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 All functions Incorporating a N/C contact are positive opening operation Appendix K Operating travel Push button Changing N/C state: 0.06 in (1.5 mm)

(to change electrical state) Changing N/O state: 0.11 In (2.6 mm)

Total travel: 0.17 in (4.3 mm)

Operating force Push button Changing N/C state: 0.79 ibf(3.5 N)

Changing N/O state: 0.85 Ibf (3.8 N)

Additional contact Single N/C contact: 0.45 Ibf (2 N)

(extra to change state) Single N/O contact: 0.52 Ibf (2.3 N)

Double contact N/C: 0.76 lbf (3.4 N)

Double contact N/O: 1.12 lbf (5 N)

Double contact N/C + N/O: 1.03 lbf (4.6 N)

Emergency stop with N/C + N/O Standard push-pull: 10.12 lbf (45 N)

Maintained mushroom head operators Trigger action push-pull: 11.24 lbf (50 N)

Momentary mushroom head operators Standard turn to release and key release: 8.99 Ibf(40 N)

Trigger action turn to release and key release: 9.89 lbf (44 N)

Operating torque Selector switches N/O contact: 1.24 lb-in (0.14 N-m)

(to change electrical state) Additional contact (extra) N/O contact: 0.44 lb-in (0.05 N-m)

Mechanical durability Push button Momentary 5 million (in operating cycles) Double-headed I million Push-push 500,000 to release Selector switches Non-illuminated 3 million Illuminated 1 million Toggle switches 500,000 Emergency stop push button 300,000 Joystick I million Standard blocks 5 million Low power switching power blocks 500,000 Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6. Frequency (2 to 500 Hz): 5 gn Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 All functions except mushroom head push buttons-Half sine wave acceleration 11 ms: 50 gn Half sine wave acceleration 18 ms: 30 gn Mushroom head push buttons-Half sine wave acceleration 11 ms: 10 gn 75 04/2005 © 1999-2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Page 142 of 285

Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated General Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Cabling capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Screw and captive clamp terminals 2

Min: 1 x 24 AWG (0.22 mm ) without cable end 2

1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm ) for linking 2

Max:2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm ) with cable end 2 x 14 AWG without cable end Cross headed screw (Pozidrive type 1) slotted for fiat 4 and 5.5 mm screwdriver Typical torque: 0.8 N.m (8.55 lb-in)

Maximum torque: 1.2 N.m (10.7 lb-in)

Contact material Silver alloy (Ag/Ni) Standard single and double blocks with screw clamp terminals Blocks for plug-in connector Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection Gold flashed (Ag/NiVAu) Low power switching contact blocks with screw clamp terminals Low power switching contact blocks for printed circuit board connection Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Standard blocks with screw clamp terminals: 10 A (gG cartridge fuse conforming to IEC 60269-1)

Blocks for plug-in connector: 4 A (gG fuse cartridge conforming to IEC 60269-1)

Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection: 4 A (gG cartridge fuse conforming to IEC 60269-1)

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Standard blocks (single or double) with screw clamp terminals:

Ui = 600 V,degree of pollution 3 Blocks for plug-in connector: Ui = 250 V,degree of pollution 3 Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection:

Ui = 250 V, degree of pollution 3 Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Standard block (single or double) with screw clamp terminals: Uimp = 6 kV withstand voltage Blocks for plug-in connector: Uimp = 4 kV Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection: Uimp = 4 kV Rated operational AC supply: Standard blocks (single or double) with screw clamp terminals:

characteristics Utilization category AC-15 A600: Ue = 600 Vac and le = 1.2 A or Ue = 240 Vac and le = 3 A Conforming to or Ue m 120 Vac and le = 6 A IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Continuous thermal current = 10 A Blocks for plug-in connector:

A300: Ue = 120 Vac and le = 6 A or Ue = 240 Vac and le = 3 A Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection:

8300: Ue= 120 Vac and le = 3 A or Ue = 240 Vac and le = 1.5 A DC supply: Standard single or double blocks with screw clamp terminals:

Utilization category DC-1 3 0600: Ue = 600 Vdc and le = 0.1 A or Ue = 250 Vdc and Ia = 0.27 A or Ue = 125 Vdc and le = 0.55 A Continuous thermal current = 2.5 A Joystick XD4-PA:

R300: Ue = 125 Vdc and le = 0.22 A or Ue = 250 Vdc and le = 0.1 A Blocks for plug-in connector:

R300: Ue = 125 Vdc and le = 0.22 A or Ue = 250 Vdc and [a = 0.1 A Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection:

R300: Ue = 125 Vdc and la = 0.22 A or Ue = 250 Vdc and le = 0.1 A Rated operational AC supply: Low power switching contact blocks with screw clamp terminals or for printed circuit board characteristics Resistive load connection:

Max:24 Vac Max:0.1 A Electrical durability AC supply for 1 million operating cycles, utilization category Standard blocks for screw clamp terminals:

Conforming to AC-1i 120 Vac 2 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 24 Vac 230 Vac Appendix C 4A 3A 2A Operating rate 3600 operating cycles/hour. Load factor: 0.5 Standard double blocks with screw clamp terminal or plug-in connector:

24 Vac 120 Vac 230 Vac 3A 1.5A 1A DC supply for 1 million operating cycles, utilization category Standard single blocks for screw clamp terminals:

DC-13 24 Vdc 110 Vdc 0.5 A 0.2A Standard double blocks with screw clamp terminal or plug-In connector:

24 Vdc 110 Vdc 0.4A 0.15 A Electrical reliability Failure rate Conforming to fEC 60947-5-4

- In clean environment Standard blocks:

at 17 V end 5 mA, ?, < 10-8 at 5V and 1 mA, X.<10-6 Low power switching contact blocks:

- at 5Vand I mA, X < 108 6

- In dusty environment Low power switching contact blocks only: at 5 V and 1 mA, X < 10-76

© 1999-2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 04/2005 Page 143 of 285

Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated General Characteristics Characteristics of Light Modules Mechanical Characteristics Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 - Frequency (12 to 500 Hz): 5 gn Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Halt sine wave acceleration 11 ms: 50 gn Half sine wave acceleration 18 ms: 30 gn Electrical Characteristics Cabling capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Screw and captive clamp terminals 2

Min: 1 x 24 AWG (0.22 mm ) without cable end 2

1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm ) for linking 2

Max: 2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm ) with cable end Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Direct supply pilot light modules (BA 9s bulbs):

Ul = 250 V, degree of pollution 3 Pilot light modules with protected LED: Ui = 250 V, degree of pollution 3 Pilot light modules with transformer: Ul = 600 V,degree of pollution 3 Rated Impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Direct supply pilot light modules (BA 9s bulbs): Uimp = 4 kV withstand voltage Pilot light modules with protected LED: Uimp = 4 kV Pilot light modules with transformer: Uimp = 6 kV Specific Characteristics of Protected LED Light Modules Only Voltage limits Nominal voltage 24 V: 19.2 to 30 Vdc; 21.6 to 24.6 Vac 120 V: 102 to 132 Vac 240 V: 195 to 264 Vac Current consumption Applicable to all colors 24 VacNdc supply blocks: 18 mA 120 Vac supply blocks: 14 mA 240 Vac supply blocks: 14 mA Service life At nominal voltage and 100,000 hours0 days <br />0 hours <br />0 weeks <br />0 months <br /> at an ambient temperature of 77 'C (25 1C)

Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 2/MkV Resistance to fast transients Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 10 VIM electromagnetic fields Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 8/6 kV electrostatic discharges Electromagnetic emission Conforming to EN 55011 Class B Specific Characteristics of Hour Counters and Annunciators Voitage limits Hour counter and annunciator +/- 10% of nominal voltage Current consumption Hour counter XB5DSB: 7 to 15 mA SXB5DSM:

XB5DSG: 8 mA 8 mA Annunciator 5 mA 77 04/2005 © 1999-2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Page 144 of 285

Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated Pilot Lights and Light Modules Pilot Light Heads For Use with Body Shape of Head Comprising Light Color of Lens Catalog Number Source Type Protected LED only White ZB5AV013 ZB5AV053 Green ZB5AV033 Red ZB5AV043 Yellow ZB5AV053 Blue ZB5AV063 Protected LED only White ZB5AV013S Fresnel lens Green ZBSAV033S Red ZB5AV043S ZB5AV01 Yellow ZB5AV053S Blue ZBSAV063S For BA 9s Incandescent White ZB5AV01 bulb, neon or LED only Green ZB5AV03 Red ZB5AV04 Yellow ZBSAV05 Blue ZBSAV06 Clear ZB5AV07 Protected LED only White ZB5CV013 Green ZB5CV033 Red ZB5CV043 Yellow ZBSCV053 Blue ZB5CV063 Z85CV063 Complete Bodies (Mounting Collar + Light Module for BA 9s Incandescent Bulb, Neon or LED)

Description 1 Light Source 3 Supply Voltage Catalog Number Screw clamp terminal connections V Direct supply BA 9s bulb 2.4 W max. u 250 Vac or Vdc ZBSAV6 Not included E Transformer type BA 9s incandescent 110-120 Vac, 50/60 Hz ZB5AV3 1.2 VA, 6 V secondary bulb included 230-240 Vac, 50/60 Hz ZB5AV4 400-50 Hz ZB5AV5 440-480 Vac, 60 Hz ZBSAV8 550-600 Vac, 60 Hz ZB5AV9 M Bulb can be ordered separately, see page 101, or add voltage (24, 120) for bulb supplied.

Complete Bodies (Mounting Collar + Light Module with Protected LED)

ZB5AV3 Light Source Supply Voltage Color of Light Source Catalog Number Screw clamp terminal connections V Protected LED White ZBSAVBI t Green ZB5AVB3 24 Vac or Vdc Red ZB5AVB4 Yellow ZB5AVB5 Blue ZBSAVB6 White ZB5AVG1 ZB5AV- Green ZB5AVG3 110-120 Vac Red ZB5AVG4 Yellow ZB5AVG5 Blue ZB5AVG6 V For "Quick-Connect" version, add 3 to the end of the part number (Example: ZB5AV63) (1 x 0.250" or 2 x 0.110").

88

© 1999-2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 04/2005 Page 145 of 285

Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated Dimensions Heads for pilot lights, with light source Protected LED Incandescent, neon or LED ZB5AVO03 ZB5AV0° Common face view ZB5CVO03

]:-:

28.5 30 Bodies for pilot lights, screw clamp terminal connections Protected LED Direct supply, for BA 9s bulb Transformer type, for BA 9s bulb ZB5AV- ZB5AV6 ZB5AV°, AV°D° li, L , c- u 1.26 126 inches Dual Dimensions 32 32 mm Bodies for pilot lights, plug-in connector Protected LED ZB5AV-4 Heads for illuminated push buttons, momentary, light source LED ZB5AW3.3 ZB5AW1l3 Common face view ZB5AW9°3 ZB5AA.8 ZB5AL°8 1.28 Q01.12 0O1'.12 32.5 30 028.5 028.5 ZB5AW5.3 ZB5CW3°3 ZB5CW1°3 Common face view 1.44 Q01.16 3P 36.5 34 029.5 Incandescent or neon ZB5AW3°3 ZB5AW1I3 Common face view Dual Dimensions inches mm 31.5 3.

Heads for double-headed push buttons with pilot light ZB5AW81 -3, ZB5AW83.-3 ZB5AW82-3 ZB5AW84-3 Common ace view 107 04/2005 © 1999-2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Page 146 of 285

Check off appropriate tests:

iN L I NUCL*AR LOgISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET OPRE-SEISMIC 9 POST-SEISMICOJ VERIFICATION 0OTHER-____

TEST DATA FOR: VP- Z/ 54..z*I RVv:_ . Job #: bd e"/0327 P.E C Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

a931 4ý a-WLh mua'ar  !ý e J Model/Part No.;: ~ f Critical characteristic (CC#) CC#. CC#2 Dimensions and Configuration Correct contact configuration Test Temperature N/A N/A Test surface: V-Vertical V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A S/N: 9/63*7-7,i Face Diameter = Apply voltage: ,/, t¢9C D/C: ndo_- Body Height -- .,3 Light illuminates? yeA

-I ci Body depth 1,.26 Raise the AC voltage to: i41Ol 24(

Light illuminates?

Any evidence of physical damage?/t'  !

Any damage? /t/1 9 Indicating light is an LED light? .eye. Remove AC voltage?

A .... Apply DC voltage: Jf,a L,2lc LLight

___________ Illuminates? ,.

Raise the DC voltage to: 42,.0 ldr tk: (1 .... Light illuminates? V Any dama e? A11 Remove DC voltage? OIL ..

Ar Page -/ of_ .& Form No. T-1004, Rev; 5 NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fai /

J

Check off Appropriate Test NL NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC I MEGGER DATA SHEET [1 PRE-SEISMIC Eý POST-SEISMIC ,A DEDICATION F-aOTHER VP- ZB5AVBG1 Rev. 0 Job #: e9.-_/6Vf27 Item

Description:

Indicating Light, 24V-120VAC/ I10VDC Manufacturer: Square D P.E. CT CC# 3 SERIAL# -,,9 _,/e9,37-7"S/ ModellPart# ZB5AVBGI TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION D): > 16MQ TEMPERATURE: I.-*

MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE

1. FROM VOLTAGE(V) (Mr)

TO I I Case ,AL  :,*" V-5,2 2 2 Case .ifly - "-

_k co 0n co

Check off appropriate tests:

IN L I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET OPRE- .SEISMIC POST-SEISMICMi VERIFICATION 01 OTHERý_____

TEST DATA FOR: VP--X ,/5,4Vb*/ Rev:..ý Job #: i 1 /93';?7 P.E C-.7 Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

aZ /7

?/ /Q

" aO ufhctter: 2 Model/Part"No.; ;.43-4A3 "4 Critical characteristic (CC#) CC#l CC#2 Dimensions and Cotifiguration Correct contact configuration Test Temperature N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (ifapplicable) N/A N/A SIN: r ', ./7- 2 Face Diameter= ,// Apply voltage:  !/.

n D/C: WQ-- Body Height 4, 53 4,' Light illuminates? .01 Body depth = , .'c " Raise the AC voltage to: /.VO f 2t t)I$" S CA\ C-"T 5(f(O0 Light illuminates?

Any evidence of physical damage? A/10 Any damage? /6.

Indicating light is an LED light? Remove AC voltage? fe PA A Apply DC voltage: I9/Q

~L~ A1;/& Light illuminates? Ua Raise the DC voltage to: -/1/96&c

,d  : 0/4). ,Light illuminates?

Any damage? ,10'e

_________________ ________________________Remove DC voltge rM NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or 1 page'.3 of ý_ Form No. T-1 004, Rev.

Check off Appropriate Test MEL IGGER DATA SHEET I PRE-SESMIC POST-SEISMIC DEDICATION nOTHER NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC VP- ZB5AVBG1 Rev. 0 Job #:L ,L-ji Item

Description:

Indicating Light, 24V-120VAC/11OVDC Manufacturer: Square D P.E. CT CC# 3 SERIAL# __________7-___7_*Model/Part# ZB5AVBG1 TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION fn: > 16Mn TEMPERATURE:

MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE

1. FROM VOLTAGE(V) (Mf*)

TO 1 1 Case 2L'O0L7C ./*L/

2 2 Case .1,00 2 )C  ;,-/000 02 "0 ZaLIi Co C..

-4 4 .4- 4.

4 4 .4. 4.

4 4 -t 4.

-I 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 .4- 4.

A3 7'

Check off appropriate tests:

N L NUCLrwAR LOGISTMC I

INC TEST DATA SHEET OPRE-SEISMIC M POST-SE.SM**, VERIFICATION OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- _-5_-_-_*-'/ i Rev:. Job#: *5 -/05?7 137 P.E CatID#: N/A Item

Description:

2d4_,q 44 a-/f44hO3/4Mufactw~er; Model/Part No.: .A9j/46 Critical characteristic (CC#) CC#1 CC#2 I__

_Dimensions and Configuration Correct contact conflguration Test Temperature N/A N/A*-

Test surface: V-Vertical V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A S N:Femj?*l.7 Face Diameter= / Apply voltage:  ?/. ,

D/C: . Body Height . /. 4? Light illuminates? /pt j //

Body depth- (R,2 Raise the AC voltag to: 1440L,74C DLMS 9S C,-(

• I"o Light illuminates? tA Any evidence of physical damage?/'O

... ..... . An y d a ma g e? , /

/

Indicating light is an LED light? w Remove AC voltage?

Apply DC voltage: i L/e t,,

__ _ _ _ _ Light illuminates?-

Raise the DC voltage to: t/--A_

tl  : IA22A) Light illuminates?

Any damage? , /

__ _~_ _ _ Remove DC voltage? Ve.l NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Page r of A Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5

Check off Appropriate Test NM NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC I EG hGER DATA SHEET PRE-SEISMIC POST-SEISMIC DEDICATION E:OTHER VP- ZB5AVBG1 Rev. 0 Job #:*ejW-,/f2ý Item

Description:

Indicating Light 24V-120VAC/10VDC Manufacturer: Square D P.E. CT CC# 3 SERIAL# 9O-' 7 " 5- .- Model/Part# ZB5AVBGI TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION fl: 16MfC TEMPERATURE:

MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE

1. FROM VOLTAGE(V) (Mo)

TO 1 1 Case 50oo

' i/C _________-

2 2 Case 5 Q CD z.

-o NI A.]?!

Check off appropriate tests:

IN L I NUCLEAR LOGISTICSINC TEST DATA .SHEET OPRE-SEISMIC b1 POST-SEISMICMI VERIFICATION 0OTHER____

TEST DATA FOR: VP- Z-*ff'*/Y aRev:_. .a Job #: P.E Rsar-/O..7 C7 Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

w Ay- hLMnfan'r Model/Pail No.;: 3 I~4 Critical characteristic (CC#) CC#1 CC#2 Dimensions and Configuration Correct contact configuration Test Temperature N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A S/N: Face Diameter= . Apply voltage: _ ce.

L?/,

D/C: ne -- . Body Height /. 4' Light illuminates?

A/I Body depth = /. *4 Raise the AC voltage to: /,t0/L74a(

(t *14, G-1 *Light illuminates?

Any evidence of physical damage? /0/'2 Any damage? ,,/

Indicating light is an LED light? to Remove AC voltage?

Apply DC voltage: 1 l" , M)C 0TL Light illuminates?

Raise the DC voltage to: /*1e 6 "

n ((),4 W04: Light illuminates? lle, Any damage? 4/'C Remove DC volta e?

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fai4.& I/ Page 7' of 4 Form No. T-1 004, Rev. 5

Check off Appropriate Test LI cMEGGER DATA SHEET 0 PRE-SESMIC [r POST-SEISMIC DEDICATION DOTHER NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC VP- Z135AVBG1 Rev. 0 Job #: Item

Description:

Indicating Light, 24V-120VAC/I1OVDC Manufacturer: Square-D P.E. CT CC# 3 SERIAL# 9/62,'7-7"*( Model/Part# ZB5AVBG1 TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION 0: > 16Mg TEMPERATURE:

MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE

1. FROM VOLTAGE(V) (MQ)

TO 1 1 Case 's-wa/ x, 2 2 Case _ _ _ _ _

co I cJJ

-1 ____________ .1______________ 1 __________________ 1. __________________

t 1*

-4. .1. 4 4.

-+ + 4

-7 ý4,

Check off appropriate tests:

IN L I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET OJPRE-SEIS9MIC Rf POST-SEISMICM~ VERIFICATION EJOTHER____

TEST DATA FOR: VP- -- t/35"a,/" Rev: 0 Job#: 64?-_/0 __ P.E ..7 Cat M#: NIA Item Description; 2 . Model/Part No.: 4"3 Moi-/,'OtManufactuw: V, 4/

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC#1 CC#2 Dimensions and Configuration Correct contact configuration Test Temperature N/A N/A Test surface: V-Vertical V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A S/N: t*i'32/ -7".*rF Face Diameter= /1 Apply voltage: o *_

D/C: V, _ Body Height= Z. 63 Light illuminates? /9, Body depth = /.1. Raise the AC voltage to: &/C) va tDjv 5 90"-S'. C- TLight illuminates?

of physical damage? / YM Any evidence________________________Ay damage?

d a A/A6 Indicating light is an LED light? i*ej Remove AC voltage?

&Aply DC voltage: /',2/I)C

./ ~~Raise the DC voltage to: // 1¢

___ ___ ___ ___ Light illuminates? e

_j D

Any damage? A0

.. .. Remove DC voltage? ueA(

AJ Page I of z Form No. T-1004, Rev. 5 NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail.

Check off Appropriate Test MEGGER DATA SHEEU ] PRE-*BSMIC 0 POST-SEISMIC A DEDICATION EOTHER_

NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC VP- ZB5AVBG1 Rev. 0 Job #: C -/C3,27 Item

Description:

Indicating Light. 24V-120VAC/ 1 0VDC Manufacturer: Square D P.E. CT CC# 3 SERIAL#___________________ ModellPart# ZB5AVBG1 TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION 0): > 16Mfa TEMPERATURE: 41/AL -

MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE

1. FROM VOLTAGE(V) (MW)

TO 1 1 Case a S300 jZý. 1000htA4 2 2 Case __&J__ý____ P co UO

- 107 '3Z_

Check off appropriate tests:

N L TEST DATA SHEET PRE-SEISMIC POST-SEISMIC VERIFICATION OTHER NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA FOR: VP-'- "/MI Rev: c Job #: 0( P.E c(-- Cat ID#: N/A Item

Description:

?ic" -4Z/

i/ZA_.-

rmanufacturer: . Model/PartNo.:-'- fY1V'3/

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC#1 CC#2 Dimensions and Configuration Correct contact configuration Test Temperature N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A S/N: e4'? 7- ,' Face Diameter= /.A// / Apply voltage: ,21, g4C-1it1Lu&MOikfr-? ICAi D/C: _,E Body Height = /, * .. Raise the AC voltage to: ,400j)-C.

Body depth Light illuminates?

Any damage? £A/

Any evidence of physical damage? /ACv  ?

Remove AC voltage? t I o, c Indicating light is an LED light? *f,* Apply DC voltage: i9'. & Li 1*.

Light illuminates? _

~2O onc~) Any damage? ho~

Remove DC voltage?

A-s

Check off Appropriate Test NIMEGGER NUCLEAR LOG{STICS INC DATA SHEET El PRE-SEISMIC EfPOST-SEISMIC JN DEDICATION EJOTHER____

VP--? 7v'* j.Rev. . Job #: QC'1- 1321 Item

Description:

ja,Ž!ý ,, La?. / angt,'ufacturer: . 4,wo-_7 P.E. 47 CC#3SER1AL# /*'g IOT7 - Model/Part#

• P*"VBG TEST VOLTAGE:  ;? UIQ)D MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION Q): a' /6,M*7 TEMPERATURE: .4AL MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE

1. FROM TO VOLTAGE(V) (M!Q) 1 1 Case 2J09t) >-,tr ,zac2 2 2 Case 2 r6L&)tPC co ZI2e, Ca 00 0

N) 00 CA'

/,? ý A3

Check off appropriate tests:

NL NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET FPRE-SEISMIC E POST-SEISMIC ; VERIFICATION El OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- Z 85' V,96,/-/ Rev: Job #: - P.E r/ Cat ID#: AA1"e9 Item

Description:

24/,,', A9 4, ,2 '/-/`Ab'lManufacturer: *..~J-t_ " " Model/Part No. : 5-2-A/Me-/

Provide Summarn of Test Results Check appropriate boxes:

rQAIL Items Passed, Discrepancy Report(s): If yes, identify below: OYes jWNo ON/A List S/N or ID ýassed below. Qtypassed: e A

'C "tre' 'Wj 47AO)ct n'f -- rL--0 - Z- 0/") '- - ,-7,.-.-/

SfNs or ID# CC*# DR#

rAcceptable ONot.Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

rJAcceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

DAcceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

rAcceptable ON&t.Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

C'Acceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

Other (where aplieajble

.Record-AU M&TE Used:

• NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date

.J4 .. -... i) ~ P* , h, ,f, ...... _ __ -. __ ___='_ ___"._ ___,_

r3F c

.0 Update M&TE log on-computer ,,' /&

ts&90e t Performed By. Date:

NOTS:

NOTES:

Verified by: D Approved by:. Date: S A~

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page of Form No, T-1004, Rev, 5

Item Verification Plan Verification Plan #VP-XO 1200V02, Rev.0

Description:

AC Control Relay, 120VAC, 12-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts Manufacturer / Model: Square-D / 8501X01200V02 Q,,-f'ph, F,,nftn. Pelinhlx clinnhx ann inl-prninI nnxxzpr fn (Clne 1 P Q-fFO -Th 14-l 1 1ý I Critical Characteristic Sample Size :Acceptance

__________________ _______Criteria Ref Method3 Dimensions & Mounting Normal Height = 6.36" nominal 1,2 Measure and record dimensions.

CC #1 Sampling Width = 2.23" nominal Depth = 3.50" nominal Ensure the mounting slots can Insert a #8 screw in each mounting slot accommodate #8 screws.

Proper contactor operation at rated 100% NO Contact Resistance < 12. 1 Perform all operational tests with the contactor 0

coil voltage NC Contact Resistance > 40Mn mounted to a vertical surface. Apply 120VAC to CO CC#2 coil. Measure and record contact resistances and O0 applied voltage.

01 Proper contactor return to de- 100% NO Contact Resistance > 40Mf. 1 Remove power from coil. Measure and record energized state when power is NC Contact Resistance < 10 contact resistances.

removed CC#3 Proper contactor operation at 100% Coil pickup voltage < 102VAC 1 Perform this test with a hot coil (apply power to coil degraded coil voltage for 5 continuous minutes). Starting at 90VAC, CC#4 NO Contact resistance < 1Q. apply the voltage to the relay coil until relay picks NC Contact resistance > 40M92 up. If the relay does not pick up, remove voltage and increase the voltage by 2 volt increments and reapply until the relay picks up. Measure and record contact resistances and pickup voltage. Perform this test 2 times.

Verification Plan #VP-X01I200V02. Rev.O0

Description:

AC Control Relay, 120VAC, 12-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts Manufacturer / Model: Square-D / 8501X01200V02 0..q linpt-tn- v.rnh, *nA hn -,r- i' n +- Cl1c*

('P1-,hhi1 PQ ,_pl*tpc lclc Critical Characteristic. Sample Size ________________ Acceptance Mto

______________________ ________C riteria ~ Ref IMeho Contact current carrying capacity EQ test Closed contact can carry 5A for 1 1 Apply 5A across one closed contact. Record applied CC#5 specimen only hour without damage. current. Maintain applied current for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

Remove current and allow the contacts to cool for 5 minutes.

Open Contact Resistance > 40MK2. Measure and record resistance across the tested Closed Contact Resistance _ IQ contact.

.1.-4 Insulation Resistance Resistance > 16ME 1,3 Megger Test. Convert all contacts to NO before

-0 (0 CC#6 performing this test. Energize coil and apply CD 2200VDC and record applied voltage and measured leakage resistances for the points shown on the 0o attached Megger Data Sheets. Note: Convert all contacts on the relay to NO contacts before performing this step.

The contacts are numbered as follows (see reference 1):

CONTROL RELAY*

• L.9 2LTOPWOGKj'j 1 T T T T SMIOM~OECK TU T TT TT " TT

_________________________________________________________________________ L Page 2 of 7

Verification Plan #VP-XO 1200V02, Rev.0

Description:

AC Control Relay, 120VAC, 12-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts Manufacturer/ Model: Square-D / 8501X01200V02 Safety Function: Reliably supVly and interrupt power to Class tE Safet-Related loads Critical Characteristic iSample Size 'Acceptance Criteria Method

References:

1. Square-D Industrial Control Relays Type X Class 8501 Catalog, dated December 1996.

2. Guideline for Sampling in the Commercial-Grade Item Acceptance Process, EPRI, Palo Alto, CA: 1999. Report TR-O 17218-R 1

3. V = 1000VDC + 2(rated voltage)

R =1OMQ + 102(rated voltage) MONV.

VP Approval Prepared:L IVit(nReviewed: 7 z*Z "-

Approv n4 L ADh date Me date 0_

Page 3 of 7

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET E] PRE-SEISMIC r-] POST-SEISMIC E-- DEDICATION M-]OTHER VP-XO1200V02. Rev. 0 TYPE: AC Control Relay.I 120VAC,I 12-Pole.I Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#)A6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION n: 16Mn TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS I Point 2 14 Point 2 Point 3 Point 1 2 Point 1 Point 3 15 Point 2 Point 4

-u 3 Point 1 Point 4 16 Point 2 Point 5 01 4 Point 1 Point 5 17 Point 2 Point 6 5 Point I Point 6 18 Point 2 Point 7 6 Point 1 Point 7 19 Point 2 Point 8 7 Point 1 Point 8 20 Point 2 Point 9 8 Point 1 Point 9 21 Point 2 Point 10 9 Point 1 Point 10 22 Point 2 Point 11 10 Point 1 Point 11 23 Point 2 Point 12 11 Point 1 Point 12 24 Point 2 Ground 12 Point I Ground 25 Point 2 Coil 13 Point 1 Coil 26 Point 3 Point 4 NLI MEGGER DATA SHEET '] PRE-SEISMIC El POST-SEISMIC E-l DEDICATION DOTHER

'X0MCLE.A LOGISTICS INC VP-X01200V02. Rev. 0 TYPE: AC Control Relav 120VAC 19-Pole Nnrm~11v nn~n cnnvertihle cnnt~wt~

AC Control Relay 120VAC 12-Pole ormallv onen convertible contacts TYPE:

CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION Q: 16M92 TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE 1f # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (Mfl) FROM TO VOLTAGE (M__)

__) _ _

Relay Energized Relay Energized 27 Point 3 Point 5 41 Point 4 Point 9 28 Point 3 Point 6 42 Point 4 Point 10 29 Point 3 Point 7 43 Point 4 Point 11 30 Point 3 Point 8 44 Point 4 Point 12

-u 31 Point 3 Point 9 45 Point 4 Ground co ch Cr' 32 Point 3 Point 10 46 Point 4 Coil 33 Point 3 Point 11 47 Point 5 Point 6 34 Point 3 Point 12 48 Point 5 Point 7 35 Point 3 Ground 49 Point 5 Point 8 36 Point 3 Coil 50 Point 5 Point 9 37 Point 4 Point 5 51 Point 5 Point 10 38 Point 4 Point 6 52 Point 5 Point 11 39 Point 4 Point 7 53 Point 5 Point 12 40 Point 4 Point 8 54 Point 5 Ground

N L I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET 1-" PRE-SEISMIC LI POST-SEISMIC El DEDICATION EIOTHER VP-XO1200V02. Rev. 0 TYPE: AC Control Relay,I 120VAC.I 12-Pole.I Normally oMen convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION 0: 16Mf2 TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (Mfl) FROM TO VOLTAGE (MP)

(V) -_ _. I V Relay Energized Relay Energized 55 Point 5 Coil 69 Point 7 Ground CC 56 Point 6 Point 7 70 Point 7 Coil 0~

57 Point 6 Point 8 71 Point 8 Point 9 co 58 Point 6 Point 9 72 Point 8 Point 10 59 Point 6 Point 10 73 Point 8 Point 11 60 Point 6 Point 11 74 Point 8 Point 12 61 Point 6 Point 12 75 Point 8 Ground 62 Point 6 Ground 76 Point 8 Coil 63 Point 6 Coil 77 Point 9 Point 10 64 Point 7 Point 8 78 Point 9 Point 11 65 Point 7 Point 9 79 Point 9 Point 12 66 Point 7 Point 10 80 Point 9 Ground 67 Point 7 Point 11 81 Point 9 Coil 68 Point 7 Point 12 82 Point 10 Point I1

N L I MEGGER DATA SHEET El PRE-SEISMIC E- POST-SEISMIC E- DEDICATION El OTHER NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC VP-XO1200V02, Rev. 0 TYPE: AC Control Relay, 120VAC, 12-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION n: 16ME2 TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MM) FROM TO VOLTAGE (Mri)

(v) (V)

Relay Energized Relay Energized 83 Point 10 Point 12 84 Point 10 Ground r-u CD 85 Point 10 Coil CA 86 Point 11 Point 12 87 Point 11 Ground 88 Point 11 Coil 89 Point 12 Ground 90 Point 12 Coil 91 Ground Coil Page 7 of 7

Industrial Control Relays Type X Class 8501 CATALOG CONTENTS Description .................................................... Page Genera l ....... .......... ........... ..... . . ... .. .... ..... .... .... 1-3 A ccessories ....................................................... 4 Application Data .................................................. 5-7 Product Data ..................................................... 8-9 Dim ensions ...................................................... 10 SSQUARE D GROUPESCHNEIDER Page 167 of 285

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays General Information Class 8501 Type X relays combine a rugged, heavy-duty Plug-In Contact Cartridges design with modular construction for greater flexibility. They are Contact Conversion Without Removing Terminal Screws ideal for those applications where long life, high reliability and or Wires ease of maintenance are important. The Type X family offers a complete line of relays and accessories for all control applica- 1. Remove relay cover and captive T-bar actuator.

tions. 2. Remove contact cartridge and rotate 180*.

• Specified In Major Automotive Plants 3. Plug contact cartridge back in.

• Modular Design Provides Greater Versatility and Reduction In Stock 4. Replace T-bar actuator and cover.

• XUDO Version Ideal for Power Plant Applications Note: Foradditionalinformation regardingcontact cartridges

• Replaceable, Convertible Contacts see Page 9.

• Extremely Reliable Contacts

• 600 Volt 10 Ampere Rating (NEMA Type A600)

• Plug-In Color-Coded Contact Cartridges

• Mechanical Tie Between Contact Cartridges

• 1 and 3 Minute Timing Relays

• 8 Pole Latching Relays

• DC Operated Relays Normally Closed Normally Open (Yellow) (Green)

Modular Construction A basic relay has room for up to 4 convertible contact cartridges. It can be expanded to 6 or 8 poles by installing an adder deck. A 10 or 12 pole relay can be built by adding a second deck. The same adder deck is used for both the middle and upper decks..Latching and timing relays are made by adding a latch or timer attachment to a basic relay. This reduces the number of components required in inventory.

Ring Or Spade Lugs - Form Y414 For relays with terminals that will accept ring or spade lugs, add Form Y414 to the Class and Type number of the device being ordered. Form Y414 is available on all AC relays, DC relays and attachments at no additional charge. Ring or spade lugs must have an outside diameter of .31 inch or less and an inside diameter large enough to accommodate a #6 screw. Lugs should accept #12 - #14 gauge (AWG) stranded copper wire.

UL Listing is maintained only when AMP Plasti-GripP #32958 insulated-barrel ring-tongue lugs are used.

Normally Closed Contacts Contact conversion is so simple that it is generally more economical to purchase relays with all contacts N.O. and convert contacts to N.C. as required. If it is preferred that relays Common Mechanical Tie be factory assembled with a combination of N.O. and N.C.

Non-Overlapping Contacts contacts, change the type number so that following the "XO",

The Type X relay is designed to provide the first number indicates the number of normally open contacts

• a significant degree of non-overlap (N.O.) and the second number indicates the number of normally between N.O. and N.C. contacts during closed contacts (N.C.). As indicated on contact arrangement normal operation. In addition, a tables found on Page 6.

common mechanical tie between all contact cartridges is provided. There is a price adder for the factory installation of normally

• J: Therefore, the Type X relay is suitable closed (N.C.) contacts.

for use in self-checking circuits for press control and automatic transfer line applications. Since the T-bar How to Order:

actuator is held captive in the cover To Order Specify: Catalog Number plate, there is no chance of losing or Class Number Class Type Voltage Form(s)

Code forgetting to replace the mechanical tie TpeNumber Form()

VltageC when converting a contact or adding another deck.

2

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays/AC General Information, Order Information AC Control Relays AC Timing Relays In addition to all of the features listed

• Easily convertible On Delay or on the previous page, the Type XO Off Delay relay also provides:

• Two adjustable timing ranges

• Straight-through wiring

• Repeat accuracy well above

• Plug-in contact cartridges for easy +/-10%

contact conversion and replace-

• Convertible 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.

ment timed contacts

• Contact conversion without

• Large knob for easy adjustment removing terminal screws or wires of time delay

• Self-lifting pressure wire

• Off Delay mode times out even connectors that will accept up to Type X040 after loss of power Type XO40XTE1 two #12-18 (AWG) gauge stranded copper wires (1 N File E78403 File LR 60905

• Replaceable coil CCN NKCR Class 3211 03 Normally Open Control Relay A Normally Timed Timing Relay Convertible File E78403 Open Convertible Instantaneous Type Timing Convertible Contacts 0.2-60 sec. 5-180 sec.

CCN NKCR Contacts Instantaneous 0 X00 Contacts N.O. N.C. Type Type 2 X020* File LRffI*5 3 X030o 0 1 1 XO00XTE1

• XOOOXTE2*

4 X0406 Class 3211ltE On Delay .2 1 1 XO20XTE1

• XO2OXTE2*

6 X0604 4 1 1 XO40XTE1 XO40XTE2*

8 X080 10 X01000* 0 1 1 XOo0XTD1

• XOOOXTD2

• 12 X01200* Off Delay 2 1 1 XO20XTD1

• XO2OXTD2

• 4 1 1 XO40XTD1 XO40XTD2

• A A maximum of 8 N.C. contacts is allowed on 9-12 pole relays.

AC Latching Relays AC Master Relays

" 20 Ampere Contact Rating due to

• Mechanical Latch holds all contacts switched even after use of Master Contact Cartridges removal of power from

" Provisions for Standard Cartridges 7 replaceable Latching Coil.

to be used in contact cavities not oc- Provides sequence memory in cupied by Master Cartridges in 2-8 the event of power loss. Ideal pole AC relay for press control, process

" Straight-through wiring control and punch presses.

" Plug-in contact cartridges for easy Replaceable Unlatch Coil to contact conversion and switch contacts back to replacement original state.

" Contact conversion without Type XMO40 Continuously rated Unlatch Type XO40XL removing terminal screws or wires Coil (no coil clearing contacts

" Self-lifting pressure wire connectors that will accept up to required).

two #12-18 (AWG) gauge stranded copper wires Normally Open Latching Relay

" Replaceable coil Convertible (Ti File CCN E78403 NKCR Instantaneous Type Number of N.O. Open Type t Contacts 20 Ampere (I File E78403 2 File LR 60905 XO20XL**

Convertible Type CCN NKCR 3 XO30XL

• Class 3211 03 Contacts 4 XO40XL**

6 XO60XL

• 2 XMO20 File LR 60905 8 XO80XL*

4 XMO40* Class 3211 03 6 XMO60 Voltage Code must be specified to order this product. Refer to standard voltage codes listed t Attachments not permitted on this relay. below and insert as shown in How To Order.

Voltage Codes:

AC Voltages - Hz. Code 12-60 V1l 24-60 Vol 24-50 V12 How to Order: 48-60 Vl 8 48-50 V16 To Order Specify: Catalog Number 120 - 60/110 - 50 V02 208-60 V0B

• Class Number Class Type Voltage Code 240 - 60/220 - 50 V03

• Type Number 277-60 V04

-Voltage Code 8501 480 - 601440-50 V06 600 - 60/550 - 50 V07 3

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays/DC General Information, Order Information DC Control Relays DC Latching Relays

" Replaceable, highly reliable pure " Mechanical Latch holds all DC Power Plant: no economizing contacts switched even after resistors, overlapping contacts removal of power from replaceable or dual-wound coil Latching Coil

" Utilizes the same Type XB Adder

• Provides sequence memory in the Decks and attachments as the event of power loss AC Version "Ideal for sequencing applications

" Offers all the features of the AC such as press control, process Relay control and punch presses

" Available in up to 8 Poles " Replaceable Unlatch coil to switch Type XDO40XDL

" All contact poles are usable Type XD040 contacts back to original state since no overlapping contacts Normally Open Latching Relay A E78403 are needed Convertible l llCCN NKCR Instantaneous Type

" Self-lifting pressure wire connectors that will accept up to Contacts two #12-18 (AWG) gauge stranded copper wires 2 XDO20XDL*

LR 60905 4 XDO40XDL File 6 XDO60XDL Class 3211 03 Normally Open Control Relay 8 XDO80XDL*

Convertible File E78403 A Caution: Unlatch coil is rated for intermittent duty and should be connected through a N.O.

Instantaneous Type NKCR CCN contact of the relay if the input signal is maintained. Order one more N.C. contact than the Contacts application requires to use as a coil clearing contact. If a coil clearing contct is required in 0 XDOOO LR 60905 series with the latch coil, consult your local Square 0 field sales office.

2 XD020*

• File Class 3211 03 4 XDO4O0 6 XD060-8 XDO80

• DC Utility Relays Ideal for utility plant applications DC Timing Relays where reliable performance and a

• Easily convertible On Delay or Off pure DC power plant are required. In Delay addition to the Type XDO relay fea- >

• Two adjustable timing ranges tures, the Type XUDO provides:

• Repeat accuracy well above +/-10%

• Up to 12 poles N.O. or N.C.

• Convertible I N.O. and 1 N.C. timed

• Nominal 125VDC coil, capable of contacts handling 140VDC continuously Large knob for easy adjustment of and picking up at 105VDC after time delay having been operated at 140VDC Off Delay mode times out even after continuously. Other voltages with Type XDO40 loss of power Type XDO40XTE2 comparable operating character-istics are available File E78403

• Enclosed device capable of operating in 145vF ambient i CCN NKCR o CFile Class LR 60905 3211 03 Number of Convertible Open Type (r File E78403 Normally Timed Timing Relay CCN NKCR Contacts Open Convertible Timing Convertible Contacts 0.2-60 sec. 5-180 sec. N.O. N.C. Type Mode Instantaneous 4 0 XUDO4O

• File LR 60905 Contacts N.O. N.C. Type Type 0 4 XUDO04 Class 3211 03 0 1 1 XDO00XTE1

• XDOOOXTE2 - 8 0 XUDO80

• On Delay 2 1 1 XDO20XTEI - XDO20XTE2 - 0 8 XUDO08*

4 1 1 XDO40XTE1

• XDO40XTE2

• 12 0 XUD01200

• 0 1 1 XDOO0XTD1

• XDO0OXTD2

• 0 12 XUD00012

• Off Delay 2 1 1 XDO20XTD1

• XDO2OXTD2

• 4 1 1 XDO40XTD1 - XDO40XTD2 *

• Voltage code must be specified to order this product. Refer to standard voltage code listed below and insert as shown in How To Order.

Voltage Codes for 8501 XUDO Relays Voltage Codes for 8501 XDO Relays:

ONLY: For Replacement Coils ......................... Page 6 DC Voltages Code DC Voltages Code 6 V50 6 V50 12 24 V51 V53 How to Order:

12 V51 32 V54 24 V153 48V56 To Order Specify: Catalog Number 48 V56 48 V58 Voltage Code 125 V63 72 V59 - Class Number Class Type 250 6759 250 V67 1151125 V62

• Type Number -X07 230/250 V66

-Voltage Code i8501 IF 4

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays Accessories, Order Information Class 8501 Type Mechanical Latch Attachment - Mounts on any 2 through 8 pole relay (except XMO master relay). The Type XL and XDL latch attachments are identical in size and mounting provisions. The Type XL AC latch attachment has a continuous-duty-rated coil which is replaceable. The Type XDL DC latch attachment has an Intermittent-rated coil (replaceable) and should be con-nected through a N.O. contact of the basic relay If the Input signal Is maintained to the unlatch coil.

AC Latch Attachm ent .................................................................. ................... AFT Fie LRt0905 XL* 114176Class321102 DC Latch Attachment .......................................................................... XDL*

Pneumatic Timer Attachment - Mounts on any 0 through 4 pole AC or DC relay (except XMO master relay). It provides 1 N.O. and I N.C. convertible limed contacts, which are the same Type XC-1 cartridges used on the basic relay Two timing ranges are available, and conversion from On Delay to Off Delay or vice versa is easy. File E78403 CCN NKCR2 Off Delay 0.2-60 seconds ....... .. .................................................................... ....... XTD1 5-180 seconds ........................................................................... XTD2 File LR680805 On Delay 140c Class321102 0.2-60 seconds ...... ..................................................................... XTE1 5-180 seconds ....................................................... .................... ....... XTE2 Timer Lockout Cover - Fits over the time delay adjustment knob of any Type XT timing attachment. The Lockout Cover is designed to protect the time setting against accidental adjustment. It mounts directly to the timing attachment with two included screws ....... XJ1 Adder Decks - Adder decks are used to expand the number of poles on a relay. The basic 4 pole relay can be easily converted to an  % File E78403 8 pole or 12 pole relay by installing one or two adder decks. The Class 8501 Type XB20 comes with 2 convertible contact cartridges CCN NKCR2 and will accept 2 additional convertible contact cartridges. The Class 8501 Type XB40 comes with 4 convertible contact cartridges. The

. same Type XB adder deck is used for both the middle and upper decks of the AC or DC relay. " File LR60905 Writh2 NOC.contact cartridges............................................................................ XB20 We(~ Class321102

• With 4 NO. contact cartridges .............................................................................. XB40 Number of Number of 11 Logic Reed Adder Deck - Used for switching low energy circuits. The N.O. N.C.

Logic Reed Adder Deck is supplied with either one or two logic reed Logic Reed Logic Reed Fe E78403 cartridges fieed into the center positions of an adder deck. Contact Contact Cartridges Contact Cartridges CCN NKCR2 cartridges are neither convertible nor replaceable. Standard cartridges can 2 0 XBR20 be inserted in unused cavities of the Logic Reed Adder Deck. One or two 1 1 XBR11 File LR86095 Logic Reed Adder Decks may be added to the basic 4 pole relay. See 1 0 XBR1 Class 321102 Application Data on Page 5 for electrical ratings. 0 1 XBR01 0 2 XBR02 Contact Cartridges - The Type X relay offers 4 Types of contact cartridges. All are color-coded for visual identification of each Type.

Note: For additional information regarding contact cartridge see Pages 9-10 Standard Cartridge -The standard cartridge, used for most applications, has a black case.................................. XCI Overlapping Cartridge - Same NEMA Type A600 AC rating as standard cartridge and a NEMA Type P150 DC rating. When it is used in the N.O. mode itwill close early and when used in the N.C. mode it wiillopen late. Iftwo or more are used together, the N.O contacts Fie E78403 will dose before the N.C. contacts open as the relay picks up. Overlap also occurs during dropout Overlapping cartridge has a red case. XC2  % iCCN NKCR2 May be ordered factory installed: Form Substitute 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. overlapping cartridges for 2 standard cartridges ......................................... 5 i YI591 File LR60905 Substitute 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. overlapping cartridges for 4 standard cartridges ......................................... Y1592

• Class 321102

~Master Cartridge - Features the same contact ratings as the Type XCl standard cartridge except it has a 20 Ampere continuous

• current rating instead of 10 Amperes. It can be used in circuits where a master relay is required. Master cartridge has a blue case.

. Maximum of 6 master cartridges may be used on any 7 and 8 pole AC relays. Do not use any master cartridges an 9-12 pole

• AC or any DC-operated devices ................................................................................. XC4 Logic Reed Cartridge - See Logi7cReed Adder Deck above .......................................................... -

b,. .Mounting

.:' Track - The maountingtrack has pre-punched mounting holes to simplify mounting the track on the control panel. The relay 6mounting screws are factory installed on the track so that the relays can be hung prior to tightening the screws.

'.:*;*';*I . .... 129" long for "long for 48 relays relays ..............................................................................

...................................................... .... ............................. XM4 XM8 27" long for 12 relays ..................................................... ........................... ....... X M12

• :'"'*36": long for 16 relays..................................................... ................................. XM16

• 72"long for 32 relays ....................................... . ................................ ........... XM 32 Manual Test Tool - Provides a means of manually switching the contacts of a basic relay or timing relay and holding all contacts in their switched state until the tool is removed. This simplifies the checking of control circuits without power on the coil or contacts. ......... XA1 SFila E78403 CCNNKCR2 Transient Suppressor - Consists of an R-C circuit designed to suppress coil generated transients to approximately 200 percent of peak voltage. It is particularly useful when switching the Type X relay near solid state equipment It is designed for use on coils up to 120VAC. .........................................................................................

......... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ..... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. XS1 A FilesC3sLR65 11020 NEMA Type I Enclosure - Formed from sheet steel to provide strength and rigidity. Two conduit knockouts are located in both the top and bottom of the enclosure. The enclosure is famished with self tapping screws for mounting the relay inside the enclosure. Accom-modates a single 4 or 8 pole AC or DC relay, 12 pole AC relay, 4 pole AC latching relay, and 4 pole AC timing relay. NOTE: The 4 pole Class 9991 Type \

M File E78403 CCN NKCR DC latching relay, 4 pole DC timing relay, 8 pole AC and DC latching relays and 12 pole UtilityAuxiliary Relay willnot fit UE7

• Mechanical Latch Attachment Voltage Codes:

AC Voltages Code DC Voltage Code For Replacement Coils ........................ Page 6 24-60 Vol V12 6

12 V50 V51 4 How to Order:

24-50 120-60/110-50 V02 18 V99 To Order Specify: Catalog Number 208-60 Vo0 24 V53 240 - 60/220 - 50 V03 48 V56 277-60 V04 72 V58

• Class Number Class Type 480 - 60/440 -50 V06 90 V59 -Type Number 600 - 601550 - 50 V07 115/125 V62 -Voltage Code for mechanical latch attachment 230/250 V66 F -8551 i-- l ,

.. ,X Form for factory installed overlapping contacts

+ Specify voltage on order.

5

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMAType Relays Application Data Average Operating Times In Milliseconds Voltage Range: AC operation, +10t-15%

Device Pick-Up Drop-Out DC operation, +10/-20%

AC Relay 15 16 In the case of dual rated DC coils, the range is +10% of the AC Latching Relay 15 13 larger number and -20% of smaller number.

DC Relay 37 21 Operating Temperature Range:

DC Latching Relay 37 45

-401C to +710C

(-40°F to +160 0 F)

Contact Ratings AC Ratings DC Ratings Resistive Inductive 75% Power Inductive Resistive Type 35% Power Factor Factor k

of VMBVM Cartridge Volts Make Break Make, Break Volts Max. Make and Make NEMA Continuous and Continuous NEMA Break Amperes Continuous and Break Continuous Rating Amperes VA Amperes VA Amperes AnCoius Amperes Rating (138VA 300 V orMax. for Less) Amperes Amperes Amperes 120 60 7200 6 720 10 10 125 1.1 5 4 5 Standard 240 A600 30 7200 3 720 10 10 250 P600 0.55 5 0.8 5 480 15 7200 1.5 720 10 10 301-600 0.20 5 - -

Overlapping 600 12 7200 1.2 720 10 10 125 P150 1.1 5 4 5 125 1.1 5 4 5 Master A600 Same as standard cartridge above except substitute 5 0.8 5 20 Ampere for the continuous Ampere rating 250 P600 0.55 301-600 0.20 5 - -

Logic Reed - - 150VAC, 150MA, 8W Maximum - - 30VOC, 60MA Maximum of six 8501 Type XC - 4 Master Cartridges may be used on any 7 and 8 pole AC device. Do not use any Master Cartridges on 9-12 pole AC or any DC-operated relays.

Contact Arrangement The following tables list all pole arrangements and the location of the N.O. and N.C. poles. Relays purchased from the factory will correspond to these tables. For example: an X012 will have one N.O. pole in position 1; positions 2 and 3 will have N.C. poles; position 4 will be a space.

Note: Note: Foradditional information regardingcontact cartridgessee Pages 9 and 10.

2, 3, and 4 Pole Relay -

All contacts convertible 6 and 8 Pole Relay - All contacts convertible 10 and 12 Pole Relay- All contacts convertible No.

of Type Pote Number t 1 2 3 4 No. Pole Number No. T Pole Number t No.

Pole Number t 9 10 ,11 12 No.

Pole Number t of Type [ 5 6 um H of Type 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 of Type 5 8 7 8 of Type Poles Poles [12 13 14 Poles I II I Tye 11 2 13 141 Poles 5 6 7 8 X020 S 0 0 S Poles 1 2 3 4 S 0 0 S 0 0 0 2 X011 S 0 1 S X060 0 0 X080 0 Of-ri 0 0 S 0 10 1S O__3002 S 1 1 S _1 A O2 Of i_a 0 0 0 X01000 0 0 0 X01200 0 0 0 0 X030 0 010 S X051 Of 0 X071 0 1f70 0 O0 0 0 0

X021 S 1 S 0 Of i S 0 0 S X012 0

0 1 0 S 1 1 S X042 0 O

-S 0 X062 O5 0 0 X01101 0

O 0 0 0 76O 1 0f X00901 0 0 0 0 X063 1 1 I S Sf S 1 S 0 75-X040 0 0 0 0 X033 Of 1 7-r -S 1f X053 0 S 0 0 S _a 1L 1 0 X031 0 1 0 0 Sf 0 1

-1 0S5 0 6-- X00802 0 1 1 0 X01002 0 0 0 0 4 X022 0 11 0 X024 L1f t 1f X044 L if 1 0 0 0 0 X013 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 s 0 0 S 0 1 1 0 1

X0O4 1 1 1 1 X015 1

X035 if1T 0 X00703 0 1 1 0 X00g03 0 1 0 0 d--

05 0 0 0 0 X006 X026 IF s 0 0 S O 1 1 O_&

IF X00604 0 1 1 0 X00804 0 1 1 0 X017 IF 10 0 1 10O 12 T1T s 0 0 S 0 1 1 0 X008 1F X00505 0 1 1 1 X00705 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 X00406 0 1 1 0 X00606 0 1 1 0 CONTROL RELAY* 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 TIMED CONTACTS WHEN USED S 1 1 S 0 1 1 0 0 ONI 1t"10 i 1 ,ocK" I " L----C*N-------- I X00307 0 1 1 1 X00507 0 1 1 0 TT TT 5O~ u~ms~?TWDET1 0 S

1 1

1 1

0 S

0 1 1 1

..sra ,.erO OFFI X00208 0 1 1 0 X00408 0 1 1 0 I ' DELAY POLE f " r(TD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TT TTT POLE

1. 13 *14____j 8 N.C. Poles Maximum 8 N.C. Poles Maximum

• IT v° TTr XTD & XTE Timer Attachments -All Contacts Convertible No. of 1 Pole Number t Type Timed Contacts 1 13 14

• For latch relay use same diagram as above except for 2 XTD 0 1 XTE the addition of an unlatch coil (8 pole maximum). t 0- Normally Open Contact 1 - Normally Closed Contact S - Space for Future Contact 6

Industrial Control Relays Type X- NEMAType Relays Application Data Replacement AC Magnet Coils For Relays Suffix Number Coil Equipment to be serviced Coll Prefix or (Complete Coil Number consists of Prefix or Class and Type followed by Suffix Number) Volt-Amperes Class and Hz Class Type Poles Type 24 110-115 1201 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 550 600 Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Inrush Sealed 8501 X All 9998-X 60 23 - 44 51 52 53 55 - - 62 65 148 23 50 24 44 - 52 53 - - 62 - 413 25 Replacement DC Magnet Coils For Relays 7

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays Application Data Definition of Ratings Contact Life Control relays are designed for switching inductive and The life of control relay contacts depends upon the magnitude resistive loads in both AC and DC circuits. By far, the greatest and characteristics of the electrical load, inductance, duty cycle, number of applications involve the switching of inductive loads mechanical properties of the device in which they are used, in AC circuits. Typical loads include solenoids and operating voltage fluctuations, environment, etc. The Class 8501 Type X coils of such devices as other relays, timers, starters and relay carries a NEMA A600 rating. NEMA A600 relays have 600 contactors. VAC spacings, a 10 ampere continuous rating, a 60 ampere make rating, and a 6 ampere break ratingat 120 volt AC for an The magnets on AC devices exhibit an inrush current when first AC inductive load.

switched on, with the current subsiding to some lesser value, known as the sealed current, after the magnet has moved to its When control circuit relays are operated at maximum rated sealed position. DC devices do not have an inrush current load, the life of the contact is usually less than that of the when first energized. Relay contacts may also be called upon mechanical life of the device. If the application requires a large to carry current continuously for long periods of time. This has number of operations during the life of the contacts, the resulted in recognizing three important ratings for relay contacts must be applied at values less than their maximum contacts: the make rating, break rating and the continuous make and break ratings. NEMA Standard ICS 5-1993 current rating. In addition, ratings are further divided into Paragraph 8 recommends that control relays for automatically-categories which depend upon whether the load is resistive or operated sequencing systems be utilized with loads of less than inductive in nature, 25% of the 60 ampere make and 6 ampere break ratings. It does not recommend using a relay at its maximum ampere Contact Ratings rating where the number of operations are expected to substantially exceed the 6000 operations required by the Contact Ratings on page 5 shows current and VA (volt- endurance test in NEMA Standard ICS 5-1993 Paragraph 8.

ampere) values in sufficient detail for most applications. A short definition of some of the terms used in the table follow:

Life-Load Guide

" Resistive Rating - Indicates the resistive load that the The information shown is provided to estimate the service life of contacts can make, break or carry continuously. a Class 8501 Type X control relay. This information is not to be Resistive ratings are based on a 75% power factor. taken as a guarantee, but rather an approximate life

" Inductive Rating - Refers to loads such as coils of expectancy. The information is based on the following:

contactors, starters and relays and solenoids that contacts can make, break and carry continuously. " Operating 40 hours4.62963e-4 days <br />0.0111 hours <br />6.613757e-5 weeks <br />1.522e-5 months <br /> per week Inductive rating tests are run with 35% power factor " Operating 52 weeks per year load. " Inrush and continuous current ratings not exceeded

" Make Rating - Applies to the current that can be han- " Application in usual service conditions (such as dled by the contact at the time of contact closure. In in- described in NEMA Standard ICS 1-1993 Paragraph 6) ductive AC circuits, the momentary inrush current is " Operating at 120 Volts 60 Hertz often 10 times the sealed current, and a relay must be able to handle this inrush current as well as be able to 15 1 break it in an emergency. The endurance test listed in NEMA Standard ICS 5-1993 Paragraph 8 requires relay contacts to make the make rating for 6,000 operations.

" Break Rating - Refers to the current that can be interrupted successfully by the contact. The inductive @

104-break rating is always less than the resistive or 300 60 continuous ratings; When contacts break an inductive 8 Operations Operations co -0 Per Per circuit, the inductance of the load tends to maintain the en Hour Hour current. The result is an arc across the contacts which causes heating and erosion of the contacts. Because of the extra heat generated, the allowable inductive current 5.

a)00 must be less than the resistive current for equal contact life. The endurance test from NEMA Standard ICS 5- =0.

1993 Paragraph 8 requires relay contacts to interrupt WU '0n wU'0 r the break rating for 6,000 operations. It also requires relay contacts to interrupt the make rating for 6 operations in an emergency. 0 1.5 3 6 60

" Continuous Rating - Continuous rating indicates the load that the contacts can carry continuously without Break Current - Amperes making or breaking the circuit and without exceeding a Figure 1: Service Live vs. Break Current certain temperature rise.

8

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays Product Data Isolation The construction of the cartridges is such that, with the relay The class 8501 Type X relay has electrical clearances for up to mounted in the normal manner, external dust is virtually 600 volts. All contacts are single-throw double-break contacts prevented from entering in to the contact area. A glass-filled and are completely isolated from one another. This means that thermoplastic is used for the contact carrier in the cartridge.

different contacts on the same relay may be connected to This material was selected because of its ability to withstand control circuits having different voltage values. It also means high operating temperatures and its low wear rate. The plug-in that if different contacts are connected to different sources, interface between the relay terminals and the cartridges consist polarity on adjacent connections need. not be the same. of fine silver which, under pressure, assures a reliable Electrical spacings per UL 508: connection. The force of the connection is in excess of one pound.

• Of not (less than 3/8" (9.5mm) through air and 1/2" (12.7mm) over the surface of insulating material are Contact Cartridge Types and Color Codes maintained between uninsulated live parts and an uninsulated ground part other than the enclosure, or Four types of contact cartridges are available for use with the exposed metal part. Type X relay: standard contact cartridge which is black, over-lapping contact cartridge which is red, logic reed contact

• Of not less than 1/2" (12.7mm) measured over the cartridge which is grey (only available when ordered as a shortest distance are maintained between any Class 8501 Type XBR adder deck) and the master contact uninsulated live part and the walls of a metal enclosure, cartridge which is blue. All are the same size and color coded including fittings for conduit or armored cable. for visual identification. In addition, the normally open contact symbol -I1-appears on a green background and the normally Contact Cartridge Construction closed symbol -Z- appears on a yellow background. This color Each contact on the Type X relay is a double-break contact. coded scheme is consistent throughout the Type X product This places, for practical purposes, two single-break contacts offering.

inseries so that two arcs occur when the contact interrupts the current flow. This division of energy in the arc materially A. Standard Contact Cartridge extends the electrical life of the contact when compared to devices employing single-break contacts. The stationary and Standard Type X relay contact cartridges are designed movable contacts are made of silver-cadmium-oxide. This so that there is a mechanical differential between choice of material is important because of its resistance to normally open and normally closed contacts mounted in welding when closing on the inrush currents normally the same relay. This means that the normally closed associated with inductive loads. It also helps to reduce contact contacts open substantially before the normally open erosion which occurs with repeated interruption of inductive contacts close during the stroke of the relay. This non-loads. The movable contact is split down the center to provide overlapping also takes place during the drop-out of the two parallel paths per pole. The fact that both halves of the relay. The standard cartridge, used in most applications, movable contact are rigidly connected assures that all four has a black case. It is rated NEMA A600 for AC contact points will be held closed with nearly equal force. In applications and NEMA P600 for DC applications.

addition, a conductive bridge straddles the two fingers to provide a cross-over path for even greater contact reliability. B. Overlapping Contact Cartridge There are certain cases where an intentional overlap is desired, and an optional contact has been designed for I 'l___ these purposes. The overlapping contact cartridge, hI which has a red case, has the same NEMA A600 AC contact rating as the standard cartridge and a NEMA P150 DC rating.

Double Break Contact When an overlapping contact cartridge is inserted into the relay as a normally open contact, it will close sooner (early closing contact) in the stroke of the relay than a

- Contact Bridge standard contact. If it is inserted as a normally closed contact, it will open later (late opening contact) in the stroke of the relay than a standard contact.

When two such contacts are used in conjunction with one another, they will produce an output signal to the load which is originated through the normally closed contact and maintained through the normally open contact after the relay has picked up. The overlap feature prevents dropout of the load during the transfer from the pickup to the dropout circuit.

Figure 2: Movable Contact

~B~2 99

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays Product Data Contact Cartridge Types and Color Codes con't. contact. In the case of a normally open logic reed See below for illustration of a typical application with contact, this occurs when the relay coil is energized and two limit switches, LS1 and LS2. The machine is such the magnet carrier moves down, bringing the magnet that LS2 is closed to pick up CR1 but, because of the close enough to close the contacts. The contact ratings cam limitations, LS2 opens before the dropout of the of the logic reed cartridge are specified as maximum relay is desired. Assuming that the dropout of the relay wattage, maximum voltage, and maximum current. The can be performed by the opening of LS1, we have a maximum voltage times the maximum switched current natural application for overlapping contacts. cannotexceed the maximum wattage.

L1 CR12 CR1 L2 LS1 Figure 4: Logic Reed Construction D. Master Contact Cartridge LS2 Master contact cartridges, which have a blue case,

• feature a 20 ampere AC continuous current rating

• Denotes Overlap instead of 10 amperes. Their AC make and break rating remain 7200VA and 720VA respectively. The master Figure 3: Overlapping Contact Application contact cartridge can be used in circuits where a master relay is required. Under normal operating conditions, the master contacts are rated to carry the total C. Logic Reed Contact Cartridge continuous current of all the loads in the circuit. They do not make or break this current except in an emergency.

The logic reed contact cartridges are available only in In an emergency situation, master contacts can the logic reed adder deck. The contact cartridges are interrupt their break rating 6,000 operations and permanently fixed within the center positions of the interrupt their make rating for 6 operations. This is in adder deck and can not be converted or changed in accordance with NEMA Standard ICS 5-1993 Part 2.

position. The adder decks are available in a combination of normally open or normally closed Note: A maximum of 6 master cartridgesmay be used contacts. The outside positions of the adder deck can on a 7 or 8 pole AC device. Do not use any master be filled with any other type of cartridge available in the cartridges on 9-12 pole AC or and DC-operated Type X contact cartridge line. The adder deck can be relays.

added to any 0-8 pole AC or DC relay. Li L2 A logic reed cartridge consists of a magnetic reed CR r) switch mounted in the plug in-cartridge housing in place of the standard silver-cadmium-oxide contacts. It -CRM 1__ Master Relay CRM CM.p is used for improved contact reliability when switching low-energy circuits. Logic reed cartridges are rated 150 VAC (8W maximum) or 60 milliamperes and 30 VDC and are for use on resistive loads only. These cartridges are identified by a gray housing. The reed switch mounted within the cartridge housing consists of four basic components: glass capsule, gas (atmosphere within the glass capsule), contacts (reeds) and leads. The reeds are hermetically sealed Figure 5: Master Relay Circuit into the glass capsule in cantilever fashion so that the ends align and overlap - but with a small gap. When Note: For additional product data regarding the Class 8501 the reeds are brought into the influence of a magnetic Type X Relay request ProductData Report M-623.

field, they are attracted to one another and make 10

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays Dimensions, Shipping Weights AC Control Relay DC Control Relay, Utility Auxiliary Relay

-A M . --

A- No. Al Shipping No A Shipping of Im1 Weght of Dim. Weight oles m Lbs. *Poles IN I mm Lbs.

0- 4 3.95 1910 2.0 0-4 5.17 131 3.1 6-8 5.161 131 2.3 6-8 6.37 162 3.4 70 -2 126.36 162 2.7 10-12 7.57 193 3.8 B30080-064 Py.FOR 0-8/010 MTG.SCREWS AC Latching Relay DC Latching Relay No. A Shipping

r. - --A- -] No.

of A

Dim.

Shipping Weight of Wegit Mim.h N mm Lbs. Poes IN mm Ls.

2-4 6.54 1166 1 2.8 T-4 7.76 197 3.9 6-8 7.74F197F 3.1 6-8 8.628 4.2 AC Timing Relay DC Timing Relay 8300-0074 A Type X Relay Mounting Track NEMA 1 Enclosure Class 9991 Type UE-7 No. 'A" Shipping of Dim. Weight Relays 11 1 mm Lbs.

4 9 229 0.75 1818 457 1.5 Weight - 4 Lbs.

PROV FCR(4)'10 MTG. SCREWS 12 27 686 2.25 16 36 914 3.0 32 72 1828 6.0 Dimensions Inches MM 11

Square D Company P.O. Box 27446 Raleigh, N.C. 27611, USA

. is a registered trademark of Underwriter's Labratories.

UL is a registered trademark of Underwriter's Labratories.

CSA is a registered trademark of Canadian Standard Association.

8501CT9601 December 1996 Printed in USA ASGUARE D © 1996 Square D All Rights Reserved IgeqI%'bf%3';HNEIDEK

Check off appropriate tests:

N L.I NUcLEAR LOGISM[S INC TEST DATA SHEET OPRE-SEISMIC 0 POST-SEISMIC 0 VERIFICATION OTHER__

Job#:, - 103 *72 P.E __ Cat ID#: N/A TEST DATA FOR: VP- Y6I2(Y) V/O Rev:.C)

Item

Description:

-L rajVe, CMarnufacturer: !5-v-tti-

• Model/Part No. : 9,T(-YOk/'Un 12 L*

_j" , f/tf xs CC # 1 CC #2 CC #3 CC #4 CC # 5 Critcal characteristic (CC#)

Dimensions & Proper contactor operation at Proper contactor return to Proper contactor operation at Contact current carrying rated coil voltage de-energized state when degraded coil voltage capacity Mounting power is removed NIA N/A N/A N/A N/A Test Temperature V V V V Test surface: V=Vertical V H=Horizontal N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A QC Setup check (if applicable)

, Apply coilvoltage:/,20L.C Remove powfr from the Apply degraded voltage: lea Pole I coil: v _) _ Contact resistance:o .132.

S/coilO:327 -13 11 Height te_

NC contact NO contact NC cod'tact No contact NC contact NO contact resistance resistance resistance resistance resistance resistance DIC: y,4 *)-- Width =0#4 Pole/ PoleW Pole / Poles Pole / Pole 3 Det JI/ Apply current to one closed I*f

___ M.____0_AoDp_ e, 3Sz--. 5 c .ta>-4" -7 > lo Z t. 3.sýZ contact:

Pole1 Pole 2 Polej/ Poled Pole Dtims PF&sc Pole.?

'Polet Polef PoleA PoleS" PoleL Pole s" Remove current and allow

________Ensure the _-?15 a Qlevr cotc to cool Polel Pole7 Pole' " PoleI Pole/

mounting slots can IPole7 After 5 minute accommoda e #8

- -- a. 352- 7 o .3lL.g Contact resistance-S/C-Ir ,&,f'- .

NLI SICre" Pole 9 Pole Pole e Poiew Pole'e Pole//

Pole/.2 Pole/O Pole /.2

-'- 3 Polept Pole/h Poleo

"/~ ~ ~* ~~~~~~~~~~-A,.*, ,1/ _A_.*.*

-*A C"-2.-,

I

., / z nm .L Form No. T"-1004, Rev. 5 NOTE: Initial and date after performance of eaWcC#. Indicate Pass, qail.

NUL I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC.

MEGGER DATA SHEET D PRE-SEISMIC 2 POST-SEISMIC DEDICATION [DOTHER VP-XO1200V02, Rev. 0 TYPE: AC Control Relay, 120VAC, 12-Pole. Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL # ,i0?1/j.,,7-I7?/1 TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION n: 16MQ TEMPERATURE: ,<4z FROM MEGGER POINTS TO Relay Energized APPLIED VOLTAGE (V) I TEST RESULTS RESISTANCE (M__)

1. MEGGER POINTS FROM TO Relay Energized (V)

APPLIED RESISTANCE VOLTAGE (Me) 02 1 Point 1 Point 2 14 Point 2 Point 3 C) 0 2 Point 1 Point 3 15 Point 2 Point 4 m

C;' 3 Point 1 Point 4 16 Point 2 Point 5 4 Point 1 Point 5 17 Point 2 Point 6 5 Point 1 Point 6 18 Point 2 Point 7 6 Point 1 Point 7 19 Point 2 Point 8 7 Point 1 Point 8 20 Point 2 Point 9 8 Point I Point 9 21 Point 2 Point 10 9 Point I Point 10 22 Point 2 Point 11 10 Point I Point 11 23 Point 2 Point 12 11 Point I Point 12 24 Point 2 Ground IA 12 Point 1 Ground 1125 Point 2 Coil * /A 13 Point 1 Coil .*( 26 Point 3 Point 4 "4 55 c,~Z0 1 t o-F-. ar Ii f Xý167 Page 4 of 7

N L I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC DATA SHEET l PRE-SEISMIC POST-SEISMIC oMEGGER DEDICATION [-]OTHER VP-XO1200V02, Rev. 0 TYPE: AC Control Relay, 120VAC, 12-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL # eq9,7/6o3_-27-7*.,/

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION (1: 16M T TEMPERATURE:_A/!*

TEST RESULTS MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (NOI) FROM TO VOLTAGE (M-I)

_ __ _(V) _ ____(V) _

Relay Energized Relay Energized 27 Point 3 Point 5 ,7/OO 41 Point 4 Point 9 ,

"O 28 Point 3 Point 6 42 Point 4 Point 10 co UD 29 Point 3 Point 7 43 Point 4 Point 11 0o r'3 30 Point 3 Point 8 44 Point 4 Point 12 31 Point 3 Point 9 45 Point 4 Ground 32 Point 3 Point 10 46 Point 4 Coil 33 Point 3 Point I 1 47 Point 5 Point 6 34 Point 3 Point 12 48 Point 5 Point 7 35 Point 3 Ground 49 Point 5 Point 8 36 Point 3 Coil 50 Point 5 Point 9 37 Point 4 Point 5 51 Point 5 Point 10 38 Point 4 Point 6 52 Point 5 Point 11 39 Point 4 Point 7 53 Point 5 Point 12 40 Point4 Point 8 54 Point 5 Ground ",

7 r

-~1 -1i Page 5 of 7

N L I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET M PRE-SEISMIC EPOST-SEISMIC DEDICATION MIOTHER VP-XO1200V02, Rev. 0 TYPE: AC Control Relay, 120VAC, 12-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #_e"/O,.7-7!//

. . . -- .o TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION Q: 16Mf2 TEMPERATURE: ,/A TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MQ) 11 FROM TO VOLTAGE I  %(M%9)

_) _(V)

Relay Energized Relay Energized 55 Point 5 Coil . 9 , 69 Point 7 Ground

-o 56 Point 6 Point 7 70 Point 7 0

rQ 57 Point 6 Point 8 71 Point 8 Point 9 co 58 Point 6 Point 9 72 Point 8 Point 10 59 Point 6 Point 10 73 Point 8 Point 11 60 Point 6 Point 11 74 Point 8 Point 12 61 Point 6 Point 12 75 Point 8 Ground 62 Point 6 Ground 76 Point 8 Coil -%

63 Point 6 Coil 77 Point 9 Point 10 64 Point 7 Point 8 78 Point 9 Point 11 65 Point 7 Point 9 79 Point 9 Point 12 66 Point 7 Point 10 80 Point 9 Ground 67 Point 7 Point 11 81 Point 9 Coil- __

68 Point 7 Point 12 /.KIL 82 Point 10 Point 11 r/26/

Page 6 of 7

IN L I MEGGER DATA SHEET NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC J PRE-SEISMIC 9POST-SEISMIC fDEDICATION C OTHER VP-Xo1200V02, Rev. 0 TYPE: AC Control Relay. 120VAC. 12-Pole. Normally onen convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACT-ERiSTIC-(Ce#) 6 - ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL# 4__O___ 7__

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION (2: 16M(2 TEMPERATURE:,

_ TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MCI) FROM TO VOLTAGE (Mf)

(V) __)

Relay Energized Relay Energized "3 83 Point 10 2 Point 12 84 Point 10 Ground co f-i]

w%

co 85 Point 10 Coil cn 86 Point 11 Point 12 87 Point 11 Ground 88 Point 11 Coil 89 Point 12 Ground 90 Point 12 Coil 91 Ground Coil .- K__..

sAL ILA. 57// 1 /e5j Page 7 of 7

Check off appropriate- tests:

NL M4CLEAR LOGISTCS INC TEST DATA SHEET EI-PRE-SEISMIC 2 POST-SEISMIC VERIFICATION EI OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP-. X6J,')&'!00.9 Rev:. Job #: P.E ht-[e),._T -. Cat ID#: ../Av I

Item

Description:

.( ('A/i ./Xe..4y, /I- 4249 Ck__ Manufacturer: Model/Part No. : __________ _27

/ 1210'r Provide Summary of Test Results Check aDpropriate boxes:

. AlIl Items Passed, Discrepancy Report(s): If yes, identify below: EUYes ,lN0 ON/A List S/N or ID passed below. Qty passed:____ ____

/ D 7 7C- Z~

CC# DR#

_Acceptable I ale i OINot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

4 b (7. // /j nAcceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

1"3Acceptable ONot Acceptable' Initials/Date by PE:

DAcceptable ONot Acceptable. Initials/Date by PE:

-CAcceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by Pt:

Other (where aptlicable)

Record All M&TE Used:

NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date

-: - %. -- ,s ___ __..,_ ___"__ ___........_ ___

/1Update M&TE log on c'omputer  : .r"l/(' 7 By: L"6 NOTES: .

• l'Date " Performed By:, r-, t * ' Date: h/

Verified by: __ _ _ _-"-_ _ _ _ _ Date: S(4 ol Approved by: G ,QDate:

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Page'C.. of Form No. T-1 004, Rev. 5

&£9L x1767

Item Verification Plan Verification Plan #VP-XUDO8OV63. Rev.0

Description:

DC Utility Relay, 125VDC, 8-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts Manufacturer / Model: Square-D / 8501XUDO8OV63 Safety Function: Reliably sunnlv and interrunt nower to Class 1E Safety-Related loads Critical Characteristic Sample Si ' cceptance Criteria , -- .Ref.......... . Method.'.

Dimensions & Mounting Normal Height = 6.37 nominal 1,2 Measure and record dimensions.

CC #1 Sampling Width 2.23" nominal Depth = 3.56" nominal Ensure the mounting slots can Insert a #8 screw in each mounting slot accommodate #8 screws.

Proper contactor operation at rated 100% NO Contact Resistance < 12. 1 Perform all operational tests with the contactor

-U coil voltage NC Contact Resistance > 40Mi2 mounted to a vertical surface. Apply 125VDC to CC#2 coil. Measure and record contact resistances and 0 applied voltage.

co Ch Proper contactor return to de- 100% NO Contact Resistance > 40MD. I Remove power from coil. Measure and record energized state when power is NC Contact Resistance < 1Q contact resistances.

removed CC#3 Proper contactor operation at 100% Coil pickup voltage 1OOVDC I Perform this test with a hot coil (apply power to coil degraded coil voltage for 5 continuous minutes). Starting at 90VDC, CC#4 NO Contact resistance < 1Qf. apply the voltage to the relay coil until relay picks NC Contact resistance > 40MC2 up. If the relay does not pick up, remove voltage and increase the voltage by 2 volt increments and reapply until the relay picks up. Measure and record contact test resistances and pickup voltage. Perform this 2 times.

Verification Plan #VP-XUI)080V63. Rev.0

Description:

DC Utility Relay, 125VDC, 8-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts Manufacturer / Model: Square-D / 8501XUDO8OV63 Sfat--Fn-tinn" R-lighl cnnlxi

-, nni intpirrnt nnA1XTr tn rI"ncc l1 P O f*.P1t tA ln~ac Critical Chrcersi SamCriteria ~Aceptance Criteria..

. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . Method. .

Contact current carrying capacity EQ test Closed contact can carry 5A for 1 1 Apply 5A across a closed contact. Record applied CC#5 specimen only hour without damage. current. Maintain applied current for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

Remove current and allow the contact to cool for 5 minutes.

Open Contact Resistance > 40Mn). Measure and record resistance across the tested Closed Contact Resistance < If) contact.

Insulation Resistance 100% Resistance > 16Mn 1,3 Megger Test. Convert all contacts to NO before CC#6 performing this test. Energize coil and apply Co 2200VDC and record applied voltage and measured leakage resistances for the points shown on the CM attached Megger Data Sheets. Note: Convert all contacts on the relay to NO contacts before performing this step. The contacts are numbered as follows (see reference 1):

CONTROL RELAY*

T T T T

• .L~MIMUL MCK TI T.T TT-w TT Page 2 of 5

Verification Plan #VP-XUDO8OV63, Rev.0

Description:

DC Utility Relay, 125VDC, 8-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts Manufacturer / Model:. Sguare-D / 850 1XUDO8OV63 Safety Function: Reliably supply and interrupt Dower to Class IE SafetY-Related loads Critical Characteristic Sample Size Acceptance

.riteria Ref Method

References:

1. Square-D Industrial Control Relays Type X Class 8501 Catalog, dated December 1996.

2. Guideline for Sampling in the Commercial-Grade Item Acceptance Process, EPRI, Palo Alto, CA: 1999. Report TR-017218-R1

3. V = 1000 VDC + 2(rated voltage)

R = 10M2 + 10-2(rated voltage) MN/V.

VP Approval Prepare ct o Reviewed: Approve(_ A date tate date co Page 3 of 5

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET -I1PRE-SEISMIC r] POST-SEISMIC E DEDICATION [IOTHER VP-XUDO80V63, Rev. 0 TYPE: DC Utility Relay, 125VDC, 8-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION f: 16MKI TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (Mfl) FROM TO [VOLTAGE (V) (MO)

Relay Energized Relay Energized 1 Point 1 Point 2 14 Point 2 Point 7 10 2 Point 1 Point 3 15 Point 2 Point 8 00 rc3 3 Point 1 Point 4 16 Point 2 Ground 4 Point 1 Point 5 17 Point 2 Coil 5 Point 1 Point 6 18 Point 3 Point 4 6 Point 1 Point 7 19 Point 3 Point 5 7 Point I Point 8 20 Point 3 Point 6 8 Point 1 Ground 21 Point 3 Point 7 9 Point 1 Coil 22 Point 3 Point 8 10 Point 2 Point 3 23 Point 3 Ground 11 Point 2 Point 4 24 Point 3 Coil 12 Point 2 Point 5 25 Point4 Point 5 13 Point 2 Point 6 26 Point 4 Point 6

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET PRE-SEISMIC 0- POST-SEISMIC El DEDICATION rIOTHER VP-XUDO80V63, Rev. 0 TYPE: DC Utility Relay, 125VDC, 8-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200XTDCJ N.ACCEPTABLE INSULATION 2: 16M92 TEMPERATURE:

2?()()VnC.

_ __ TEST RESULTS MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MfM) FROM TO VOLTAGE (V) (MM)

Relay Energized Relay Energized 27 Point 4 Point 7 41 Point 7 Ground

-o 28 Point 4 Point 8 42 Point 7 Coil

.CD (0j co 29 Point 4 Ground 43 Point 8 Ground 0'

cp 30 Point 4 Coil 44 Point 8 Coil 31 Point 5 Point 6 45 Ground Coil 32 Point 5 Point 7 33 Point 5 Point 8 34 Point 5 Ground 35 Point 5 Coil 36 Point 6 Point 7 37 Point 6 Point 8 38 Point 6 Ground 39 Point 6 Coil 40 Point 7 Point 8 Page 5 of 5

Industrial Control Relays Type X Class 8501 CATALOG CONTENTS Description .................................................... Page G eneral ....... ..... . . . . . ........... .... ................. 1-3 Accessories ....................................................... 4 A pplication D ata ............................................. .... 5-7 Product Data .........................  : ...................... .... 8-9 Dim ensions ...................................................... 10 SQUARE D GROUPE SCHNEIDER Page 190 of 285

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays General Information Class 8501 Type X relays combine a rugged, heavy-duty Plug-In Contact Cartridges design with modular construction for greater flexibility. They are Contact Conversion Without Removing Terminal Screws ideal for those applications where long life, high reliability and orWires ease of maintenance are important. The Type X family offers a complete line of relays and accessories for all control applica- 1. Remove relay cover and captive T-bar actuator.

tions. 2. Remove contact cartridge and rotate 180'.

• Specified In Major Automotive Plants 3. Plug contact cartridge back in.

• Modular Design Provides Greater Versatility and Reduction In Stock 4. Replace T-bar actuator and cover.

• XUDO Version Ideal for Power Plant Applications Note: For additionalinformation regardingcontact cartridges

• Replaceable, Convertible Contacts see Page 9.

• Extremely Reliable Contacts

• 600 Volt 10 Ampere Rating (NEMA Type A600)

• Plug-In Color-Coded Contact Cartridges

• Mechanical Tie Between Contact Cartridges

• 1 and 3 Minute Timing Relays

• 8 Pole Latching Relays

• DC Operated Relays Normally Closed Normally Open (Yellow) (Green)

Modular Construction A basic relay has room for up to 4 convertible contact cartridges. It can be expanded to 6 or 8 poles by installing an adder deck. A 10 or 12 pole relay can be built by adding a second deck. The same adder deck is used for both the middle and upper decks. Latching and timing relays are made by adding a latch or timer attachment to a basic relay. This reduces the number of components required in inventory.

Ring Or Spade Lugs - Form Y414 For relays with terminals that will accept ring or spade lugs, add Form Y414 to the Class and Type number of the device being ordered. Form Y414 is available on all AC relays, DC relays and attachments at no additional charge. Ring or spade lugs must have an outside diameter of .31 inch or less and an inside diameter large enough to accommodate a #6 screw. Lugs should accept #12 - #14 gauge (AWG) stranded copper wire.

UL Listing is maintained only when AMP Plasti-Gripe #32958 insulated-barrel ring-tongue lugs are used.

Normally Closed Contacts Contact conversion is so simple that it is generally more economical to purchase relays with all contacts N.O. and Common Mechanical Tie convert contacts to N.C. as required. If it is preferred that relays Non-Overlapping Contacts be factory assembled with a combination of N.O. and N.C.

contacts, change the type number so that following the "XO",

The Type X relay is designed to provide the first number indicates the number of normally open contacts L iI a significant degree of non-overlap (N.O.) and the second number indicates the number of normally between N.O. and N.C. contacts during closed contacts (N.C.). As indicated on contact arrangement normal operation. In addition, a tables found on Page 6.

common mechanical tie between all contact cartridges is provided. There is a price adder for the factory installation of normally Therefore, the Type X relay is suitable closed (N.C.) contacts.

for use in self-checking circuits for press control and automatic transfer line applications. Since the T-bar How to Order:

actuator is held captive in the cover To Order Specify: Catalog Number plate, there is no chance of losing or Class Number Class Type Voltage Form(s)

Code forgetting to replace the mechanical tie

• Type Number when converting a contact or adding

.Voltage Code xormYe)

• Form(s) ,

another deck.

2

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays/AC General Information, Order Information AC Control Relays AC Timing Relays In addition to all of the features listed " Easily convertible On Delay or on the previous page, the Type XO Off Delay relay also provides: " Two adjustable timing ranges

" Straight-through wiring " Repeat accuracy well above

" Plug-in contact cartridges for easy +/-10%

contact conversion and replace- " Convertible 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.

ment timed contacts

" Contact conversion without " Large knob for easy adjustment removing terminal screws or wires of time delay

" Self-lifting pressure wire " Off Delay mode times out even connectors that will accept up to Type X040 after loss of power Type XO40XTE1 two #12-18 (AWG) gauge stranded copper wires ( File E78403

. Replaceable coil CCN NKCR Class 321103 File LR 60905 Normally Open Control Relay A Normally Timed Timing Relay Convertible File E78403 Timing Open Convertible Instantaneous Type CCN NKCR Convertible Contacts 0.2-60 sec. 5-180 sec.

Mode i.

Contacts Instantaneous 0 XO00

• N.O. N.C. Type Type 2

3 X020*

X030 i1* File Class LR6lmt[

32119M Contacts 0 1 1 XO00XTE1

• XO0OXTE2 4 X040* On Delay 2 1 1 XO20XTE1 - XO20XTE2

• 6 X060- 4 1 1 XO40XTE1* XO40XTE2*

a XO80 0 1 1 XOo0XTD1

• XO00XTD2

• 10 XO1000* Off Delay 2 1 1 XO2OXTD1

• X020XTD2 12 X01200* 4 1 1 XO4OXTD1

• XO4OXTD2

• A A maximum of 5 N.C. contacts is allowed on 9-12 pole relays.

AC Latching Relays AC Master Relays " Mechanical Latch holds all

• 20 Ampere Contact Rating due to contacts switched even after use of Master Contact Cartridges removal of power from

• Provisions for Standard Cartridges replaceable Latching Coil.

to be used in contact cavities not oc- " Provides sequence memory in cupied by.Master Cartridges in 2-8 the event of power loss. Ideal pole AC relay for press control, process

" Straight-through wiring 3'a control and punch presses.

" Plug-in contact cartridges for easy " Replaceable Unlatch Coil to contact conversion* and switch contacts back to replacement original state.

" Contact conversion without Type XM040 " Continuously rated Unlatch Type XO40XL removing terminal screws or wires Coil (no coil clearing contacts

" Self-lifting pressure wire connectors that will accept up to required).

two #12-18 (AWG) gauge stranded copper wires Normally Open Latching Relay

" Replaceable coil Convertible File CCN E78403 NKCR Instantaneous Type Number of N.O. I Open Type t Contacts 20 Ampere 2 XO20XL* File LR 60905 Convertible Type SFile CCN NKCR E78403 3 4

XO30XL**

XO40XL*

Class 3211 03 Contacts File LR 60905 6 XO60XL-2 XMO20* 8 XOSOXL 4 XM040* Class 321103 6 XMO60

• Voltage Code must be specified to order this product. Refer to standard voltage codes listed t Attachments not permitted on this relay. below and insert as shown in How To Order.

Voltage Codes:

AC Voltages - Hz. Code 12-60 Vil 24-60 Vol 24-50 VW2 How to Order: 48-60 V18 48-50 V16 To Order Specify: Catalog Number 120 - 60/110 - 50 V02 208-60 VO8 Class Number Class Type Voltage Code 240 - 60/220 - 50 V03 277-60 V04

• Type oltage Code Number 8501 V02 VX40 480 - 60/440 - 50 V06 600 - 60/550 - 50 V07 3

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays/DC General Information, Order Information DC Control Relays DC Latching Relays

" Replaceable, highly reliable pure

• Mechanical Latch holds all DC Power Plant: no economizing contacts switched even after resistors, overlapping contacts removal of power from replaceable or dual-wound coil Latching Coil

" Utilizes the same Type XB Adder

• Provides sequence memory inthe Decks and attachments as the event of power loss AC Version " Ideal for sequencing applications

" Offers all the features of the AC such as press control, process Relay control and punch presses

" Available in up to 8 Poles " Replaceable Unlatch coil to switch Type XDO40XDL

" All contact poles are usable Type XDO40 contacts back to original state since no overlapping contacts Normally Open Latching Relay AF are needed Convertible File CCN E78403 NKCR Instantaneous Type

" Self-lifting pressure wire connectors that will accept up to Contacts two #12-18 (AWG) gauge stranded copper wires 2 XDO20XDL *s LR 60905 64 XDO40XDL *File XD060XDL* Class 3211 03 Normally Open Control Relay 8 XDOO8XDL*

Convertible Instantaneous Type M, File E78403 A Caution: Unlatch coil is rated for intermittent duty and should be connected through a N.O.

CCN NKCR Contacts contact of the relay if the input signal is maintained. Order one more N.O. contact than the application requires to use as a coil clearing contact. If a coil clearing contct is required in 0 XDO00* series with the latch coil, consult your local Square D field sales office.

2 XD020 4 XD040* 6 Class 321160905 LR 03 6 XD060* File 8 XOO80 DC Utility Relays Ideal for utility plant applications DC Timing Relays where reliable performance and a

• Easily convertible On Delay or Off pure DC power plant are required. In Delay addition to the Type XDO relay fea-

• Two adjustable timing ranges tures, the Type XUDO provides:

• Repeat accuracy well above +/-10% " Up to 12 poles N.O. or N.C.

• Convertible 1 NO. and 1 N.C. timed " Nominal 125VDC coil, capable of contacts handling 140VDC continuously

• Large knob for easy adjustment of and picking up at 105VDC after time delay having been operated at 140VDC

• Off Delay mode times out even after continuously. Other voltages with Type XDO40 loss of power Type XDO40XTE2 comparable operating character-istics are available U File E78403 File LR 60905 . Enclosed device capable of operating in 145°F ambient CCN NKCR 3211 03 Class Number of Convertible Open Type (* File E78403 Normally Timed Timing Relay CCN NKCR Contacts Timing Open Convertible Convertible Contacts 0.2-60 sec. 5-180 sec. N.O. N.C. Type Mode Instantaneous 4 0 XUD040

• CFile LR60905 Contacts NO. N.C. Type Type Class 3211 03 0 4 XUDO04

• 0 1 1 XDOOOXTE1

• XDOOOXTE2

• 8 0 XUDO80

• On Delay 2 1 1 XDO20XTE1

• XDO20XTE2

• 0 8 XUDO08*

4 1 1 XDO40XTEI

• XDO40XTE2*

12 0 XUD01200

• 0 1 1 XDOOOXTD1* XOOOOXTD2

• 0 12 XUD00012

• Off Delay 2 1 1 XD020)TD1

• XD020)CTD2

• 4 1 1 XDO40XTD1 *-I XDO4oXTD2

• Voltage code must be specified to order this product. Refer to standard voltage code listed below and insert as shown in How To Order.

Voltage Codes for 8501 XUDO Relays ONLY: Voltage Codes for 8501 XDO Relays:

For Replacement Coils ......................... Page 6 DC Voltages Code DC Voltages Code 6 V50 6

12 V50 V51 12 24 V51 V53 How to Order:

24 V53 32 V54 4 V56 48 V56 To Order Specify:_ Catalog Number 48 V6 72 V58 125 V63 90 V59

• Class Number Class Type Voltage Code 250 '67 115/125 V62

• Type Number V_3

-Voltage Code 8501 XDO40 '153 230/250 V66 4

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays Accessories, Order Information Class 8501 Type Mechanical Latch Attachment - Mounts on any 2 through 8 pole relay (except XMO master relay). The Type XL and XDL latch FilFe E78403 attachments are identical in size and mounting provisions. The Type XL AC latch attachment has a continuous-duty-rated coil *UCCN NKCR2 which is replaceable. The Type XDL DC latch attachment has an Intermittent-rated coil (replaceable) and should be con-nected through a N.O. contact of the basic relay if the Input signal is maintained to the unlatch coil.

AC Latch Attachm ent .... ...... ........................................................................... efit Fie LR60955 XL* %41170Class321102 DC Latch Attachment ........................................................................... XDL*

-I- + I Pneumatic Timer Attachment - Mounts on any 0 through 4 pole AC or DC relay (except XMO master relay). It provides 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. convertible timed contacts, which are the same Type XC-1 carttidges used on the basic relay. Two timing ranges are available, and conversion from On Delay to Off Delay or vice versa is easy. File E78403 Off Delay CCN NKCR2 0.2-60 seconds .............................................

5-180 seconds..............................

XTD1 XTD2 AM File* LR 6090 On Delay 0 .2-60 seconds ...................................................................................... XTE1 5-180 seconds ....................................................................................... XTE2

-I- -I- 4

"<N Timer Lockout Cover - Fits over the time delay adjustment knob of any Type XT timing attachment. The Lockout Cover is designed to protect the time setting against accidental adjustment. It mounts directly to the timing attachment with two included screws ....... X.J1 Adder Decks - Adder decks are used to expand the number of poles on a relay. The basic 4 pole relay can be easily converted to an File E78403 8 pole or 12 pole relay by installing one or two adder decks. The Class 8501 Type XB20 comes with 2 convertible contact cartridges CCN NKCR2 and willaccept 2 additional convertible contact cartridges. The Class 8501 Type XB40 comes with 4 convertible contact cartridges. The same Type XB adder deck is used for both the middles and upper decks of the AC or DC relay. Re6es 0File W ith 2 N.O. contact cartridges .............................................................................. XB20 ifPe Class3211402

" With 4 N.O,contact cartridges .. XB40 Number of Number of

• Logic Reed Adder Deck - Used for switching low energy circuits. The N.O. N.C. F E Logic Reed Adder Deck is supplied with either one or two logic reed Logic Reed Logic Reed File E78403 dcartidgesfixed into the center positions of an adder deck. Contact Contact Cartridges Contact Cartridges CCN NKCR2 cartridges are neither convertible nor replaceable. Standard cartridges can 2 0 XBR20 be inserted in unused cavities of the Logic Reed Adder Deck. One or two 1 1 XBR1 1 LRe905 0F9ie Logic Reed Adder Decks may be added to the basic 4 pole relay. See 1 0 XBR10 C:ass2321102 Application Data on Page 5 for electrical ratings. 0 1 XBROI 0 2 XBR02 Contact Cartridges - The Type X relay offers 4 Types of contact cartridges. All are color-coded for visual identification of each Type.

Note: For additional information regarding contact cartridge see Pages 9-10 Standard Cartridge -The standard cartridge, used for most applications, has a black case .................................. XC1 Overlapping Cartridge - Same NEMA Type A600 AC rating as standard cartridge and a NEMA Type P150 DC rating. When it is used in the N.O. mode it willclose early and when used in the N.C. mode it willopen late. Iftwo or more are used together, the N.O. contacts  % Fa 78403 willdose before the N.C. contacts open as the relay picks up. Overlap also occurs during dropout Overlapping cartridge has a red case. XC2

• CCN NKCR2 May be ordered factory installed: Form Substitute 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. overlapping cartridges for 2 standard cartridges ..........................................

Substitute 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. overlapping cartridges for 4 standard cartridges .........................................

Y1591 I File LR 60905 Y1592 Class 321102 Master Cartridge - Features the same contact ratings as the Type XC1 standard cartridge except it has a 20 Ampere continuous current rating instead of 10 Amperes. It can be used in circuits where a master relay is required. Master cartridge has a blue case.

Maximum of 6 master cartridges may be used on any 7 and 8 pole AC relays. Do not use any master cartridges on 9-12 pole AC or any DC-operated devices ...................................................... .......................... XC4 Logic Reed Cartridge - See Logic Reed Adder Deck above .......................................................... -

Mounting Track - The mounting track has pre-punched mounting holes to simplify mounting the track on the control panel. The relay T7., mounting screws are factory installed on the track so that the relays can be hung prior 9" long for 4 relays ............................................................

18" long for 8 relays ............................................................................

to tightening the screws.

.......................... XM4 XM8 27"' long for 12 relays ...................................................................................... XM12 36" long for 16 relays .. ......................................................................... XM16 7Z ' long for 32 relays ...................................................................................... XM32

-1 +

ManualTestTool - Provides a means of manually switching the contacts of a basic relay or timing relay and holding all contacts in their switched state until the tool is removed. This simplifies the checking of control circuits without power on the coil or contacts ......... XA1 File E78403 CCN NKCR2 Transient Suppressor - Consists of an R-C circuit designed to suppress coil generated transients to approximately 200 percent of peak voltage. Itis particularly useful when switching the Type X relay near solid state equipment It is designed for use on coils up to 120VAC . ................................................................................................... X S11 File LR60905 140Class 321102 NEMA Type I Enclosure - Formed from sheet steel to provide strength and rigidity. Two conduit knockouts are located in both the top Class and bottom of the enclosure. The enclosure is furnished with self tapping screws for mounting the relay inside the enclosure. Accom- 9991 cN E7403 modatesa single 4 or 8 pole AC or DC relay, 12 pole AC relay, 4 pole AC latching relay, and 4 pole AC timing relay. NOTE: The 4 pole CNNKCR Type DC latching relay, 4 pele DC timing relay, 8 pole AC and DC latching relays and 12 pole UtilityAuxiliary Relay will not fit. UE7

• Mechanical Latch Attachment Voltage Codes:

ACVoltages Code DC Voltage Code For Replacement Coils ................... ..... Page 6 24-60 Vol 6 V51 How to Order:

24-50 V12 18 V99 120-60/110-50 V02 18 V53 To Order Specify: Catalog Number 208-60 V08 24 V53 240 - 60/220 - 50 V03 48 V56 277 -60 V04 72 V58

• Class Number Class Type 480 - 60/440 - 50 V06 1159125 V62 -Type Number 600 -60/550-50 V077230/1250 V66 - Voltage Code for mechanical latch attachment __8501 _

- Form for factory installed overlapping contacts

+ Specify voltage on order.

5

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMAType Relays Application Data Average Operating Times In Milliseconds Voltage Range: AC operation, +10/-15%

Device Pick-Up Drop-Out DC operation, +10/-20%

AC Relay 15 16 In the case of dual rated DC coils, the range is +10% of the AC Latching Relay 15 13 larger number and -20% of smaller number.

DC Relay 37 21 Operating Temperature Range:

DC Latching Relay 37 45

-40'C to +711C

(-40'F to +1600F)

Contact Ratings AC Ratings DC Ratings Resistive Inductive 75% Power Inductive Resistive Type 35% Power Factor Factor of Factor Cartridge Volts Make Break Make. Break Volts Max. Make and Make NEMA Continuous and Continuous NEMA Break Amperes Continuous and Break Rating area VA Amperes VA Amperes Amp res Rating (138VA Max. for Amperes Anderea Amperes 300 V or Less)Amperes 120 60 7200 6 720 10 10 125 1.1 5 4 5 Standard 240 30 7200 3 720 10 10 250 P600 0.55 5 0.8 5 460 15 7200 1,5 720 10 10 301-600 0.20 5 - -

Overlapping 600 12 7200 1.2 720 10 10 125 P150 1.1 5 4 5 125 1.1 5 4 55 A600 Same as standard cartridge above except substitute 250 P600 0.55 5 0.8 Master - -

20 Ampere for the continuous Ampere rating 301 -600 0.20 5 - -

Logic Reed - - 150VAC, 150MA, 6W Maximum - 30VDC, 60MA Maximum of six 8501 Type XC - 4 Master Cartridges may be used on any 7 and 8 pole AC device. Do not use any Master Cartridges on 9-12 pole AC or any DC-operated relays.

Contact Arrangement The following tables list all pole arrangements and the location of the N.O. and N.C. poles. Relays purchased from the factory will correspond to these tables. For example: an X012 will have one N.O. pole inposition 1; positions 2 and 3 will have N.C. poles; position 4 will be a space.

Note: Note: Foradditionalinformation regardingcontact cartridgessee Pages 9 and 10.

2, 3, and 4 Pole Relay -

All contacts convertible 6 and 8 Pole Relay - All contacts convertible 10 and 12 Pole Relay- All contacts convertible No. Pole Numbert No. Pole Number t No. Pole Number t Pole Number t Pole Number "

of Type 1 2 3 4 of Type 5 6 7 8 of Type 5 78 No. 10 11 12 NO. 9 10 11 12 Poles Poles I 1_1 2 1 4 Poles I of Type 678 of Type 1 2 31 4 Poles 5 7 X020 S O O S Poles S 0 0 S 0 O2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 XO11 S O 1 X002 S 1 I1_

-s X060 0

-d-O Ow X080 0 0 0 0 0 1 O SLO O S 0 0 0 0 XO1000 0 X01200 0 0 0 0 X030 0 1 0 S X051 1 O 0 X071 0 0O 0 0 0 0 0 X021 0 1 0 S 0 O S 0 1 0 S 0 0 S 0 1 0 0 X042 S 1ý X062 0 0

X 012 1 I S XOog00 0 1 0 0 X01101 0 0 0 0 X003 1 1 1 '- O

_a 0 0 0 0 1 I 77 0000 0 0 0 X040 0 0 0 O 6 XO33 1r 0O 1r 10 X053 0 1

_a S o 0 S O0 1 1 6O X031 0 10 0 X00802 0 1 1 O X01002 0 0 0 0 4 X022 0 1 1 0 X024 S 1 *S 8 X044 O01 0 0 1 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 X013 0 1 1 1 O S 0 0 S a 1 1 0 X004 1. 1 1 1 X015 S X035 0 1 T X00703 0 1 T OL 0 1 1 0 X00903 0 1 0 0 I 1 0 1 T 0 1 0 0 00 0 0 X006 X026 S Y -a S 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 X00604 0 1 1 0 XO0804 0 1 1 0 X017 1 1 10 12 1 1 XO08 1 1 X00505 0 1 1 1 X00705 0 1 1 0 1 10 0 0 11 0 S 1 1 S o 1 1 0 CONTROL RELAY* X00406 0 1 1 0 X00606 0 1 1 0 TIMED CONTACTS WHEN USED 0 1 10 IT0 1 10

÷1.1101 TO*DECK "1,£,2 12NO INCINO 2NC SL 1 L 0 1 1 O X00307 0 1 1 1 X00507 0 1 1 0 T T T T O I 021 10 -- 1 1 1 s I I S 0 1 1 O X00208 0 1 1 0 XO0408 0 1 1 0 T T T T POLE

• 13 POLE

• 14 1

8 N.C. Poles Maximum 1 1 1 1 1 8 N.C. Poles Maximum 1 1 TT

• TT XTD & XTE Timer Attachments -All Contacts Convertible No. of 11 Pole Number t Mouvwo SLO1.T:; Type Timed Contacts 13 14

- For latch relay use same 2 XTD XTE 0 1 diagram as above except for the addition of an unlatch coil (8 pole maximum). t 0- Normally Open Contact I - Normally Closed Contact S - Space for Future Contact 6

Industrial Control Relays Type X- NEMAType Relays Application Data Replacement AC Magnet Coils For Relays Suffix Number Coil Equipment to be serviced Coil Prefix or (Complete Coil Number consists of Prefix or Class and Type followed by Suffix Number) Volt-Amperes Class and Hz I____

380 440 480 550 600 I 110-115 120 208 220 240 277 Type Poles Type 24 Class Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Inrush Sealed 60 23 - 44 51 52 53 55 -- 62 - 65 148 23 8501. X All 9998-X 50 24 44 - 52 53 - - - 62 - 65 - 143 25 Replacement DC Magnet Coils For Relays 7

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays Application Data Definition of Ratings Contact Life Control relays are designed for switching inductive and The life of control relay contacts depends upon the magnitude resistive loads in both AC and DC circuits. By far, the greatest and characteristics of the electrical load, inductance, duty cycle, number of applications involve the switching of inductive loads mechanical properties of the device in which they are used, in AC circuits. Typical loads include solenoids and operating voltage fluctuations, environment, etc. The Class 8501 Type X coils of such devices as other relays, timers, starters and relay carries a NEMA A600 rating. NEMA A600 relays have 600 contactors. VAC spacings, a 10 ampere continuous rating, a 60 ampere make rating, and a 6 ampere break rating at 120 volt AC for an The magnets on AC devices exhibit an inrush current when first AC inductive load.

switched on, with the current subsiding to some lesser value, known as the sealed current, after the magnet has moved to its When control circuit relays are operated at maximum rated sealed position. DC devices do not have an inrush current load, the life of the contact is usually less than that of the when first energized. Relay contacts may also be called upon mechanical life of the device. If the application requires a large to carry current continuously for long periods of time. This has number of operations during the life of the contacts, the resulted in recognizing three important ratings for relay contacts must be applied at values less than their maximum contacts: the make rating, break rating and the continuous make and break ratings. NEMA Standard ICS 5-1993 current rating. In addition, ratings are further divided into Paragraph 8 recommends that control relays for automatically-categories which depend upon whether the load is resistive or operated sequencing systems be utilized with loads of less than inductive in nature. 25% of the 60 ampere make and 6 ampere break ratings. It does not recommend using a relay at its maximum ampere Contact Ratings rating where the number of operations are expected to substantially exceed the 6000 operations required by the Contact Ratings on page 5 shows current and VA (volt- endurance test in NEMA Standard ICS 5-1993 Paragraph 8.

ampere) values in sufficient detail for most applications. A short definition of some of the terms used inthe table follow:

Life-Load Guide

" Resistive Rating - Indicates the resistive load that the The information shown is provided to estimate the service life of contacts can make, break or carry continuously. a Class 8501 Type X control relay. This information is not to be Resistive ratings are based on a 75% power factor. taken as a guarantee, but rather an approximate life

" Inductive Rating - Refers to loads such as coils of expectancy. The information is based on the following:

contactors, starters and relays and solenoids that contacts can make, break and carry continuously. " Operating 40 hours4.62963e-4 days <br />0.0111 hours <br />6.613757e-5 weeks <br />1.522e-5 months <br /> per week Inductive rating tests are run with 35% power factor " Operating 52 weeks per year load. " Inrush and continuous current ratings not exceeded

" Make Rating - Applies to the current that can be han- " Application in usual service conditions (such as dled by the contact at the time of contact closure. In in- described in NEMA Standard ICS 1-1993 Paragraph 6) ductive AC circuits, the momentary inrush current is " Operating at 120 Volts 60 Hertz often 10 times the sealed current, and a relay must be able to handle this inrush current as well as be able to 15 1 break it in an emergency. The endurance test listed in NEMA Standard ICS 5-1993 Paragraph 8 requires relay contacts to make the make rating for 6,000 operations.

" Break Rating - Refers to the .current that can be interrupted successfully by the contact. The inductive 10 4-f-

break rating is always less than the resistive or 300 60 continuous ratings. When contacts break an inductive Operations Operations Per Per circuit, the inductance of the load tends to maintain the "-j Hour Hour ~gg~ 0.0, current. The result is an arc across the contacts which 4)

'a-S* <

causes heating and erosion of the contacts. Because of Z0c the extra heat generated, the allowable inductive current o LL 5

must be less than the resistive current for equal contact life. The endurance test from NEMA Standard ICS 5-1993 Paragraph 8 requires relay contacts to interrupt the break rating for 6,000 operations. It also requires relay contacts to interrupt the make rating for 6 operations in an emergency. 0

" Continuous Rating - Continuous rating indicates the 1.5 3 6 60 load that the contacts can carry continuously without Break Current - Amperes making or breaking the circuit and without exceeding a Figure 1: Service Live vs. Break Current certain temperature rise.

8

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays Product Data Isolation The construction of the cartridges is such that, with the relay The class 8501 Type X relay has electrical clearances for up to mounted in the normal manner, external dust is virtually 600 volts. All contacts are single-throw double-break contacts prevented from entering in to the contact area. A glass-filled and are completely isolated from one another. This means that thermoplastic is used for the contact carrier in the cartridge.

different contacts on the same relay may be connected to This material was selected because of its ability to withstand control circuits having different voltage values. It also means high operating temperatures and its low wear rate. The plug-in that if different contacts are connected to different sources, interface between the relay terminals and the cartridges consist polarity on adjacent connections need not be the same. of fine silver which, under pressure, assures a reliable Electrical spacings per UL 508: connection. The force of the connection is in excess of one pound.

• Of not less than 3/8" (9.5mm) through air and 1/2" (12.7mm) over the surface of insulating material are Contact Cartridge Types and Color Codes maintained between uninsulated live parts and an uninsulated ground part other than the enclosure, or Four types of contact cartridges are available for use with the exposed metal part. Type X relay: standard contact cartridge which is black, over-lapping contact cartridge which is red, logic reed contact

• Of not less than 1/2" (12.7mm) measured over the cartridge which is grey (only available when ordered as a shortest distance are maintained between any Class 8501 Type XBR adder deck) and the master contact uninsulated live part and the walls of a metal enclosure, cartridge which is blue. All are the same size and color coded including fittings for conduit or armored cable. for visual identification. In addition, the normally open contact symbol appears on a green background and the normally Contact Cartridge Construction closed symbol -A- appears on a yellow background. This color Each contact on the Type X relay is a double-break contact. coded scheme is consistent throughout the Type X product This places, for practical purposes, two single-break contacts offering.

inseries so that two arcs occur when the contact interrupts the current flow. This division of energy in the arc materially A. Standard Contact Cartridge extends the electrical life of the contact when compared to devices employing single-break contacts. The stationary and Standard Type X relay contact cartridges are designed movable contacts are made of silver-cadmium-oxide. This so that there is a mechanical differential between choice of material is important because of its resistance to normally open and normally closed contacts mounted in welding when closing on the inrush currents normally the same relay. This means that the normally closed associated with inductive loads. It also helps to reduce contact contacts open substantially before the normally open erosion which occurs with repeated interruption of inductive contacts close during the stroke of the relay. This non-loads. The movable contact is split down the center to provide overlapping also takes place during the drop-out of the two parallel paths per pole. The fact that both halves of the relay. The standard cartridge, used in most applications, movable contact are rigidly connected assures that all four has a black case. It is rated NEMA A600 for AC contact points will be held closed with nearly equal force. In applications and NEMA P600 for DC applications.

addition, a conductive bridge straddles the two fingers to provide a cross-over path for even greater contact reliability. B. Overlapping Contact Cartridge There are certain cases where an intentional overlap is I , I desired, and an optional contact has been designed for these purposes. The overlapping contact cartridge, which has a red case, has the same NEMA A600 AC contact rating as the standard cartridge and a NEMA P150 DC rating.

Double Break Contact When an overlapping contact cartridge is inserted into the relay as a normally open contact, it will close sooner (early closing contact) in the stroke of the relay than a Contact Bridge standard contact. If it is inserted as a normally closed contact, it will open later (late opening contact) in the stroke of the relay than a standard contact.

When two such contacts are used in conjunction with one another, they will produce an output signal to the load which is originated through the normally closed contact and maintained through the normally open contact after the relay has picked up. The overlap 6;

Figure 2: Movable Contact feature prevents dropout of the load during the transfer from the pickup to the dropout circuit.

9

Industrial Control Relays Type X - NEMA Type Relays Product Data Contact Cartridge Types and Color Codes con't. contact. In the case of a normally open logic reed See below for illustration of a typical application with contact, this occurs when the relay coil is energized and two limit switches, LS1 and LS2. The machine is such the magnet carrier moves down, bringing the magnet that LS2 is closed to pick up CR1 but, because of the close enough to close the contacts. The contact ratings cam limitations, LS2 opens before the dropout of the of the logic reed cartridge are specified as maximum relay is desired. Assuming that the dropout of the relay wattage, maximum voltage, and maximum current. The can be performed by the opening of LS1, we have a maximum voltage times the maximum switched current natural application for overlapping contacts. cannot exceed the maximum wattage.

L1 CR1 LS1 CR1 Figure 4: Logic Reed Construction D. Master Contact Cartridge LS2 Master contact cartridges, which have a blue case,

• feature a 20 ampere AC continuous current rating Y

• Denotes Overlap instead of 10 amperes. Their AC make and break rating remain 7200VA and 720VA respectively. The master Figure 3: Overlapping Contact Application contact cartridge can be used in circuits where a master relay is required. Under normal operating conditions, the master contacts are rated to carry the total C. Logic Reed Contact Cartridge continuous current of all the loads in the circuit. They do not make or break this current except in an emergency.

The logic reed contact cartridges are available only in In an emergency situation, master contacts can the logic reed adder deck. The contact cartridges are interrupt their break rating 6,000 operations and permanently fixed within the center positions of the interrupt their make rating for 6 operations. This is in adder deck and can not be converted or changed in accordance with NEMA Standard ICS 5-1993 Part 2.

position. The adder decks are available in a combination of normally open or normally closed Note: A maximum of 6 master cartridgesmay be used contacts. The outside positions of the adder deck can on a 7 or 8 pole AC device. Do not use any master be filled with any other type of cartridge available in the cartridges on 9-12 pole AC or and DC-operated Type X contact cartridge line. The adder deck can be relays.

added to any 0-8 pole AC or DC relay. L1 L2 A logic reed cartridge consists of a magnetic reed CR switch mounted in the plug in-cartridge housing in M place of the standard silver-cadmium-oxide contacts. It Master Relay CRM CRM is used for improved contact reliability when switching low-energy circuits. Logic reed cartridges are rated 150 VAC (8W maximum) or 60 milliamperes and 30 CR VDC and are for use on resistive loads only. These cartridges are identified by a gray housing. The reed switch mounted within the cartridge housing consists of four basic components: glass capsule, gas (atmosphere within the glass capsule), contacts (reeds) and leads. The reeds are hermetically sealed Figure 5: Master Relay Circuit into the glass capsule in cantilever fashion so that the ends align and overlap - but with a small gap. When Note: For additional product data regarding the Class 8501 the reeds are brought into the influence of a magnetic Type X Relay request ProductData Report M-623:

field, they are attracted to one another .and make 10

Industrial Control Relays Type X- NEMA Type Relays Dimensions, Shipping Weights AC Control Relay DC Control Relay, Utility Auxiliary Relay A Shipping No. Shipping No of Dim. Weight Sof Dm. Weight IN mm Lbs. O'f4IsNo~ m Lbs.

Poles 0-4 3.95 100 2.0 0-4 5.17 131 3.1 6-8 5.16 131 2.3 6 6.37 162 3.4 10-12 6.36 162 2.7 3.8 10-12 7.571 193 AC Latching Relay DC Latching Relay No' 'A7 Shipping A Shipping of Dim. Weight of No Dim.

Poles - IN mm Lbs. Poles Wegh 2 4 6.54 166 2.8- ý Lbs'

-4 7.761 197 3.9 6 -8 7.74 1197 3.1 6-8 8.96 1228 14.2 0080-SO PROV.FOR (2)-8/-o10 T SCREWS M2)8/p10MTG.SCREWS AC Timing Relay DC Timing Relay Type X Relay Mounting Track NEMA 1 Enclosure Class 9991 Type UE-7 No. "A" Shipping of Dim. Weight

.,Relays , m Lbs.

4 9 229 0.75 8 18 457 1.5 Weight - 4 Lbs.

12 27 686 2.25 PROV FOR (4)"10 MTG. SCREWS 16 36 914 3.0 32 72 1828 6.0 Dimensions Inches MM 11

Square D Company P.O. Box 27446 Raleigh, N.C. 27611, USA M& is a registered trademark of Underwriter's Labratories.

UL is a registered trademark of Underwriter's Labratories.

CSA is a registered trademark of Canadian Standard Association.

© 1996 Square D All Rights Reserved 8501CT9601 December 1996 Printed in USA SDUARE ID Igeq91i{J35CHNEIDER

Check off appropriate tests:

N L I MNcLEAR L4-GSTICS BqC TEST DATA SHEET OPRE-SEISMIC d'POST-SEISMIC [B VERIFICATION 0 OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP- iX*(1I)CLV6$* I m IIIm -Rev:_. Job #: *,.4 - l OZ P.E h CT" Cat M:D ' N/A-Item

Description:

4 ~'"a~1" b _00I nufacturer: -Sv w Model/Part No.:__ _ _ _ _ _

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC#1 CC#2 CC # 3 CC#4 CC#5 Dimensions & Proper contactor operation at Proper contactor return to Proper contactor operation. at Contact current carrying Mounting rated coil voltage de-energized state when degraded coil voltage capacity

. ......... _ power is removed Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical V V V V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Apply coil voltage: l. Remove power from the Apply degraded voltage: 1047,k Pole ,, " 7 S/N: * /,,27-."_TS I. Heigh.t-¥ =94 /: coil: e Contact resistance: c, NC contact NO contact NC contact NO contact NC contact NO contact a D/C: P__.Width=,

,*... 2 W2. resistance resistance resistance resistance resistance resistance C Pole/ Pole .I Pole Pole G Pole / Pole 4?

Apply current to one Depth =3,"55 ,/.? . . _ o.V.

a' - X . 4* Sz_ -3._5Z closed contact: d"*L DOA W Pole3 Poley Pole3 Pole.)e Pole a Polef

&T .6[14[*, .0 3.-_.. Time: ','

Ensure the Pole d" Pole i Pole $ Pole 6 Pole5- Poles mounting slots can Remove current and all accommodate #8 *._'* *.d*' ,.*,~'..

O.*eO A..?L- de,,gc-_ 6P, !5 contact to cool: STY',73 screws? I Polo" Pole A Polel PoleW Pole I PoleS NLI S/C: After 5 minute

~ (i - ~ ~~ ~Contact resistance;,g, 9;*Z

_________~~~KT _ KL# ~ __ _ If__ _

r NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC/#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Pagel,=* of 7_. -FarmNo. T-1004, Rev. 5

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET 5l PRE-SEISMIC [2'POST-SEISMIC P1 DEDICATION 'OTHER VP-XUDO80V63, Rev. 0 TYPE: DC Utility Relay, 125VDC, 8-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) *6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #____________

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION 0): 16Mf- TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS 1 APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MQ) FROM TO VOLTAGE (V) (MQ2)

CD "0

(V)

Relay Energized Relay Energized w

CD 2, 1 Point 1 Point 2 2 -1o 14 Point 2 Point 7 _,__-_ .

co 0

2 Point I Point 3 15 Point 2 Poinoint 8 3 Point 1 Point 4 16 Point 2 Ground 4 Point 1 Point 5 17 Point 2 Coil :f 5 Point I Point 6 18 Point 3 Point 4 6 Point I Point 7 19 Point 3 Point 5 7 Point 1 Point 8 20 Point 3 Point 6 8 Point 1 Ground 21 Point 3 Point 7 9 Point 1 Coil 22 Point 3 Point 8 .....

10 Point 2 Point 3 23 Point 3 Ground 11 Point 2 Point 4 24 Point 3 Coil 12 Point 2 Point 5 L25 Point 4 Point 5 13 Point 2 Point 6 1r 26 Point4 Point 6 /

4- CUtL -4i9 c:x .51-ff 2-yr Page 4 of 5

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET 1- PRE-SEISMIC 0 POST-SEISMIC )E DEDICATION MOTHER VP-XUD08LV63. Rev. 0 TYPE: DC Utility Relay, 125VDC, 8-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL # lo3P3 -TIj TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN, ACCEPTABLE INSULATION Q: 16MO TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MN2) FROM TO VOLTAGE (V) (M92)

(V)

Relay Energized Relay Energized C) 27 Point 4 Point 7 2 41 Point 7 Ground *'"c '/_. ,"

4ý.

0 28 Point 4 Point 8 42 Point 7 Coil co c-F CA 29 Point 4 Ground 43 Point 8 Ground 30 Point 4 Coil 44 Point 8 Coil 31 Point 5 Point 6 45 Ground Coil

• __

32 Point 5 Point 7 _4 33 Point 5 Point 8 i er/lc 34 Point 5 Ground 35 Point 5 Coil k 36 Point 6 Point 7 37 Point 6 Point 8 38 39 40 Point 6 Point 6 Point 7 Coil

• Ground Point 8 flaS55 4:- Page 5 of 5

Check off appropriate tests:

N L NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC I TEST DATA SHEET -PRE-SEISMIC 0' POST-SEISMIC M VERIFICATION 0- OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VPAU ) 0 TO L)93 Rev: 45 1 Job #: nQL- 7L P.E _CT Cat MD#: N/A Item

Description:

/ !L A-, Manufacturer: 50 uq12a Model/Part No.: 602/0')CJ2~V63*

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC# I CC#2 CC#3 CC#4 CC # 5 Dimensions & Proper contactor operation at Proper contactor return to Proper contactor operation at Contact current carrying Mounting rated coil voltage de-energized state when degraded coil voltage capacity power is removed ...

Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical V V V V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) NIA N/A N/A N/A N/A Apply coil voltage: I*"*c. Remove power from the Apply degraded vo1tage.*nL4. Pole /) ., . 7 coil: IeA Contact resistance:

sN: 60 10327-T51_ 0 .H-eight = q_0' _. &.-3*-

NC contact NO contact NC contact NO contact NC contact NO contact

• D/C: flOD'* Width=?.,,5/" resistance resistance resistance resistance resistance resistance W Pole I Pole 2 Polef Pole . Pole ) Pole-2 Apply current to one

_________Depth .'oM

=3.Som Z d

o .z 3 -

e. -:a5 .9OM;2 44 CO e .Z cloge contact: 5 Pole3 Pole# Pole3 Pole* Pole 3 Pole*L

.... =ad;)M*2.. 0-*.*7. C. Z'& >OAggt2 *~ *Z- . -_ Time: "

Ensure the Poler PolePo Poler Poei POleW, Pole6 mounting slots can Remove current and allow 1'6:z i accommodat #8 _b(,6A5 , 0. > 3&Z af4jKo e>5.-z_ contact to cool:

screws? r "

• Pole7 Pole 9 Pole7 Pole S Pa1d Pole NLI S/C: After 5 minute VIAN__ W 00_1 _ _A_6_2_ 6-.*-32

& 2.. .. I_. a4* _: * * -"SgQ Contact resistance: o03_"2

, P I' , 0/67 .,'. ,

I /

~~d,~3O7~7 NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Paje _ý_ of Form No. T-1 004, Rev. 5

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET -1 PRE-SEISMIC 2f POST-SEISMIC J9 DEDICATION F'lOTHER VP-XUDO80V63, Rev. 0 TYPE: DC Utility Relay, 125VDC, 8-Pole. Normally oven convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL # zý6I*2*7_--"5 I TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION Q2: 16Mf2 TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCEI # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE-FROM TO VOLTAGE (MK2) FROM TO VOLTAGE (V) (mn)

CD Rý Relay Energized Relay Energized 0) co 1 Point 1 Point 2 s-6 oonow 14 Point 2 Point 7 01 0) 0)

2 Point 1 Point 3 15 Point 2 Point 8 3 Point I Point 4 16 Point 2 Ground 4 Point 1 Point 5 17 Point 2 Coil 5 Point 1 Point 6 18 Point 3 Point 4 6 Point 1 Point 7 19 Point 3 Point 5 7 Point 1 Point 8 20 Point 3 Point 6 8 Point 1 Ground 21 Point 3 Point 7 9 Point 1 Coil

• 22 Point 3 Point 8 10 Point 2 Point 3 23 Point 3 Ground 11 Point 2 Point 4 24 Point 3 Coil 12 Point 2 Point 5 25 Point 4 Point 5 13 Point 2 Point 6 26 Point 4 Point 6 loom ZM-7 cT o'5H'*

Page 4 of 5

NLI NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET E- PRE-SEISMIC I*/POST-SEISMIC f0 DEDICATION E]OTHER VP-XUDO80V63. Rev. 0 . TYPE: DC Utility Relay, 125VDC. 8-Pole, Normally open convertible contacts CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 6 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #f%? _g?_ p_ -'IT 10 TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION n: 16MQ TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS

1. MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MK2) FROM TO VOLTAGE (V) (MO2)

(v)

Relay Energized Relay Energized 27 Point 4 Point 7 -41 Point 7 Ground 0

28 Point 4 Point 8 42 Point 7 Coil co 0a cn O,

29 Point 4 Ground 43 Point 8 Ground 30 Point 4 Coil 44 Point 8 Coil 31 Point 5 Point 6 45 Ground Coil 32 Point 5 Point 7 33 Point5 Point 8 34 Point 5 Ground 35 Point 5 Coil 36 Point 6 Point 7 37 Point 6 Point 8 38 Point 6 Ground 39 Point 6 Coil 40 Point 7I I 8 I Point I7

~7%7 7/!

Page 5 of 5

Check, off appropriate. tests:

N . TEST. DATA SHEET rPRE-SEISMIC f POST-SEISMICE, VERIFICATION [] OTHER NUCLUAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA FOR: VP- Rev: C Job #:;-/joqP.E P.E c ID#:

Cat _ __,,_

4,1A-20 Item

Description:

iCti /e4 ' -A/ Manufacturer:

I Model/Part No. : 9EY'&Z1)Qfn1g3

/ /-

• Provide Summary of Test Results Check aoronriatgbox-es:

13AII Items Passed. Discrepancy Repors): If yes, identify belQw: O-Yes g4No ON/A List SIN or ID passed below. Qty passed:_

CC# DR#

Q1Acceptable ONot.Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

F1Acceptable. ONot'Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

D3Acceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

[Acceptable UNot Acceptable. Initials/Date by PE:

I Q1Acceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

Other (where avplicable)

RPecord All M&TE Used:

NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date Update M&TE l.ag on computer , 0i7// Date:

Initi Date Performed By:.

NOTES: Dt Verified by: -Date:. q Approved by: , Date:

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail.o Page-4/-of-l- -Form NoT-1004, Rev, 5

Item Verification Plan Verification Plan #VP-20K-904C8-2, Rev.0

Description:

Position switch, 2 deck, 600VAC, 20A Manufacturer / Model: Electroswitch / 20K-904C8-2 Saf I- Functionn T- rolinh,1t l, t Qxwt,'hapnr fiinotinn in CIP- 1 IF xjtrithapior Critical Characteristic Sample 7Acceptance

____________ ~~Size _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Criteria Ref ?Method Dimensions & Configuration Normal All dimensions are nominal. 1,2 Measure and record dimensions.

CC #1 Sampling Deck Depth = 2.00" (decks excluding lock assembly)

Deck Height= 1.95" Deck Width = 1.89" Visual Inspection Switch has 2 decks No evidence of physical damage. Perform visual inspection of the switch for any physical damage.

ro (0

Verify that the switch maintains its state in position 3. Turn switch actuator to position 3 (right).

0 C.o 01 C,,

Verify that the switch maintains its state in position 2. Turn switch actuator to position 2 (left).

Correct contact configuration 100% Position 1 (Left) 1 With switch in position 1 (left), measure the CC#2 Contact resistance for contacts 1-2, 7-8 < 10f following contact points:

1. 1-2 Contact resistance for contacts 3-4, 5-6 > 40MQ 2. 3-4

3. 5-6 Position 2 (Center) 4. 7-8 Contact resistance for contacts 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 < 192 Record contact resistance of each set.

Contact resistance for contacts 7-8 > 40M92 Repeat this test with the switch in position 2 Position 3 (Right) and position 3.

Contact resistance for contacts 3-4, 7-8 < 192 Contact resistance for contacts 1-2, 5-6 > 40Mf2

Verification Plan #VP-20K-904C8-2, Rev.0

Description:

Position switch, 2 deck, 600VAC, 20A Manufacturer / Model: Electroswitch / 20K-904C8-2 Safety Function: To reliably selet switchgear function in Class 1E switchgear Critical Characteristic Sample Acceptance Size

__Criteria Ref Method Contact current carrying EQ test Verify that closed contact resistance after current 1 Apply 20A for 30 minutes through 2 closed capacity specimen application is < 1Q2 contacts. Measure contact resistance after CC#3 test.

Dielectric Strength 100% Resistance __16M2 3 Apply 2200VDC and megger between the CC#4 points shown on the attached megger data sheet.

References:

CD Ir.3 1. Electroswitch Series 20 Position Switch Specification sheets 0

2. Guideline for Sampling in the Commercial-Grade Item Acceptance Process, EPRI, Palo Alto, CA: 1999. Report TR-017218-R1 CO 0(

3. V = 1000VDC + 2(rated voltage)

R = 10MO + 102(rated voltage) MON/V.

VP Approval Prepare .n

• 4 (01 Reviewed:/ Z]21 1 Approve Y//M//)%

date date date Page 2 of 3

IN L I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET r-] PRE-SEISMIC r- POST-SEISMIC El DEDICATION EIOTI- IER ý VP-20K-904C8-2, Rev. 0 TYPE: Position switch, 2 deck, 600VAC, 20A CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 4 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL #

TEST VOLTAGE: 2200VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION Q: 16Mf2 TEMPERATURE:

TEST RESULTS MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MO) FROM TO VOLTAGE(V) (MKI)

(V)

Switch in Position 2 (Center) 1 1 3 2 1 5 3 1 7 CD co 4 1 8 0 5 3 5 6 3 7 7 3 8 8 5 7 9 5 8 10 1 Case 11 3 Case 12 5 Case 13 7 Case

14. 8 Case Page 3 of 3

ELECTR M.HWIT H SWITCH 20K-904C8-2 UITm OFr 11202 SVITC.UCORP. NUMBER WEVMOUITH MASVCHUSETS 02188 ENGRAVING f*inr 054C-3B30S L(781)335-5200 FAXM(781)335-425,3 *NL I I PANEL ORILWNG NAMEPLATE ACTIONS --4059

-- 10.59 I I I j'j Maintained D HOLE OIETATION MAY B L 1.90 SQ O Spring-return ROTATED TO ACCOMODATE SPEanRC APPLUCA1ONS to pos.__

.1

-OTHER- FEATURES SPECIAL FEATURES:

5]. Sflp-contacts I

Lts for oil except slip contacts HANDLE POSITIONS BREAKER TEST 1_ _ R_ _ 2\. 4

'I / I \

1@145" 090" 030 0 TARGET 4 3 1 2 0 0 0 0 8 7 5 6 12 11 9 10 16 15 13 14 20 19 17 18 24 23 21 22 28 27 25 26 A MAXIMUM OF 4 SLIP 32 31 29 30 CONTACTS ARE AVAILIkBLE. 0 0 0 SUP CONTACTS WILL 1BE 36 35 33 34 GROUPED AT THE REAROF _ _ _ _

SWTCH. 40 39 .37 38 44 43 41 42 48 47 45 46 S 0 0 0 1 SHOW AJUMPERSTO BE SUPPliED,

SERIES 20 MINIATURE INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL SWITCHES Features

° Space Saving Design- Two Hole Panel Mount on 3"Centers

• Spring Loaded Cam Action Contacts o Silver Plated Copper Surfaces for Long, Reliable Life

• M4-7 Terminal Screws for Easy Installation of #16AWG Wire

• NEMA Class A(105CQ Insulating Materials Control Switch Special Features o Mechanical Red/Green Target

° Slip Contacts for Alarm and Indicator Circuits

" Pull to Lock for Safety Lockout o Spring Return to Normal (Vertical) Position Instrument Switch Special Features

" Make-Before-Break (Shorting) Contacts

" Positive "Snappy" Positioning Detent Mechanism

" Pre-Wired Jumpers Synchroscope Special Features

• Keyed Removable Oval Handles Electrical Specifications Approvals Continuous Ratings

• UL File No. E54035 e CSA Certified

• 24A/600 Volts Interrupt Ratings Note: The Series 20 Class IEutil products comply with the following Nudear Standards:

• 3A/125VDC

• 20A/600VAC ANSI/IEEE C37.90, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.01, ANSI/IEEE C37.98, ANSI/IEEE C37.105,

" Momentary Current 420 Amperes 1Second ANSI/IEEE 323, ANSI/IEEE 344, ANSI/ASME NQA -1.

" Making Ability (Circuit Breaker Coils): 120A/1 25VDC o Dielectric Strength: 2200V rms ORDERING INFORMATION -

" Insulation Resistonce: 100 Megohms

" Contact Resistance: 10 Milliohms For generic switches fillout appropriate matrix pages 24-27. For special applications see page

28. For any other configurations not shown, consult factory.

Mechanical Specifications Sections/Poles 1to 12/1 to 24 Positions 2 to 12 Contacts Double Break Silver Plated Copper Action 45', 30%, 60" and 90* Positive Detent or Spring Return Mounting 2 Hole Panel Thickness 316" Max. Standard Construction Contacts Enclosed inRigid Thermoset Plastic Housing Special Drives Key Operated Deo, No.Of Depth Behind Panel Deckstin)

PANEI (IKF)

DIELLUEG 1- 1.5 2 2.0 3 2.6 4 3.1 5 3.6 6 4.1 1 4.7 OVAL.- 8 5.2 IFAHOLO 9 5.7 1a 6.2

".66FOR REENOEMLE HANDLE 11 6.7 12 17.2 Electroswitch

• 180 King Avenue e Weymouth, MA 02188

• TEL: (781) 335-5200 e FAX: (781) 335-4253

• www.electroswitch.com 21

Check off appropriate tests:

INL I NUCLEAR LOGISTICS INC TEST DATA SHEET OPRE-SEISMIC M2 POST-SEISMIC S VERIFICATION 0 OTHER____

TESTDATA FOR: VP-.,*6/Z- 'C 8/7--.2 Rev: 6) Job#:  ! P.E i,_-CatID#: N/A Item

Description:

,A2nZvja m4'cj2 i-- Manufacturer: " A-Oa

• Model/Part No.: _____,-< 8'__-_

Critical characteristic (CC#) CC # I CC # 2 CC #3 Dimensions and Configrtion Correct contact configuration Contact current carrying capacity Test Temperature N/A N/A N/A Test surface: V=Vertical V V V H=Horizontal QC Setup check (if applicable) N/A N/A N/A Contact resistance Position 1 (Left)

S/N: , ;Pcf / ,2- '.7* . Deck Depth= . Position 1 (Left) Position 2 (Center) Position 3 (Right) (-2): ,

D/C: Deck Height = do, Contact resistance Contact resistance Contact resistance Applied current: 90-DeckWidt=

____ ____ /, (1.2): .___. (A-2).-

0-' (3-4): , Time: s0 *&d _s

_________-.CT -4,4(01s (7-8): . (3-4): s.'-*Z,, (7-8): *D--.3? After 30 minute:

Any evidence of physical damage? Contact resistance Position 1 (Left)

.A. : (5-6): , (1-2): & .3.X t(-_ISko.30.

_ _ .. _ _.. __ _(3-4):

_ ____(1-2):  :,,roAd7 A Switch maintains its state in position 3 (right)?

c thm Switch m"ain(ains its state in position""

(5-6):,4ý ,,f (7-8): >, 4 *,A2 (5.6): Z 14 /

p 01 45 2 (left)? eJ .,_....

~A aa'!;5.,

I -

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fail. Pagej.* of-4 Form No, T-1004, Re,. ,5

NLI NUCLEAR LOOISTICS INC MEGGER DATA SHEET 1] PRE-SEISMIC POST-SEISMIC JPI DEDICATION IJOTHER VP-20K-904C8-2, Rev. 0 TYPE: Position switch. 2 deck- 600VAC. 20A CRITICAL CHARACTERISTIC (CC#) 4 ASSEMBLY # N/A SERIAL # ,40/r- W--*7,--7 2200VDC 2200 VDC MIN. ACCEPTABLE INSULATION n: 16M*" TEMPERATURE:R/

TEST VOLTAGE:

TEST RESULTS MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE # MEGGER POINTS APPLIED RESISTANCE FROM TO VOLTAGE (MQ) FROM TO VOLTAGE (V) (MO)

Switch in Position 2 (Center) 1 3 2 1 5 3 1 7

'13 CD CD 4 1 8 0

C~n 5 3 5

('3 6 3 7 7 3 8 8 5 7 9 5 8 10 1 Case 11 3 Case 12 5 Case 13 7 Case 14 8 Case

,/3 4w-3-eý AA r/-w/7

Check off appropriate. tests:

N L I LOGISTD TCLEAR IC OR TEST DATA SHEET IJPRE-SEISMIC e POST-SEISMICn VERIFICATION OTHER TEST DATA FOR: VP-' .70,ZC-~ , Rev: Job #/: ,9/27PEcTCtI#V9 f

Item

Description:

Aek& W/, '.k.(

2 *' *-./ Manufacturer: ___ __ __ __. _ __ Model/Part No. : 2*,-A*- IffKc)'I "*

Provide Sniaryý of Test Results Check -atropriate boxes:

[3Al Items Passed. Discrepancy Report(s): If yes, identify below: DYes AN 0 ON/A List S/N or ID passed below. Qty passed:_________

I i2CKJ... ,Ag~JJd./I ~W/ I

• . I-Is ri SOte D# £o# DR#

DAcceptable ONotAcceptable Initials/Dateby PE:

"Acceptable, ONot Acceptable Initials/DatebyPE:

QAcceptable r'Not Aceptable Initials/Date by PE:

QlAcceptable QNot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

MAcceptable ONot Acceptable Initials/Date by PE:

Othear (w-here a~ppicablQ,)

6.2 ýAq Record All M&TE Used:

NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date NLI MTE# Description Cal. Due Date

• Initials & Date Performed By:. *

• Date:

NOTES:

Verified by: Date: 5e/

Approved by:. __Date:

NOTE: Initial and date after performance of each CC#. Indicate Pass or Fa4l. Page of Form No. T. 1a04, Rev. 5

?oS~hS~?(SvOU Sý*JC- f tAA'u ~L tJ Ci STANDARD VERIFICATION PLAN FOR SQUARE-D MASTERPACT LISB8 (800A - LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER)

FUNCTIONAL TESTING Document Number: SVP-109 Revision 2 Breaker s/n: 0M 0OS94S8D Cradle s/n: q]bL Page 217 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear. Logistics, Inc. Page i APPROVAL STANDARD VERIFICATION PLAN FOR SQUARE-D MASTERPACT LISB8 (800A - LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER)

FUNCTIONAL TESTING This procedure is prepared in accordance with the NLI Quality Assurance Program and its implementing procedures.

Prepared by-_ Date: 8j Z.1Ivy Verified by: o9& Date: &9 od0 Approved by: ,-ý/-/" K-ý Date: *PZ6 o7 285 of Breaker s/n: Lo oqsf o 218 Cradle s/n: 1A Page Page 218 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. page ii I REVISION HISTORY Revision No. Item Description Date 0 Original Issue 7/10/08 l Revised spelling error in section 4.0 title, revised steps 8/15/08 4.1.g, 4.1.f, 4.l.k, 4.1.j, 4.1.r and 4.1.s, revised title block to Attachment II, added section 6.6.

2 Renumbered sections 3 - 11, added section 6.6, revised 8/26/08 section 6.8.1 .b, 6.9.1 .d, 6.10, 7.0, revised pages in Attachments I & II.

(

Breaker s/n: O1A07qt1, S-0o Cradle s/n: A1 A I Page 219 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 1 1.0 SCOPE The purpose of this standard verification plan is to verify the critical characteristic and function of the Square-D Masterpact LISB8, 800A circuit breaker with cradle as a complete assembly. Some of the critical characteristics may not be applicable depending on the options and functions available on the assembly that is being verified. The following step numbers in this document identify the standard critical characteristics. The results shall be documented within each section of this SVP and on the NLI QC Inspection Checklist for Masterpact NT Breakers, MANCON-LISB8-I (latest revision). This test plan is generally used for testing of the circuit breaker and cradle together (LISB8 part number). If circuit breaker or cradle only testing is required, NLI engineering will specify what sections are to be performed for the specific part required to be tested.

Note: the breaker/cradle shall be identified with the Square D assigned serial number.

2.0 PRODUCTION CONTROLS The following production controls and procedures are to be in effect throughout the life of this project. All of the following activities will be performed.

2.1 Methodology

[] Sat El Unsat _____ a. SDS has been audited by NLI and is currently on the NLI Approved Vendor List. The QC NLI audit addressed the following:

I. All bolts, lugs, wire, nuts, etc. used for production have been dedicated for safety-related use.

2. All steel used in production of the cradles has been verified to be the correct

.material.

[] Sat El Unsat I0)f b. NLI QC will implement the following production controls during construction. A QC separate QC inspection checklist will be used and maintained by QA. The sample size is 100%, unless a smaller sample size is.documented. The QC checklist will verify the following items:

1. Dedicated parts supplied or verified by NLI are used during assembly as follows (Safety Related Only):

a. Bolts, nuts, washer, and other fasteners.

b. Lugs and wire.

c. Steel.

d. Primary and secondary fingers.

2. Welding as follows (Safety Related only):

a. Welding is performed per NLI-approved welding procedures.

b. Welders performing welding activities have been CWI certified.

c. Welds are inspected by a CWI.

3. Fastener tightness is verified on 100% of the accessible fasteners and terminations, including intermediate assemblies.

4. 100% of the wire and wire connections have been inspected. There shall be no kinks, cuts, nicks or splits in the wire.

5. Lubrication inspection

a. Breakers are supplied without primary and secondary disconnect lubrication.

Plant to lubricate per plant established procedures.

6. Inspect and verify that there are no loose or damaged parts.

Breaker s/n: Dkqoq0q *to I Cradle s/n: 4it, Page 220 of 285

SVP-109, Rev. 2 1

[ Nuclear SVP for Logistics, Inc.

Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker Page 2i 3.0 BREAKER IDENTIFICATION NOTE: Ensure that the correct engineering drawings are used for the specific client breakers during testing per this SVP.

3.1 Methodology

a. Record the Square D nameplate data of the cradle. The nameplate shall contain the following information:

1. Manufacturer: -. *QA AIfLC,- Q

2. Type (Breaker& Cradle): 14T01'.t3

3. Cradle Serial Number: 01IA

4. Style: rjIA

5. Rated Max Voltage/Freq: 509 Vk/-(-

6. Rated Continuous Current: AI

7. Rated Short Circuit/Interrupt Current: LV2V.A.

8. Control Voltage Range: Charge: 2,5\1b-/l2/oVAC-.

Close: 1S5

• ,_l. Ac-Trip: 7joD _.*Lt-o0V*xt

9. Weight: '1*

10. Conversion Date: M Ak-dSat -l Unsat _-,,_ b. Perform a detail inspection of the breaker & cradle for any chips, cracks, gouges or any QC other damage.

c. Record the circuit breaker/cradle specific data.

I. Circuit breaker p/n: KTo9OA

2. Circuit breaker s/n: (0 0qo bS Ol

3. Cradle date of manufacture:____

4. Circuit breaker date code: 083(oS

5. Micrologic trip unit s/n: 1 ___

Breaker s/n:______________

Cradle s/n: *I Page 221 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 3  !

4.0 PROPER BREAKER CONFIGURATION 4.1 Methodology AThis section is to be performed with the circuit breaker out of the cell.

[d/Sat Unsat Terminals tightened. Verify all terminals are tight during wire check.

Te

[l Unsat Terminal identification. Verify the terminal points are labeled per the wiring/schematic IMSat drawing. Use the final revision of the NLI approved schematics and record discrepancies, if any. If there are any discrepancies found, do not proceed any further with the testing until the discrepancies have been resolved.

nSat EUnsat *c.

-1_ Proper wiring. Verify wiring against the final revision of the NLI approved schematic Tech QC or wiring diagram. Attach a copy of the yellow-lined wiring/schematic drawing.

NLI drawing # with revision:

El Sat O Unsat Correct programmer. Verify that the programmer, sensor plugs and rating plugs are per QC the design documents:

0 Record the part numbers and/or rating:

Programmer:

Rating Plug:

Sensor Plug:

7 Trip unit date code. Verify the trip unit date code is P05491 or later. The format of the date code is Pxxyyz, with:

• xx = last two digits of the year.

• yy = week.

• z = day of the week.

• Trip Unit Date Code:

0] Sat 1] Unsat __b_ e. With the breaker cover off, inspect the trip unit performer plug. The performer plug Tech should be green. A blue performer plug is not acceptable. If a blue plug is present, replace with a green performer plug. Note: The correct green performer plug must be present during primary injection testing.

f. Trip unit is programmed for breaker type. Program the breaker type into the trip unit.

l Sat El Unsat g. Trip unit battery is fully charged. Verify the battery is fully charged.

Tech Breaker s/n: ON Of4 Ljq b Cradle s/n: PIA Page 222 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 4 0 Sat 0l Unsat 01I, h. Verify the rejection hardware pin configuration against the final revision of the Tech approved NLI layout drawings (if applicable).

NLI drawing # with revision:

Breaker pin configuration:

Cradle pin configuration:

5.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER PROPER FIT-UP & INSTALLTION 5.IAMethodology

• /Sat El Unsat __ Manually depress each secondary disconnect pin and verify that they all spring back to Tech -- " the original position. Each pin should have approximately the same spring force.

b. Install the cradle into a typical ABB K800 type cell. Visually inspect that the primary disconnects, secondary disconnects and interlocks match up with the mating connectors in the cell. Verify the Truck Operated Cell Switch (TOC) flap on the cradle is aligned with the TOC switch inside the cell.

MSat ElUnsat AM .Ensure there is a positive ground connection between the switchgear and the cradle.

Measure the continuity from the switchgear frame to the cradle frame. Maintain this continuity reading throughout this section.

PýSat El Unsat d. Install the breaker into the 'DISCONNECT' position. Verify no binding of the interlocks occurs.

Se. Ensure that the racking crank cannot be inserted unless the "PUSH TO OPEN" button is SSat El Unsat

.*- depressed.

Ei/at El Unsat ' T Monitor a set of closed and open TOC switch contacts. Verify that the contacts do not Tech 1-. change state when the breaker is racked to the 'TEST' position.

g. Rack the breaker to the 'TEST' position. To rack the breaker into the cradle to the

'TEST' position, a racking crank is required to be inserted while pressing the 'PUSH TO OPEN' button. To begin turning the racking crank the 'STOP RELEASE' button must be pushed. Turn the racking crank clockwise until the breaker reaches the 'TEST' position. When the "TEST" position is reached, the 'STOP RELEASE' button will pop out. The status of the position indicator should show that the breaker is in the "T" position.

2Sat L] Unsat Verify the primary disconnects, secondary disconnects and interlocks match up with the cradle without any interference or binding.

G(Sat El Unsat ___ Verify the continuity from the switchgear frame to the cradle frame is present.

eh,/

Breaker s/n: nQ4oA *'fA.

Cradle s/n: _ 1_

Page 223 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 5 1 ElSat ElUnsat rT h j. Monitor a set of closed and open TOC switch contacts. Verify that the contacts change 0lA state when the breaker is racked from the 'TEST' to the 'CONNECT' position d'Sat El Unsat __ k Push the 'STOP RELEASE' button again to continue to turn the racking crank until the "CONNECT" position is reached. Again, the 'STOP RELEASE' button will pop out.

The status of the position indicator should show that the breaker is in the "CONNECT" position.

1!/Sat [] Unsat _____-'*

Manually close the breaker.

Manually charge the breaker.

M/Sat El Unsat Verify breaker racking handle cannot be operated and that the cradle cannot be removed from the cell.

14/Sat D Unsat A. Verify the primary disconnects, secondary disconnects and interlocks match up with the cradle without any interference or binding.

IY'Sat CC]Unsat A

/ Verify the continuity from the switchgear frame to the cradle frame is present.

Tech

q. Trip the breaker.

[] Sat 0 Unsat __4_ r. Monitor a set of closed and open TOC switch contacts. Verify that the contacts change Tech state when the breaker is racked from the 'CONNECT' to the 'TEST' position

s. Rack the breaker to the 'TEST' position.

t. Rack the breaker to the 'DISCONNECT' position and remove the breaker from the cradle.

U. Remove the cradle from the cell.

0 Unsat _Sat Tech V. Verify the arc chambers (arc chutes) have no visible damage or foreign matter.

W. Remove the arc chambers. Inspect the primary contacts for excessive wear. Refer to Attachment II.

Breaker s/n: (CO

• t \

Cradle s/n: ýI Page 224 of 285

SVP- 109, Rev. 2 Nuclear SVP for Logistics, Square-D Inc.

Masterpact LISB8 Breaker Page 6 6.0 PRODUCTION TESTS Sections 6.1, 6.2, 6.3 & 6.4 are to be performed with the circuit breaker racked into the cradle to the

'CONNECT' position but not racked into a cell. Rev. 2 6.1 MAIN CONTACT RESISTANCE (DUCTOR TEST)

This test checks the resistance of the primary current path, hinge points, wipe, connections, and quality of conductivity of the current path. Perform this test on each phase of the circuit breaker.

a. Apply 85Vdc minimum to UV trip device (if applicable). Note: UV trip device must be energized to close the breaker.

b. Connect test cables to Phase A, line & load bus or stabs.

0 Sat El Unsat c. Measure the contact resistance and record in tQ using the appropriate M&TE.

Tech

d. Repeat for each phase.

Phase A: j d (Criteria is < 1001M).

Phase B: - -- t (Criteria is < 1001f)

Phase C: ... f (Criteria is < .100ggl)

e. Compare the contact resistance between each phase. Contact resistance of each phase does not vary more than +/-20% from the average of all three phases.

Average all phases:___ _ _

See discrepancy report number: (N/A if all pass)

Breaker s/n: 0 t %01'1 Cradle s/n:

Page 225 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP- 109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 7 6.2 INSULATION INTEGRITY (DC Megger Test)

CAUTION: REMOVE THE TRIP UNIT RATING PLUG PRIOR TO PERFORMING THIS TEST.

6.2.1 Phase-to-Phase, Phase-to-Ground, & Line-to-Load

/* Methodology .

T(Sat [0 Unsat A a. Phase to phase w/ breaker closed. With the breaker in the closed position, Tech 2 apply 1OOOVDC and megger between phases.

Applied Voltage:. 1iS0 Vdc (Criteria is IOOOVDC nominal)

OA To 0B: 5oUo MG (Criteria is R IOOMG2)

OB To 0C: .5o0' MG (Criteria is R > 100MG)

OC To OA: S0oo MG (Criteria is R > 100MG)

['/Sat [] Unsat _ b. Phase to ground wI breaker closed. With the breaker in the closed position, apply IOOOVDC and megger between phases to ground Applied Voltage: 12 Vdc (Criteria is IOOOVDC nominal)

OA To Ground: 54! O MG (Criteria is > 100MG) 03B To Ground: 5CDE MG (Criteria is 2t 100MGM) 0C To Ground: C00 MD (Criteria is > 100MG) gSat El Unsat c. Line to load w/ breaker open. With the breaker in the open position, apply I00 VDC and megger each phase, line to load.

Applied Voltage: 2 0. Vdc (Criteria is 1OOOVDC nominal)

OA Line to Load: -90OZ MG (Criteria is > 100MQ)

OB Line to Load: 5o70o MG (Criteria is > 100MIQ)

OC Line to Load: 570W MG2 (Criteria is > 100MG)

Breaker s/n: Qt4 O*t!1S4S-0 Cradle s/n:

Page 226 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 8 6.2.2 Control Wiring

/, Mehdlg El Sat El Unsat Control wiring except charging motor. Isolate the charging motor from the h / control circuit. With the breaker in the open position, apply 100OVdc and megger each secondary disconnect to ground for 1 minute except the charging motor disconnects. Record the lowest insulation resistance. Repeat this test with the breaker in the closed position.

Applied Voltage: 12 5Q Vdc (Criteria is 1000VDC nominal)

WITH BREAKER OPEN Lowest insulation res.: 5000 MK (Criteria is IOOMQ)

WITH BREAKER CLOSED Lowest insulation res.: 5000 MCI (Criteria is 1OOMO)

Record the number of tested secondary disconnects.

Number of tested secondary disconnects:

ElSat E Unsat 4 A. b. Chargin2 motor. Megger the charging motor secondary disconnects to ground Tech at 500Vdc for one minute. Record the lowest insulation resistance.

Perform with the breaker open discharged:

Applied Voltage: Vdc (Criteria is 500VDC nominal)

Lowest insulation res.: (Criteria is >_2MO)

Perform with the breaker closed and charged:

Applied Voltage:_ Vdc (Criteria is 500VDC nominal)

Lowest insulation res.: .(Criteria is _2MQ)

Breaker s/n:______________

Cradle s/n:

Page 227 of 285

I SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP- 109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 9 I -

6.3 INSULATION INTEGRITY (AC HI-POT TEST)

.CAUTION: STAND AT LEAST 6 FEET FROM THE BREAKER DURING THIS TESTING. REMOVE THE TRIP UNIT RATING PLUG PRIOR TO PERFORMING THIS TEST.

Note: This is a "pass/fail" test. Perform this test at 2200Vac for I minute. Acceptance criteria is no insulation breakdown after 1 minute.

6.3.1 Poles-to-Ground, Phase-to-Phase, & Line-to-Load Methodology C1 Sat El Unsat L a. All unenergized poles should be grounded for the AC hi-pot tests.

El Sat El Unsat - . b. Line to load w/ breaker open. With the breaker in the open position, apply Tec$,./ 2,200VAC and hi-pot between phase line-to-load. Acceptance Criteria is no insulation breakdown after I min.

Applied Voltage: 21 Zo 0 Vac (Criteria is 2,200VAC nom.)

O A Line to Load: Pass/Fail 2CISF 0 B Line to Load: Pass/FailIriZIIZ 0 C Line to Load: Pass/Fail FSS 0 Sat - Unsat A C. Phase to ground w/ breaker closed. Close the breaker and repeat the testing Tech ./ between each phase-to-ground. Acceptance Criteria is no insulation breakdown after I min.

Applied Voltage: 2-17-=' Vac (Criteria is 2,200VAC nom.)

OA to Ground: Pass/Fail P___S__

OB to Ground:

Pass/Fail 1?R5 >

OC to Ground: Pass/Fail ?. s s El Sat El Unsat Phase to phase w/ breaker closed. With the breaker in the closed position, TecIr~" 1 apply 2,200VAC and hi-pot between phases. Acceptance Criteria is no insulation breakdown after I min.

Applied Voltage: I Vac (Criteria is 2,200VAC nom.)

OA to 01B: Pass/Fail (a5>

Pass/Fail 1*l OB to OC:

OC to OA: Pas~s/Fail [**

Breaker s/n: %qjq gt< w Cradle s/n:

Page 228 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 10 j 6.4 OPERATION AT DEGRADED AND OVERVOLTAGE CONDITIONS 6.4.1 Methodology Sections 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 & 6.8 are to be performed with the circuit breaker racked into the cradle to the 'CONNECT' position but not racked into a cell. Note: Ensure that there is 8M minimum power to the UV trip device (if applicable) during these tests.

dSat 0 Unsat 4_-L a. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

Tech _-"

b. Set the control voltage to 90VDC.

c. Charge and close the breaker.

d. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

Ae. Trip the breaker.

I Sat El Unsat _ f. Repeat steps 6.4.1 .b through 6.4.1.e four more times.

Tech m '

g. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

5dSat tJ Unsat h. Charge, close and trip the breaker five times.

Tech 6.5 ANTIPUMPING TEST 6.A MVethhodollogy isat 11 Unsat ____ . With the breaker open, apply and maintain a close signal at 125Vdc nominal.

Tech Apply a momentary trip signal at 125Vdc nominal while maintaining the close signal. Verify the breaker opens and does not re-close. Perform this test twice.

[*Sat El Unsat b. Release the close signal and then re-apply the close signal. Verify the breaker Tech closes.

6 MANUAL OPERATION iSat 0 Unsat ____ Remove 125VDC control voltage.

Tech

b. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device (if applicable).

c. Ensure that the breaker is open and the closing springs are discharged.

d. With the breaker in the 'CONNECT' position, verify that the circuit breaker can be

'manually charged using the charging handle to charge the closing spring.

/Sat El Unsat __ e. Verify the status indicators indicate that the closing spring is charged upon completion.

Tech

f. Close the breaker. Rev. 2 Breaker s/n: Oitmqm %0 Cradle s/n: . 'A Page 229 of 285

SVP-109, Rev. 2

[ Nuclear SVP for Logistics, Square-D Inc. Masterpact LISB8 Breaker Page 11 I 6.7 TIMING TESTS 6.7.1 Shunt Trip

/

a. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device (if applicable).

b. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

APPIEJ*) VOL.TAGE- an) t,U UýSat 0l Unsat ._ Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the Tech -'-/ main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

OA MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 2____ ___ (Criteria is < 50mS) 013 MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 27 on s (Criteria is < 50mS)

OC MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: -_,. %S (Criteria is < 50mS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: 0,,^ S _(Criteria is < 62mS) 6.7.2 UV Trip (if applicable)

PERFORM STEPS 6.7.2.d - 6.7.2.o 3 TIMES. Record the results in the table below.

a. Apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

Z A b. Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

MSat El Unsat c. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc.

Tech-'

TRIP VOLTAGE: ' ,v'b C- (Criteria is 43.75 to 87.5VDC)

d. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

e. Charge and close the breaker.

/ f. Remove power from the UV trip.

iSat 11 Unsat .- ' g. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the Tech breaker is open.

1sTTes Test 2Test 3 Test Acceptance Criteria O-A 3--s <450mS 0C 3 3 ,-s < 50mS Auxiliary Contact 4O,., 3S* 3%,. 1 62mS Breaker s/n:__0_ Q,______

Cradle s/n: 1 Page 230 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 12 After the breaker trips, attempt to close the breaker.

&~h.

Sat El Unsat Verify that breaker cannot be closed.

j. Apply a voltage of 140Vde to the UV trip.

k. Charge and close the breaker.

A*1. Remove power from the UV trip.

Sat -1C Unsat /'m. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the Tech breaker is open.

I' Test 2"dTest 3 rd Test Acceptance Criteria

ýA __'_____. _ 3q,-,4 *.< mS

• B 34,,,s 3-3

• 50mS

ýC ,q,, 3,- -. 50mS Auxiliary Contact I, -,37,s_1._

A 26-3 62mS After the breaker trips, attempt to close the breaker.

Sat C Unsat 4N Verify that breaker cannot be closed.

6.8 AUXILIARY SWITCH / MOC SWITCH TESTS 6.8.1 Methodology El Sat C Unsat p Qa. With the breaker in the OPEN position, verify all auxiliary contacts and MOC Tech QC contacts that are accessible by secondary disconnect pins are in the correct state (closed or open). Use the final revision of the NLI approved schematics and record discrepancies, if any. Identify each contact and record contact resistance.

Acceptance Criteria is >40Mn* for open contacts and <1I2 for closed contacts.

NLI Drawing # with revision:

Contact ID: Resistance: Contact ID: Resistance:

Breaker s/n:______,__

Cradles/n:

Page 231 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 13 0 Sat 0i Unsat

__ 44 b. With the breaker in the CLOSED position, verify all auxiliary contacts and MOC Tech QC contacts that are accessible by secondary disconnect pins are in the correct state (closed or open). Use the final revision of the NLI approved schematics and record discrepancies, if any. Identify each auxiliary contact and record contact resistance.

Acceptance Criteria is >40MCI for open contacts and <1) for closed contacts, except for the contact in series with the trip coil. It is not practical to measure the contact resistance of this switch while closed. When the breaker is closed, measuring the resistance across secondary disconnect pins will result in the shunt trip coil resistance and not the closed contact resistance. Proper closing of this switch is verified by tripping the breaker at degraded voltage conditions. The resistance across the secondary disconnect pins, while the breaker is closed, shall be recorded for informational purposes only. Rev. 2 Contact ID: Resistance: Contact ID: Resistance:

6.9 TRIP UNIT / OVERCURRENT TRIP SWITCH TESTS 6.9.1 Methodology Ii Sat El Unsat a. Overcurrent trip switch configuration/contact resistance. With the breaker Tech QC closed, measure the resistance of the overcurrent trip switch contacts. Only measure those switches that are being used; i.e. only measure those switches accessible via a secondary disconnect. Verify the contacts are in the proper state using the final revision of the NL[ approved schematics and record discrepancies, if any. Identify each contact and record contact resistance.

Acceptance Criteria is >40MO for open contacts and <l) for closed contacts.

NLI Drawing # with revision; Contact ID (SDEjn): Resistance:

Breaker s/n: 00 Dqq ms& I Cradle s/n: 01I, Page 232 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 14 LI Sat El Unsat "lA b. Overcurrent trip switch configuration/contact resistance. While the breaker is h tripped from step 6.9. L.a, verify the overcurrent trip switches changed states from step 6.9. .a. Identify each contact and record contact resistance.

Acceptance Criteria is >40MW2 for open contacts and <1Q for closed contacts.

Contact ID (SDEn): Resistance:

[1 Sat El Unsat 1A _ c. Long-time pickup point. Perform before primary injection tests per step Tech QC 6.9.1 .d. Apply [(long time pickup setting) x (sensor plug rating) x 1] amps of current through all three phases. Verify the breaker does not trip and that the overload (OL) signal LED on the trip unit does not come on.

Long time pickup setting: Applied Current:

Does breaker trip?

Does the OL signal LED light come on?

Apply [(long time pickup setting) x (sensor plug rating) x 1.25] amps of current through all three phases. Verify the overload signal LED light comes on.

Note: This is not a trip test; it is not required to verify that the breaker trips.

Long time pickup setting:_ Applied Current:

Does the OL signal LED light come on?-

El Sat El Unsat _ __ d. Primary injection tests. Perform primary injection testing per the Tech QC primary injection test table. Perform the testing at the client settings (if applicable). The current through one phase will power the trip unit. Use the following Schneider Electric trip curves to determine the acceptable trip time for each test. The curves are in Attachment I.

• Long time tests: Curve No. 0613TC0004, dated 4/2008

• Short time tests: Curve No. 0613TC0004 or 0613TC0005, dated 4/2008 depending upon the i2t setting

• Instantaneous tests: the acceptance criteria is _< 0.05 seconds, (based upon Curve No. 0613TC0007, dated 4/2008) Rev. 2 Breaker s/n: t)Iotf 0fti

• Cradle s/n:

Page 233 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 15 PRIMARY INJECTION TEST TABLE Actual trip times:

Time Sensor Trip time range Pickup Delay plug Applied acceptance Trip Function Setting Setting i2t on/off rating current criteria OA OB 0C Long time Ir_ tr NIA at 200%I = N/A _

Long time I/r tr N/A at 500%C _=

Short time Ir= tsd at 200% or 170Q%2'4 Isd= sd Instantaneous at 2a0%o Ti =3_1I _ N/A N/A

• 0.05 seconds

-U CD Record the client-required trip setting drawing number and revision level (if not applicable, write N/A):

C., Notes:

10

1. Applied current for long time testing is (long time pickup) x (sensor plug rating) x (2 or 5).

CI,

2. Applied current for short time testing is (long time pickup) x (short time pickup) x (sensor plug rating) x (2 or 1.7).

3. Applied current for instantaneous testing is (instantaneous pickup) x (sensor plug rating) x 2.

4. Perform short time primary injection testing at 200% for NT type breakers and at 170% for NW type breakers.

5. When testing long time at 500%, put the short time pickup setting at the maximum value to avoid interference. Rev. 2

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 16 6.10 DOOR DEDICATION

a. Verify that the dimensions on the door matches the NLI approved door drawings by measuring the overall width, length, depth, material thickness and location of the hinges and location of the hole cut-outs and size of the hole cut-outs. Visually inspect that the door is the correct color per the client required specification. Rev. 2 NLI DRAWING NUMBER:

[0 Sat [J Unsat 01p, b. Verify that each door has the appropriate labeling per the door drawings.

Tech Page 235 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 17 TEST DATA APPROVAL I MTE LOG Breaker S/N: 0Q 4 '/tN fiO Cradle S/N: _d_ _

MTE Log Item Description Test Equipment ID# Calibration Due Date Ipc Poder, - t 6,2/A o-swp -- 1202-.. 31,l-lo

,M S14 s1A 553 Discrepancy Log

• Discrepancy #: SVP Section: Check one: PE initials and date:

D]Acceptable Dl Unacceptable El Acceptable D Unacceptable .

0 Acceptable O Unacceptable

[D Acceptable

[] Unacceptable OAcceptable

_ _Unacceptable Final Cycle Counter Reading (if applicable): '0000 Client Breaker ID (if a ble): T Pran-n .,q 1%

.1f T Verified by:. Date: 5-/4/0,7 Approved by cx,ý Date: -[iuq Page 236 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 18 7.0 DESIGN TESTS All design tests in accordance with IEEE C37.50/20 for the Masterpact LISB8 circuit breaker have been performed and documented. Copies of the test report(s) shall be provided (if required). Rev. 2 8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE 8.1 All activities will be performed in accordance with the requirements of the NLI Quality Assurance Program and its implementing procedures. This QA program meets the requirements of I0CR50, Appendix B, 10CFR21 and ASME NQA- 1.

9.0 MEASUREMENT & TEST EQUIPMENT 9.1 All measurement and test equipment used for the testing shall be documented in the test data sheets including the calibration due dates. All M&TE shall be traceable to a NIST or equivalent industry standard, where applicable. Document all M&TE on the M&TE data sheet.

10.0 REFERENCES

10.1 EPRI TR-017218-RI, "Guideline for Sampling in Commercial-Grade Item Acceptance Process."

10.2 NLI Quality Assurance Manual, Rev. 6 dated 12/14/07.

10.3 Schneider Electric Masterpact NT/NW Universal Power Circuit Breakers Catalog Class 0613, dated 10/2003.

10.4 NL] design drawings for LISB8 breakers.

10.5 IEEE C37.13-90, "ANSI Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures."

10.6 IEEE C37.16-88, "ANSI Standard for Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers & AC Power Circuit Protectors - Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements & Application Recommendations."

10.7 IEEE C37.20.1-87, "ANSI Standard for Metal Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear."

10.8 IEEE C37.50-89, "ANSI Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures - Test Procedures" 10.9 IEEE C37-59-91, "IEEE Standard Requirements for Conversion of Power Switchgear Equipment."

11.0 ATTACHMENTS Attachment I -trip curves:

" Schneider Electric Curve No. 0613TC0004, dated 4/2008.

" Schneider Electric Curve No. 0613TC0005, dated 4/2008.

" Schneider Electric Curve No. 0613TC0007, dated 4/2008.

Attachment 1I- Exert from Schneider Electric Masterpact NT/NW Universal Power Circuit Breakers Catalog Class 0613, dated 4/2008, page 7. Rev. 2 Page 237 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker SVP-109, Rev. 2 Nuclear Logistics, Inc. Page 19 ATTACHMENT I TO SVP-109 TRIP CURVES:

Schneider Electric Curve No. 0613TC0004, dated 4/2008 a Schneider Electric Curve No. 0613TC0005, dated 4/2008

• Schneider Electric Curve No. 0613TC0007, dated 4/2008 Page 238 of 285

Masterpact NT and NW Universal Power Circuit Breakers Trip Curves Micrologic 5.016.0 AIP/H Trip Unit Figure 166: Micrologic 5.016.0 A/P/H Trip Units: Long-Time Pickup and Delay, Short-Time Pickup, and 12 t OFF Delay U0Micrologic CURRENT IN MULTIPLESOF It (It = LONG-TIME SETTING x In) 5.0/6.0 APIH Trip Units

"*== -- .. ~ f...... = = =-* Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-4 4.'== Long-Time Pickup and Delay A-', f+ ,= Short-Time Pickup and 12t OFF Delay L9NGM~ , .....

T " i- j- The time~current curve information is to be used for

" ...... .--- - . - .. 1-. -application and coordination purposes only.

,..... -tH2 Curves apply from -301C to +60'C (-22*F to +1401F)

_.ambient temperature.

,,,4 .. !I ILNOTE:

1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to

,II _*. ~shorten the long-time delay. The thermal-imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-t i' "=*h: time delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will

= t+Il.4 a *cause the circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than

'4-  ::=normal. The amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since

- -, the previous overload. Approximately twenty AT minutes is required between overloads to completely S-*-.-- . .... . , reset thermal-imaging.

0 L r1.. j 2. The end of the curve is determined by the 0 ,-4 interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.

-_. .. v4-r:.. 3. With zone-selective interlocking ON, short-time

, 1 4 4~-~ delay utilized, and no restraining signal, the

!, L_4-maximum unrestrained short-time delay time band

_applies regardless of the setting.

• l*$f~.~*. .. 4. Total clearing times shown include the response

-.T times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and

-I the extinction of the current.

, UA 5. For a withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous can

- . be turned OFF.trip instantaneous Seecurve.

trip curve 613-7 See trip for 613-10 for curve

...... r. instantaneous override values.

. , 6. Overload indicator illuminates at 100%.

J~ .

4

, -c---.. *,,! -- ,,* f-I-- .L-+. at.* f. . ,.. .,

- *I

- j H.L--'_

- .L--

L' IU . ... F:T *

• _* *.i. . H CURRENTIN MULTIPLES OF Ir Or. LONG-flMESET 'INGxtI) D. N. B49lo6-3,l4 171 04/2008 Schneider @2000-2008 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved eElect.ric Page 239 of 285

Masterpact NT and NW Universal Power Circuit Breakers Trip Curves Figure 167: Mlcrologlc 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units: Short-Time Pickup and 12 t ON Delay CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir Ir= LONG-TIME SETTING x In) Mlcrologlc 5.0/6.0 NP/H Trip Units Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-5 Short-Time Pickup and 12 t ON Delay 1.f  ;

• l

.*Wjj i7i -  ;

---

'- - The time-current curve information is to be used for

..... j f - application and coordination purposes only.

'= 'j*:TI :4:-'_:t: ,,4 Curves apply from -30*C to +600C (-22°F to +1400 F)

... l---- ambient temperature.

4 _4. '. * ........ P

_47*r

' T 4.

- "* ' NOTE:

I 1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to

,' . .. shorten the.long-time delay. The thermal-imaging 4 . .effect comes into play if a current above the long-time F T , ,

.. delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared

, -*- by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit

".-.. - 4T-, breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the

- I circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The

' =- ....... *4_

--- " amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the

_I amount of time that has elapsed since the previous CI - .- ;l overload. Approximately twenty minutes is required

+ -between overloads to completely reset thermal-7 V.1: :L :imaging.

.2. The end of the curve is determined by the interrupting

, *_L.... rL = rating of the circuit breaker.

!.1 -. 3. With zone-selective interlocking ON, short-time delay

-.. . utilized, and no restraining signal, the maximum

- .. '

• unrestrained short-time delay time band applies regardless of the setting.

................- . 4. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the S* extinction of current.

5. For withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous can be

., *... turned OFF. See trip curve 613-7 for instantaneous trip i.. ....  !-:curve.

:q*-- u . ..

'! *..kl :overrde See trip curve 613-10 for instantaneous values.

)T t -' 42---------.'.--.-~---*[-.__*

.-- --. 6. See trip curve 613-4 for long-time pickup and delay trip

...... i.. .. . .. . curve.

S20- chneider eric All Rigt R ii 172 CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir Cuýv No. 06:*i=C000 (1t . LONG-TIME SETTING x 111) 13-" No.84 1.H"$3ýffi 172

© 2000-2008 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 04/2008 Page 240 of 285

Masterpact NT and NW Universal Power Circuit Breakers Trip Curves Figure 168: Micrologic 5.0/6.0 Trip Units: Instantaneous Pickup, 2x to 15x and OFF MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)

MICROLOGIC* 5.0/6.0 A/P/H TRIP UNIT CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 613-7 Instantaneous Pickup 2x-15x and OFF The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.

Curves apply from -30 to +60C ambient temperature.

Notes;

1. The end of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.

2. Total clearing times shown Include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of the current.

3. The instantaneous region of the trip curve shows maximum total clearing times. Actual clearing times in this region can vary depending on the circuit breaker mechanism design and other factors. The actual clearing time can be considerably faster than indicated.

Contact your local Sales Office for additional information.

4. For a withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous can be turned OFF. See 613-7 for instantaneous trip curve. See 613-10 for Instantaneous override values.

5. See 613-4 and 613-5 for long-time pickup, long-time delay, short-time pickup, and short-time delay trip curves.

z V)

_z 4r

-H T4 44' 'ýi N

WE_

IF:

CUE i4 L

r a P 22 MUL11PLES OF SENSOR RATING (In) 173 04/2008 Schneider @ 2000-2008 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved VEleark:

Page 241 of 285

SVP for Square-D Masterpact LISB8 Breaker Nuclear Logistics, Inc.

SVP- 109, Rev. 2 Page 20 I ATTACHMENT H TO SVP-109 Excerpt from Schneider Electric Masterpact NT/NW Universal Power Circuit Breakers Catalog Class 0613, dated 4/2008: Page 7 - contact wear Page 242 of 285

Masterpact NT and NW Universal Power Circuit Breakers Masterpact Circuit Breakers Reduced Maintenance: Under normal operating conditions, the circuit breaker does not require maintenance. However, if maintenance or inspection is necessary, the arc chambers are easily removed so you may visually inspect the contacts and wear indicator groove (see the figure below for how wear is indicated). The operation counter can also indicate when inspections and possible maintenance should be done. The life of the circuit breaker may be extended by replacing the arc chamber and spring-charging motor and/or replacing the main contact assembly of Arc Chamber ANSI Certified circuit breakers.

Figure 4: Contact Wear Indicators Wear Indcator Groove Wear IndIcator Groove Operating Conditions Masterpact circuit breakers are suited for use:

• At ambient temperatures between -22OF (-30°C) and 1400 F (600C).

• At altitudes +13,000 ft. (3900 m).

Masterpact circuit breakers have been tested for operation in industrial atmospheres. It is recommended that the equipment be cooled or heated to the proper operating temperature and kept free of excessive vibration and dust. Operation at temperatures above 1041F (400C) may require derating or overbussing the circuit breaker. See the appropriate instruction bulletin and page 15 of this catalog for additional information.

Masterpact circuit breakers meet IEC 68-2-6 Standards for vibration.

• 2 to 13.2 Hz and amplitude 0.039 in. (1 mm)

. 13.2 to 100 Hz constant acceleration 0.024 oz. (0.7 g.)

The materials used in Masterpact NT and NW circuit breakers will not support the growth of fungus and mold.

Masterpact circuit breakers have been tested to the following:

• IEC68-2 Damp heat (temperature +55°C and relative humidity of 95%)

• IEC 68-2-52 level 2 - salt mist Storage Tem perature Circuit breakers with trip units without LCD displays may be stored in the original packaging at temperatures between -58°F (-501C) and 185°F (85°C). For circuit breakers with trip units with LCD displays, this range is -40'F (-40°C) to 185°F (850C).

7 04/2008 Schp~eldqr © 2000-2008 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved U Becric Page 243 of 285

P0'57-1ý,014-TIDO 9ASELWG 'TeS-rW4 UN. LtLS 2-J 'fZIS l-.0 1- O l) 7-2-2 .13.oo 0oo oo,0 z2 z.LD3- , O DI- 0003 51w. 7A 3 *'0 l-00 OOW (SAMLC A 7S TEST/INSPECTION REPORT r ,L.,-e, Section A 5~.O Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation Procedure:

Shunt Trip I. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil iscontained in kit p/n: S33812 also,)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (p/n: 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33821 also.)

3. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control voltage to 90VDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 four more times.

9. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

10. Charge, close and trip the breaker five times.

II. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

12. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

13. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

4A MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 1P.A (Criteria is < 50mS)

ý1B MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is

• OmS) 4bC MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: (Criteria is

• 50mS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME: (Criteria is _<62mS)

UV Trip I. Apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2. Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc.

4. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. . Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page).

8. Repeat steps I through 7 two more times.

Report #: TIR-I 1411320-I Rev. 0 Client: Various Page Iof (0 1/20/09 NLI-QUAL.07, R5 Attachment I Page 244 of 285

UV Trip Test 1: Test 2 na Test 3* Test Acceptance

• l*5-*t-nc*.Criteria

._A .... t

.)_ sES rX O.ss t'D U .X_._ 6 *. SOmS

_B _ _ __5OreS !9

ýC< 50mS Auxiliary Contact "_ 62m-Wt.-: SA#APLe~k(v 21Aý,*S 00002) DCES rWW (ý UV. pl woAA not r4 - rt.j... tvdA .. do"

-4r&&d*

Acceptance Criteria: As stated in procedure steps.

Sampling Plan: 100% C3 NA

Reference:

N/A 1/5109 NLI.QUAL-07, R5 Attachmont I Page 245 of 285

UV Trip Test ST Test 2eStTest Acceptance

__ __ _ __ _ __-_ __ _ __ ___.._Criteria OA 00kML* I Ks 5E5OmS S.,

ýB _50MS f.,*

Auxiliary Contact ,.., .. .. _ _ _ _ _ s__

62mS U\J ,,,, Wotk-*o,,*'o rt-ri--. (ýrta,,6eo..,.t + t d6ECO" Acceptance Criteria: As stated in procedure steps.

Sampling Plan: 100% ENA

Reference:

N/A Release for Testin nspection Prepared By:.-1,1 Reviewed By: Date: I Approved By: Date: I90 Report #: TIR-1 1411320-1 Rev. 0 Client: Various 3*

Page/of (P' 1/5/09 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Antachmorit I Page 246 of 285

UV TrOP Test 5104, 18' Test 2 ndTest 3"'Test Acceptance Auxiliary Contact Iz. ,1¢ 1.. "tc,-  !'- *"*.

_62m8S Acceptance Criteria: As stated in procedure steps.

Sampling Plan: 100% jv [-ENA

Reference:

N/A Release for Testingasection Prepared By: Date: _]o3 Reviewed By: -Date: ___.._____

Approved By: I Date: 9/a 7 Report #: TIR- 11411320-1 Rev. I Client: Various Page /of, 4(3109 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I Page 247 of 285

UV Trip Test 1 " Test 2h Test 3 rd Test Acceptance Criteria 55.*,O 55 m5.-3 _A .51,ms -3S czo* <50mS

.¢ . ,t. ,* , 50mS

___C __ 2L.t.. ,l ms Z*.:$, _ 25. *,,5 _<50mS Auxiliary Contact I m.5. ,t IT ii- (,',* *62mS Acceptance Criteria: As stated in procedure steps.

Sampling Plan: 100% E] NA

Reference:

N/A Report #: TIR-1 1411320-1 Rev.,

Client: Various Page of(,

4/3/09 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I

. Page 248 of 285

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section B Results Items Inspected Type: MN! uV9 Mc- f5o V he-- he Mfgr/Model: Bea'mt.J

• 1 F-IA Part/Serial Number: zi*-ol-_,gz LfZI~q-a51-cxr, 2 93-sdt-*o*7

• 3 Equipment Used:

-3117 14sa Tl>

Va~~- :Si?°,tpP (Type) (M&TE #) (Calibration Due Date)

Results: wVb,.,

- wJtiif, Twogu. [/ *t/.tqL *IG*T.

09Ws %-A*A;'kj Q.Ahtj MKQ kARL ~ I MAX , A

-kh 96?Mb*h Rd-, M000 Ahab A3ic 049%M. NOTE oQ4~. 43~nYL5-3nl OCAn? (StJW~gE5 I.oa3

~ 9zI,-onl-&06~O Results Met Acceptance Criteria: 0 Yes 0 No VA Discrepancy Report #: __ NA Report #: TIR-1 1411320-1 Rev. 0 Client: Various PageA of 4, 1/20/09 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I Page 249 of 285

STERI S' COMPONENT IRRADIATION CERTIFICATION ortu 1-921c Prepared for Nuclear Logistics Inc.

Source Type: Cobalt 60 Gamma P.O. # 0028800 Air Equiv. Required Dose (MRADS) .08 Rate Not to Exceed (MR.ADS / Hr.) 1.00 SPECIMENS:

Qty Part No. Serial No. " Description S33670 21353-001-00002 Coils for UV Trip Device DATA:

Total Delivered Dose (Air) MRADS: Min .08 Max .08 Dose Rate (Air) MRADS /r. Min .124 Max .124 Total Exposure Hours: 0.65 Turntable Static Rotation 2 -WAY: None:

Rotation Date In: 03/26/09 Date Out: 03126/09 DOSIMETRY:

Dosimeter Type Harwell Red 4034 Perspex Batch KC Calibration Date 01/20/09 Calibration Due Date 01/20/10 Readout Instrument: .Beckman DU-640 Serial No.: 4326387 Calibration Date ' 08/18/08 Calibration Due Date 08/18/09 Comments: Process Run # 27521A (Sample A)

ATTACHMENTS:

Worksheets: N/A Drawings: N/A Notice of Anomaly: N/A

__ I*.

Approved By: 4

Title:

Sr. QS/RC Analyst Date: 26 Mal Zvo9 Pcsg Loca n: TE "medixSerices 9 Apollo Drive. Whippany, NJ 07981 Phone: 973-887-2754 Fax: 973-887-6591 The product nm described above was processed inaccordance with STERIS Isomedix Services Quality System requirements and the approved process parameters.

STERIS Isomedix Services facilities are in compliance with applicable state and federal regulations (FDA, NRC, EPA, and OSHA). STERIS Isomedix Services operates under a quality system which meets the requirements of the FDA QSR and ISO 13485: 2003. STERIS Isomedix Services adheres to requirements provided through ANSL/AAMT/ISO t11137 and EN 552.

PROC-00830 Form: 3 Rev: 3 Eft Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of 1 Multiple or Single Facility Pa250~r.. ..........

STERISS iComponent Processing Worksheet Customer :__Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0028800 IRR. Lot # / Control # 27521A Component Quantity (Per Stack):

Dose Specification: .08 Mrads Dose Rate Specified: <1.0 Mrads/Hr.

Dose Rate Received: _.,, & Max. Mrads/Hr.

Time Time 0 erator ACTION Calculated Actual J ature / Date

..... 5,197. 74_. ?T Rotate N/A NIA N/A OUT Z4 czT.ii ,/7

/ /

Component Rotation Calculation:

Comments: o / 4 t (

COMPONENT PLACEMENT COMPONENT ORIENTATION Prepared By: ý,ý,460ýx/ Date:

PROC-00830 Form: 2 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page 1 of I Multipie or Single Facility Page 251 of 285

STERIS" A

Iswftu s evdm Component Irradiation Instructions Customer: Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0028800 Special Radiation Request / SRR # (If Applicable) 27521A Receiving, Shipping & Accountability Record Control # : 22455 P.O. Specifies: 10 CFR 50, Appendix B Requirements Yes 0 No: 03 10 CFR 21 Requirements Yes 0 No: [1 Item Qty Serial # / Code # Component Description I - Sample A 1 21353-001-00002 P/N COLIS FOR UV TRIP DEVICE S33670 I Dose Rate Specification *: <1.0 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: + +0%

Dose Specification *: .08 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: - +5%

Acceptable Dose Range *: .08 To .084 Mrads

• Air Equivalent (TID): X Other (Specify):

Component Placement in cell: Turntable Dosimeter Placement: 1_at center line Component Rotation: N/A--Turntable Special Instructions: _ N/A Prepared By: Date:

Approved By: _a__ _'_ _/ Date:.

PROC-00830 Form: I Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dee 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of 1 Multiple or Single Facility

..... .... . .......... i ;...

STERIS' COMPONENT IRRADIATION CERTIFICATION Iamoft Sems Prepared for Nuclear Logistics Inc.

= w Source Type: Cobalt 60 Gamma P.O. # 0028800 0~-

Air Equiv. Required Dose (MRADS) .016 Rate Not to Exceed (MIRADS / Hr.) 1.00 SPECIMENS:

Qty Part No. Serial No. Description S33670 22293-001-00002 Coils for UV Trip Device DATA:

Total Delivered Dose (Air) MRADS: Min 0.016 Max 0.016 Dose Rate (Air) MRADS /Hr-. Min .124 Max .124 Total Exposure Hours: 0.13 Turntable Static Rotation 2 - WAY: 4 None:

Rotation Date In: 03/26/09 Date Out: 03/26/09 DOSIMETRY:

Dosimeter Type Harwell Red 4034 Perspex Batch KC Calibration Date 01/20/09 Calibration Due Date 01/20110 Readout Instrument: Beckman DU-640 Serial No.: 4326387 Calibration Date 08/18/08 Calibration Due Date 08/18/09 Comments: Process Run # 27521B (Sample B)

ATTACHMENTS:

Worksheets: N/A Drawings: N/A Notice of Anomaly: N/A Approved By: (Aiq

Title:

Sr. QS/RC Analyst Date:. AN4/2ZOe9 Processing Location: STERIS Isomedix Sei~tces 9 Apollo Drive. Whippany, NJ 07981 Phone: 973-887-2754 Fax: 973-887-6591 The product run described above was pmccscd in accordance with STERIS Isomedix Services Quality System requirements and the approved process parameters.

STERIS Isomedix Services facilities are in compliance with applicable state and federal regulations (FDA, NRC, EPA, and OSHA). STERIS Isomedix Services operates under a quality system which meets the requirements of the FDA QSR and ISO 13485: 2003. STERIS Isormedix Services adheres to requirements provided through ANSI/AAMI/ISO 11137 and EN 552.

FROC.00930 torm: 3 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page 1 of I Multiple or Single Facility

- . - .................. 'age"253 of 285.............

STERIS" NComponent Inngdlx Sarvices Processing Worksheet Customer:__Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0028800 IRR. Lot #/ Control # 27521B Component Quantity (Per Stack): 1I-Dose Specification: .016 Mrads Dose Rate Specified: -<1.0 Mrads/Hr.

Dose Rate Received: */IA4 Min. & Max.- Mrads/Hr.

ACTION ACIN Time Calculated Time_/__t Actual_ to~tor IN QIA ,ý0/?.

Rotate N/A N/A WI OUT ~ / _4'.ia Component Rotation Calculation: ,--I Comments:

COMPONENT PLACEMENT COMPONENT ORIENTATION PROC-00830 Form: 2 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of I Multiple or Single Facility

STERIS' 2 Component Irradiation Instructions Customer :_Nuclear Logistics P.O, #: 0028800 Special Radiation Request / SRR # (If Applicable) 27521B Receiving, Shipping & Accountability Record Control # : 22455 P.O. Specifies: 10 CFR 50, Appendix B Requirements Yes 21 No: 03 10 CFR 21 Requirements Yes 0 No: 0 Item Qty Serial # Code 4 Component Description 1 - Sample B 1 $33670 P/N COLIS FOR UV TRIP DEVICE Dose Rate Specification * <1.0 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: +/- +0%

Dose Specification *: .016 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: + +5%

Acceptable Dose Range*: .016 To .0168 Mrads

• Air Equivalent (TID): _ X Other (Specify):

Component Placement in cell: ___Turntable Dosimeter Placement: 1_at center line Component Rotation: _ N/A_- Turntable Special Instructions: N/A Prepared By:Dae k Approved By: __,_,,"_Date: _,___"!

PROC-00830 Form: I Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dee 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of I Multiple or Single Facility

!.,....! P-lgei255d f 285......

STERIS*

COMPONENT IRRADIATION CERTIFICATION Prepared for Nuclear Logistics Inc.

Source Type: Cobalt 60 Gamma P.O. # 0028800

.011 Air Equiv.

Air Required Dose Equiv. Required Dose (MRADS)

(MILADS) .011 Rate Not to Exceed (MRADS / Hr.) 1.00 SPECIMENS:

Qty Part No. Serial No. Description S33670 22293-001-00003 Coils for UV Trip Device DATA:

Total Delivered Dose (Air) MRADS: Min .011 Max 0.11 Dose Rate (Air)*RADS IHr: Min .124 Max " .124 Total Exposure Hours: 0.09 Turntable Static Rotation 2 - WAY: None:

Rotation Date In: 03/26/09 Date Out: 03/26/09 DOSIMETRY:

Dosimeter Type Harwell Red 4034 Perspex Batch KC Calibration Date 01/20/09 Calibration Due Date 01/20/10 Readout Instrument: Beclkman DU-640 Serial No.: 4326387 Calibration Date 08/18/08 Calibration Due Date 08/18/09 Comments: Process Run #27521C (Sample C)

ATTACITMENTS:

"Worksheets: / Drawings: N/A Notice of Anomaly: N/A Approved By:

Title:

Sr. QS/RC Analyst Date: 26 A.IZ&V 9 Processing Location: STERIS isomedix Sevices 9 Apollo Drive. Whippany, NJ 07981 Phone: §73-887-2754 Fax: 973-887-6591 The product run described above was processed inaccordance with STERIS Isomedix Services Quality System requirements and the approved process parameters.

STERIS Isomedix Services facilities are in compliance with applicable state and federal regulations (FDA, NRC. EPA, and OSHA). STERIS Isomedix Services operates under a quality system which meets the requirements of the FDA QSR and ISO 13485: 2003. STERIS Isomedix Services adheres to requirements provided through ANSVAAMVIISO 11137 and EN 552.

PROC-00830 Form: 3 Rev: 3 Eft Date: Dee 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page 1of I Multiple or Single Facility

..... "8 ".. ... " 8  : ... .. . . . . . ...

STERIS' 0Component Isame~x 8IVEOree Processing Worksheet Customer:__Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0028800 IRR. Lot #/ Control # 27521C Component Quantity (Per Stack): -I-Dose Specification: .011 Mrads Dose Rate Specified: <1.0 Mrad&/I-r.

Dose Rate Received: ,L Min. & Max. Mrads/Hr.

Time Time 0 erator ACTION Calculated Actual e / Dqte

[N _9_07 __

Rotate N/A N/A N/A OUT.. 3. _ .... ..

(6-1 I

Component Rotation Calculation:

Comments: .-0//" 1"z4 - o .09 COMPONENT PLACEMENT COMPONENT ORIENTATION

, p I

• Prepared By: Date:) i9 PROC-00830 Form: 2 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dee 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of I Multiple or Single Facility

STE RIS WComponent FSOM&MSGIWtOS Irradiation I istructions Customer: Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0028800 Special Radiation Request / SRR # (If Applicable) 27521C Receiving, Shipping & Accountability Record Control #: 22455 P.O. Specifies: 10 CFR 50, Appendix B Requirements Yes 21 No: 0 10 CFR 21 Requirements Yes 191 No::0 Item Qty Serial # / Code # Component Description 1 - Sample C 1 22293-001-00003 60 COLIS FOR UV TRIP DEVICE S33670 Dose Rate Specification *: <1.0 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: ._-0%

+

Dose Specification * : .011 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: J +5%

Acceptable Dose Range *: .011 To .01155 Mrads

• Air Equivalent (TID): _ X Other (Specify):

Component Placement in cell: Turntable Dosimeter Placement: 1_at center line Component Rotation: _ N/A--Turntable Special Instructions:

Prepared By: Date: -A oZ/

Approved By: T - I Date: 01ro V

PROC-00830 Form: I Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of I Multiple or Single Facility

. "ag 2 285:... '

STERIS' COMPONENT IRRADIATION CERTIFICATION Rsee~~~o Prepared for Nuclear Logistics Inc.

Source Type: Cobalt 60 Gamma P.O. # 0028800 IAir Equiv. Required Dose {MRADS) I 0.-06 Rate Not to Exceed (MRADS ( Hr.) 1.00 SPECIMENS:

Qty Part No. Serial No. Description

$33670 S 42181-001-00001 Coils for UV Trip Device DATA:

Total Delivered Dose (Air) MR.ADS: Min .006 Max .006 Dose Rate (Air) MRADS I Hr: Min .124 Max .124 Total Exposure Hours: .05 Turntable Static Rotation 2- WAY: None:

Rotation Date In: 03/26(09 Date Out: 03/26/09 DOSIMETRY:

Dosimeter Type Harwell Red 4034 Perspex Batch KC Calibration Date 01/20/09 Calibration Due Date 01/20/10 Readout Instrument: Beckman DU-640 Serial No.: 4326387 Calibration Date 08/18/08 Calibration Due Date 08/18/09 Comments: Process Run # 27521D (Sample D)

ATTACHMENTS:

Worksheets: N/A Drawings: N/A Notice of Anomaly:

- I N/A__

Approved By: Q-!1

Title:

_Sr. QS/RC Analyst Date: 2,6 Ma( 2009 Processing Location: STEIS Isomeix Services 9 Apollo Drive. Whippany, NJ 07981 Phone: 973-887-2754 Fax: 973-887-6591 The product run described above was processed in accordance with STERIS lsomedix Services Quality System requirements and the approved process parameters.

STERIS Isomedix Services facilities are in compliance with applicable state and federal regulations (FDA, NRC. EPA, and OSHA). STERIS Isomedix Services operates undera quality system which meets therequirements of the FDA QSR and ISO 13485: 2003. STER[S Isomedix Services adheres to requirements provided through ANSVAAM/ISO 11137 and EN 552.

PROC-00830 Form: 3 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of 1 Multiple or Single Facility

" Page'259 6f285"

STERIS'

• Component Processing Worksheet Customer :__Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0028800 IRR. Lot # / Control # 27521D Component Quantity (Per Stack): I Dose Specification: .006 Mrads Dose Rate Specified: <1.0 Mrads/Hr.

Dose Rate Received: 1,24 Min. & Max. Mrads/Hr.

ACIN Time Time 0 tor ACTION Calculated Actual re / I)ate IN 5 7 6(?

Rotate N/A N/AN/

OUT -- ý07 31l ,_40V_0, I

Component Rotation c ation:

Comments: -  :./, .05 COMPONENT PLACEMENT COMPONENT ORIENTATION Prepared By: -~

Date: __,r~

/ I PROC-00830 Form: 2 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of I Multiple or Single Facility

.- ' Pad6e26Ool285;

STERIS" iComponent tsanomix&*vMM Irradiation Instructions Customer: Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0028800 Special Radiation Request / SRR # (If Applicable) 27521D_

Receiving, Shipping & Accountability Record Control # : 22455 P.O. Specifies: 10 CFR 50, Appendix B Requirements Yes []1 No: 0 10 CFR21 Requirements Yes E] No: 1Q Item Qty Serial # / Code # Component Description 42181-001-00001 PIN COLIS FOR UV TRIP DEVICE 1 - Sample D 1 S33670 Dose Rate Specification *: <1.0 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: +/- +0%

Dose Specification * .006 Mrads/Hr. Tot.: + +5%

Acceptable Dose Range *: .006 To .0063 Mrads

• Air Equivalent (TID): ___X Other (Specify):

Component Placement in cell: Turntable Dosimeter Placement: 1_at center line Component Rotation: ____N/A-- Turntable Special Instructions: NIA____

Prepared By: Date:

Approved By: ZDate: 03./ ,v/05 PROC-00830 Form: 1 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page 1 of I Multiple or Single Facility I ~.............................Page 261 of285

?k- w1 WKCbiIJt.J L tL tt Tx a CA I.2b'tL O1kv000 OO 141-CA 00 TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section A Requirements Project: Square-D Masterpact Replacements Inspection Activity: Masterpact Shunt Trip/Close and Undervoltage coil operation Procedure:

Shunt Trip

1. Install a Masterpact shunt trip/close coil (p/n: 33661 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: S33812 also.)

2. Install a Masterpact undervoltage trip coil (p/n: 33670 coil only) onto a Masterpact NT type breaker element. (Note: The coil is contained in kit p/n: $33821 also.)

3. Apply 85VDC to the UV circuit.

4. Set the control voltage to 90VDC.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Lower the control voltage to 70VDC.

7. Trip the breaker.

8. Raise the control voltage to 140VDC.

9. Charge, close and trip the breaker one time. Rev. I

10. Ensure that there is 85Vdc minimum power to the UV trip device.

11. With the breaker in the closed position, apply 70Vdc to the shunt trip coil.

12. Using the appropriate M&TE timing equipment, record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker is open.

)A MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: :Z&. (,'7 ,m5 (Criteria is < 50mS) 41B MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: 2-1. 3 t^5 (Criteria is < 50mS) 4C MAIN POLE OPENING TIME: /.- 3 tw% (Criteria is < 50mS)

AUXILIARY CONTACT OPENING TIME:- 15.33m3 (Criteria is < 62mS)

1. Apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV coil and close the circuit breaker.

2. Reduce the voltage until the breaker trips.

3. Verify breaker tripped in the voltage range of 43.75 to 87.5Vdc.

4. Re-apply a voltage of 105Vdc to the UV trip.

5. Charge and close the breaker.

6. Remove power from the UV trip.

7. Record the opening time of the main and auxiliary contacts and'verify that the breaker is open (record results on table on next page). Perform the test only once unless otherwise specified. lRev. I Report #: TIR-1 1411320-1 Rev. I Client: Various Page 1of 4/9/09 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I Page 262 of 285

UV Trip Test 1sT Test 2ad Test 3rd Test ... Acc d*A , ,:5 -*-* " 50mS Auxiliary Contat.----< 62mS Acceptance Criteria: As stated in procedure steps.

Sampling Plan: 100% LINA

Reference:

N/A Release for Testin pection Prepared By:'( Date:-40 Reviewed By:

• Date: 413101' Approved By: \Date: q[ !a I Report #: TIR-1 1411320-1 Rev. 1 Client: Various Page 2 of 4/3/09 NLI-QUAL-07. R5 Attachment I Page 263 of 285

TEST/INSPECTION REPORT Section B Results Items Inspected Type: '*t ,,- -\

Mfgr/Model: )4t*.

1 Part/Serial Number: , It cai-- ocM r-v Equipment Used:

(Type) (M&TE #) (Calibration Due Date)

I*ASM5SW-Results:--s T~ CI4 (7I915 51-14~ 0=0~- Mrý SREt-1t F'It%

OA bbPACTOMUM %4e5%1xtV~t%fJ1¶- ja  %)tc 1L*. %IA WhPL1~%fb C 0\V14A k%%Vbc- tAMaa=-zb &m-us jxeSk -0ý 1 Cý'%2t -r w Results Met Acceptance Criteria: [ Yes -;*No ONA Discrepancy Report #: I0\\30-.._,.o, 0 NA Prepared By: .. Date: *.s.ox Reviewed By: Date: ,516 /09 Approved By: ..- Date: A_4161 Report #: Rev.

Client: Page* of L 515/08 Page 264 of 285 NLI-QUAL-07, R5 Attachment I

Continuation Sheet M16'afna -eý&bs ~ fuor jr-ficnfdstd ?0~p1j.1/ (AtrIAF4b) 54!r Nc%'k :1. : {'s¶" z~tb-oo'--coC~oi *- -DOoQo F. tI. f*SI gD0Kqr,, .. g"Lt,,M-ekA4 0 ~~~~-ZO 2--; L~p 6/24/2003 NLI-PROC-04, Rev. 12 Page 265 of 285 Attachment I P*ep, q

Discrepancy Report A. IDENTIFICATION NLI Job Number: 11411320 DR#: 11411320-02 Item: shunt trip Manufacturer: SQUARE D Model/P/N: 33661 Serial Number: 28816-001-00001 and 28816-001-00002 Qty: 2 Issue:

Shunt trips irradiated to 8E4 (28816-001-00001) and 1.56E4 (28816-001-00002). Baseline testing performed after irradiation to verify proper operation of the coils. The coils did not function after radiatino exposure.

Affected Hardware/Document/M&TE: TIR-1 1411320-1, Rev. I Initial Evaluation / Tagging Conditional Release qe Ma:terial Hold Fiefia, Sione 5/612009 Tribbl e, Chris 5/6/2009 Prepared By Date Apprioved By Date B. RESOLUTION (Attach additional pages, if required.)

Evaluation:

These are test specimen coils to establish a qualified level of radiation exposure. The coils do not function after exposure to the given doses. The coils to be retained in the test specimen inventory.

Disposition -j' Acceptable/Use as is [] Acceptable with rework noted li Acceptable with limitations noted [ Reject / Do not use Code 1 50 Code 2 See Table 3.2,---\

Prepared By Date:.date Reviewed By:_________________________________ Date:______

Approved By: Date:ý, V69 Page I of -_ NLI-QUAL-06, RI 5 Attachment I Page 18 of 30 Page 266 of 285

STE RIS' COMPONENT IRRADIATION CERTIFICATION Isamdm vceo Prepared for Nuclear Logistics, Inc.

ma Source Type: Cobalt 60 Gamma P.O. # 0029047 * =

Air Equiv. Required Dose (MRADS) 0.08 Rate Not to Exceed (MRADS I Hr.) 1.00 SPECIMENS:

Qty Part No. Serial No. Description S33812 28816-001-00001 Coil, Electrical: Closing &

Trip, 100-130VDC DATA:

Total Delivered Dose (Air) MRADS: Min 0.08 Max 0.08 Dose Rate (Air) MRADS I Hr: Min .13 Max .13 Total Exposure Hours: 0.63 Turntable Static Rotation 2 - WAY: R None:

RotationNne Date in: 04/23/09 Date Out: 04/23/09 DOSIMETRY:

Dosimeter Type Harwell Red 4034 Perspex Batch KC Calibration Date 01/20/09 Calibration Due Date 01/20/10 Readout Instrument: Beckman DU-640 Serial No,: 4326387 Calibration Date 08/18/08 Calibration Due Date 08/18/09 Comments: Process Run # 28051A (Sample A)

ATTACHMENTS:

Worksheets: N/A Drawings: N/A Notice of Anomaly: N/A Approved By: ()kdaC-,j

Title:

Sr QSiRC Anali-st Date: 24Apr 2c°° Processing Location: STERIS Isomedix Seiiices 9 Apollo Drive. Whippany,'N"6"198"I Phoon-e: §3-* 87-2754 Fax: 973-887-6591

'he product ro described above was processed in accordance with STERIS Isomedix Services Quality System requirements and the approved process parameters.

ST8RIS Isomedix Services facilities are in compliance with applicable state and federal regulations (FDA, NRC, EPA, and OSHA). STERIS Isomedix Services operates under a quality system which meets the requirements of the FDA QSR and ISO 13485: 2003. STERIS Isomedix Services adheres to requirements provided through ANSYAAMI/ISO 11137 and EN 552.

PRauL-uaU Form: 3 Kev. 3 Eftf Date: Dec 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Paget of I Multiple or Single Facility

STERIS*

Im1.tto*41 Servlao3 Component Irradiation In structions Customer: Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0029047 Special Radiation Request / SRR # (If Applicable) ____2805 IA Receiving, Shipping & Accountability Record Control #: 22900 P.O. Specifies: 10 CFR 50, Appendix B Requirements Yes No: 0 10 CFR 21 Requirements Yes El No: []

Item Qty Serial # / Code # Component Description P/N S33812, SIN 28816- COIL, ELECTRICAL: CLOSING &

1 PE " 1 00l-OO1-opoo / TRIP, 100-130VDC SQUARED Dose Rate Specification *: <1.0 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: 1 -+0%

Dose Specification * .08 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: +/- +5%

Acceptable Dose Range * .08 To .084 Mrads

• Air Equivalent (TID): _ X Other (Specify):

Component Placement in cell: TURNTABLE Dosimeter Placement: 2 AT CENTER LINE FOR DOSE RATE Component Rotation: ___TURNTABLE__________________

PROC-00830 Form: I Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I oiT Multiple or Single Facility

- ~ . Page 26 of 285-

STERI S' Component Pr s ng Worksheet Customer: __.,,___.... P.O.1k 0029047 IRR. Lot # / Control # 28051A Component Quantity (Per Stack): _1-Dose Specification: .08 Mrads Dose Rate Specified: <1.0 Mrads/Hr.

Dose Rate Received: .A/A'i 3 AI(/hMrads/mr.

ACINTime Time Operator Calculated Actual Signature / Date IN oFW*O6, Z, 546 O 6-.

Rotate N/A N/A N/A OUT p I/ a,( IP I.- I/

Component Rotation Calculation /;z Comments:

COMPONENT PLACEMENT COMPONENT ORIENTATION Prepared By: Date. ý44r PROC-00830 Form: 2 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of I Multiple or Single Facility

......... ' 6f8*. ...... . . . . .. ....

STERIS' COMPONENT IRRADIATION CERTIFICATION Iaeedia Sufvtcea Prepared for Nuclear Logistics, Inc.

Source Type- Cobalt 60 Gamma P.O. # 0029047 Air Equiv. Required Dose (MRADS) 0.016 Rate Not to Exceed (MRADS / Hr.) ... 00 SPECIMENS:

Qty Part No. Serial No. Description Coil, Electrical: Closing &

S3312 28816-001-00002. Trip, 100-130 VDC DATA:

Total Delivered Dose (Air) MRADS: Min 0.0169 Max 0.0169 Dose Rate (Air) MRADS /Hr: Min .13 Max .13 Total Exposure Hours: .13 Turntable Static Rotation 2- WAY: None:

Rotationut:

04/27/09 Date Out: 04/27/09 DOSIMETRY:

Dosimeter Type Harwell Red 4034 Perspex Batch KC Calibration Date 01120109 Calibration Due Date 01/20/10 Readout Instrument:" Beckman DU-640 Serial No.: 4326387 Calibration Date 08/18/08 Calibration Due Date 08/18/09 Comments: Process Run # 2805113 (Sample B)

ATTACHMENTS:

Worksheets: N/A Drawings: N/A Notice of Anomaly: N/A Approved By: (7- /,* d J

Title:

-r.QM/RC Analyst Processing Location: STERIS Isomedix Servi as9 Apollo Drive. Whippauny, NJ 07981 Phone: 973-887-2754 Fax: 973-887-6591 Date: 28&A '9200 The product run described above was processed in accordance with STERIS Isomedix Services Quality System requirements and the approved process parameters.

STERIS Isomedix Services facilities are in compliance with applicable state and federal regulations (FDA. NRC, EPA, and OSHA). STERIS Isornedix Services operates under a quality system which meets the requirements of the FDA QSR and ISO 13485' 2003. STERIS Isomedix Services adheres to requirements provided through ANSI/AAMI/ISO 11137 and EN 552.

5 PROC-00830 Form: 3 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: -PaggelIof I Multiple or Single Facility

. ................. P ge' 270 of 285.

'STE RIS

,' Component Irradiation In structions Customer :-Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: _0029047 Special Radiation Request / SRR # (If Applicable) 28051B Receiving, Shipping & Accountability Record Control #: 22900 P.O. Specifies: 10 CFR 50, Appendix B Requirements Yes No: 0 1E 10 CFR 21 Requirements Yes [M No:

Item Qty Serial # /Code # Component Description 1 SAMPLE "B" 1 P/NS33812, S/N 28816- COIL, ELECTRICAL: CLOSING &

001-00002 TRIP, 100-130VDC SQUARED Dose Rate Specification *: <1.0 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: :L +0%

Dose Specification *: .016 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: +/- +5%

Acceptable Dose Range *: .016 To _.@+F M

• Air Equivalent (TID): _ X Other (Specify):

Component Placement in cell: TURNTABLE Dosimeter Placement: 2 AT CENTER LINE FOR DOSE RATE Component Rotation: _ TURNTABLE Special Instructions: _N/A_____N/ ,

Prepared By:

Approved By:____ ___

PROC-00830 Form: 1 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of I Multiple or Single Facility 1i~T~r2~

'STE ER IS' Component Processing Worksheet Customer: ___GU________E P.O. #: 0029047 IRR. Lot AI Control # 2805 1B Component Quantity (Per Stack): -I-Dose Specification: .016 Mrads Dose Rate Specified: .<1.0 Mrads/Hr.

Dose Rate Received:. I/a, /JM iJ A'i

1) Mrads/Hlr.

Time Time Operator ACTION Calculated Actual Signature / Date IN Rotate N/A N/A N/A OUT J I I Component Rotation Calculation: "/:

Ila I - ý7 Comments:

COMPONENT PLACEMENT COMPONENT ORIENTATION PROC-00830 Form: 2 Rev: 3 EffDate: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page 1 of I Multiple or Single Facility

...... .................. 287... ......

.. . .. ... .. . .. ..... ......... ..... ...... i * *2ge . .. ...... .. .

STERIS" SN COMPONENT IRRADIATION CERTIFICATION Prepared for Nuclear Logistics, Inc.

Source Type: Cobalt 60 Gamma P.O. # 0029047 Air Equiv. Required Dose (cMRADS) 10.011 Rate Not to Exceed (MRADS I Hr.) 1.00 SPECIMENS:

Qty Part No. Serial No. Description I S33812 28816-001-00003 Coil, Electrical: Closing &

.. Trip, f00-130 VDC DATA:

Total Delivered Dose (Air) MR.ADS Min 0.011 Max 0.011 Dose Rate'(Air) MRADSI Hr: Min .13 Max .13 Total Exposure Hours: 0.09 Turntable Static Rotation 2 - WAY: None:

-Rotation Date In: 04/27/09 Date Out: 04/27/09 DOSIMETRY:

Dosimeter Type Harwell Red 4034 Perspex Batch . KC Calibration Date 01/20/09 Calibration Due Date 01/20/10 Readout Instrument: Beckman DU-640 Serial No.: 4326387 Calibration Date OS/I 8/08 Calibration Due Date 08118/09 Comments: Process Run #28051C (Sample C)

ATTACHMENTS:

Worksheets: N/A Drawings: N/A Notice of Anomaly: N/A A

Approved By: ( 1

Title:

W.. QS/RC AnalySt Date: 2..4 Zoo, Processing Location: STERIS Isomedix ServicEi 9 Apollo Drive. Whippany, NJ 07981 Phone: 973-887-2754 Fax: 973A87-6591 The product run described above was processed in accordance with STERIS lsomedix Services Quality System requiremenls and the approved process parameters.

STERIS Isomedix Services facilities are in compliance with applicable state and federal regulations (FDA, NRC, EPA. and OSHA). STERIS Isomedix Set-vices operates under a quality system which meets the requirements of the FDA QSR and ISO 13485: 2003. STERIS Isomedix Services adheres to requirements provided through ANSI/AAMI/SO f11137 and EN 552.

5" PROC-00930 Form: 3 Rev: 3 Eft Date: Dec 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page 1 of 1 Multiple or Single Facility Page 273 of 285..

STERIS" mi Component Irradiation Instructions Customer :_Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0029047 Special Radiation Request / SRR # (If Applicable) 28051 C Receiving, Shipping & Accountability Record Control #: 22900 P.O. Specifies: 10 CFR 50, Appendix B Requirements Yes 0 No: 0 10 CFR 21 Requirements Yes R No: 0 Item Qty Serial # / Code # Component Description P/N S33812, S/N 28816- COIL, ELECTRICAL: CLOSING &

001-00003 TRIP, 100-130VDC SQUARED Dose Rate Specification * : <1.0 Mrads/FHr. Tol.: +/- +0%

Dose Specification * .011 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: 1 +5%

.C9//70 ~k-W1 Acceptable Dose Range *: .011 To _O- Mrads

• Air Equivalent (TID): _ X Other (Specify):

Component Placement in cell: __ TURNTABLE Dosimeter Placement: 2 AT CENTER LINE FOR DOSE RATE Component Rotatiojn: TURNTABLE Special Instructions: _____N/A Prepared By: Date:

Approved By: TJAU Date: az0 PROC-00830 Form: 1 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dee 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of I Multiple or Single Facility Page 274 of 285

STEP~ S' Component Processing Worksheet Customer:___I,,,UTI LAORATOPI8" P.O. #: 0029047 IRR. Lot # /Control 28051C Component Quantity (Per Stack): -I-Dose Specification: -. 011 Mrads Dose Rate Specified: <1.0 Mrads/Hr.

Dose Rate Received: */.21/p;F ,/3 iMradsIHr. .

Time Tme Operator ACIN Time Time Operator ACTON Calculated Actual Signature / Date IN Rotate N/A N/A N/A OUT $7

/

Component Rotation Calculation:

-<9i/.I.2f ,0 q Comments:

COMPONENT PLACEMENT COMPONENT ORIENTATION AI-i- 1 EZI~E

/

Prepared By: J Date: _*  !

P"RUC-00830 Form: 2 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page 1 or I Multiple or Single Facility

,-, -

- -; : " ý ---7 Cr7w

STE RI S' COMPONENT IRRADIATION CERTIFICATION

.a Prepared for Nuclear Logistics, Inc.

Source Type: Cobalt 60 Gamma P.O. # 0029047 Air Equiv. Required Dose (MRADS) 0.006 Rate Not to Exceed (MRADS / Hr.) 1.00 SPECIMENS:

Qty Part No. Serial No. Description 1 S33812 28816-001-00004 Coil, Electrical: Closing &

Trip, 100-130VDC Temperature Sensor, Model # XJ3650726-09 Junction Box # 27752-001-00001' Condenser Refrigeration Rev.K .Temp Model # X13790348-07 Junction Box # 27752-002-00001 Pressure Sensor, Oil Tank Pressure DATA:

Total Delivered Dose (Air) MRADS: Min 0.0065 Max 0.0065 Dose Rate (Air) MRADS I Wr: Min .13 Max .13 Total Exposure Hours: 0.05 Turntable Static Rotation 2 - WAY: R None:

Rotation Noe Date In: 04/23/09 Date Out; 04/23/09 DOSIMETRY:

Dosimeter Type Harwell Red 4034 Perspex Batch KC Calibration Date 01/20/09 Calibration Due Date 01120/10 Readout Instrument: Beckman DXU-640 Serial No.: 4326387 Calibration Date 08/18/08 Calibration Due Date 08/18/09 Comments: Process Run # 28051D (Sample D)

ATTACHMENTS:

Worksheets:

Notice of Anomaly:

N/A IN/A_'_"

Drawings: N/A Approved By: C) 4 "--O - -

Title:

Sr. QS/RC Analyst Processing Location: 'S"EERISIsomedixSernices 9 Apollo Drive. Whippany, NJ 07981 Phone: 973-887-2754 Fax: 973-887-6591 Date: 24 Apzo The product run described above was processed in aceordance with STERIS lsomedix Services Quality System requirements and the approved proces! parameters.

STERIS Isomedix Services facilities arm in compliance with applicable state and federal regulations (FDA. NRC, EPA, and OSHA). STERIS Isomedix Services PROC-00830 Form: 3 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page 1 of 2 Multiple or Single Facility

.. Pd~2~'6~f 2~5

ST SCOMPONENT ER IS" IRRADIATION CERTIFICATION ftWk.,W Prepared for Nuclear Logistics, Inc.

Source Type: Cobalt 60 Gamma P.O. # 0029047 operates under a quality system which meets the requirements of the FDA QSR and ISO 13485: 2003. STERIS Isomedix Services adheres to requirements provided through ANSYAAMI/ISO t11137 and EN 552.

PROC-00830 Form: 3 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page2 of 2 Multiple or Single Facility agei 277 of 285

STE RI S ON Component Irradiation Instructions Customer: Nuclear Logistics P.O. #: 0029047 Special Radiation Request/ SRR # (If Applicable) _ _2805 1D Receiving, Shipping & Accountability Record Control #: 22900 P.O. Specifies: 10 CFR 50, Appendix B Requirements Yes I@ No: 0 10 CFR 21 Requirements Yes El No: 03 Item Qty Serial # / Code # Component Description 1 SAMPLE "D" I P/N S33812, SIN 28816-001-00004 COIL, ELECTRICAL: CLOSING & TRIP, 100-

- 130VDC SQUARED MODEL # X13650726-09 REV. K 2 SAMPLE "D" 1 JUNCTION BOX # 27752-001- TEMPERATURE SENSOR, CONDENSER 00001 REFRIDGERATION TEMP. TRANE MODEL # X13790348-07 PRESSURE SENSOR, OIL TANK PRESSURE.

3 SAMPLE "D)" 1 JUNCTION BOX # 27752-002- TRANE 0000!

Dose Rate Specification *: <1.0 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: + +0%

Dose Specification * .006 Mrads/Hr. Tol.: +5%

Acceptable Dose Range *: .006 To __006-__ Mrids'ý

• Air Equivalent (TID): X Other (Specify):

Component Placement in cell: TURNTABLE Dosimeter Placement: 2 AT CENTER LINE FOR DOSE RATE_

Component Rotation: _____TURNTABLE Special Instructions: _N/A, Pre pared By: Date:

Approved By: (ý6t IA4LL

- - I I D ate: &7-A1 PROC-00830 Form: I Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dec 19,2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of "

Multiple or Single Facility Page 27ý8 bf 285

STERIS" P-*

Scfto Isomodk

.Component Processing Worksheet Customer: .IT7UTH LABO_ __Oi___' P.O.#: 0029047 IRR. Lot # / Control # 28051D Cdmponent Quantity (Per Stack): _1 Dose Specification: .006 Mrads Dose Rate Specified: <1.0 Mrads/Hr.

Dose Rate Received: */,21tf *A 13 MradslH.

A ACTION Time Time gO!;rator Calculated Actual g re/at IN S Z::P4/. 9.

Rotate N/A N/A N/A OUT oil V _ a, 03 [. #

ly JVV 4 F VAj -)r-Component Rots: ion ulation:

. C7_5 Comments:

COMPONENT PLACEMENT COMPONENT ORIENTATION

-ZzZ

/ I r I Prepared By: Date:

PROC-00830 Form: 2 Rev: 3 Eff Date: Dee 19, 2008 Status: 07e. Completed: Page I of I Multiple or Single Facility

- 1'age 27~ of 255~

Reactor Trip Switchgear QR-06910327-1, Rev. O0 Exelon - TMI Page E. 1 Appendix E Testing Anomalies Page 280 of 285

TEST ANOMALY Date: 3/9/09 Anomaly #: 06910327-1 A. IDENTIFICATION Test Specimen / Procedure / Egquipment:

Switchgear P/N: PZ-4 / QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 / Square-D PZ-4 switchgear, s/n: Test Specimen Test Procedure / Step:

QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 / Step 4.4.4 Anomaly

Description:

Step 4.4A4 states that both breakers are tested. During testing only the top two sections where monitored (1 breaker cell and 1 instrument cell).

B. DISPOSITION The qualification test plan incorrectly stated to monitor both breakers during testing. It is acceptable to monitor only the top two cubicles in the cell (1 breaker cubicle and I instrument section cubicle) because these two cubicles and the components mounted internally experienced the highest amplified seismic input during testing. The successful testing of these components qualifies the components mounted in the lower cubicle of the switchgear structure.

At least one of each type of component was mounted in the top instrument cubicle except for the circuit breaker, which was mounted in the second from the top cubicle. This is the highest cubicle that a breaker will be mounted.

The testing is acceptable as performed and demonstrates the qualification of all components in the switchgear test specimen.

Prepared by:_ Date: f"[*L09 Reviewed by: Date: :516bq Approved by: Date: J7 L0' Page 281 of 285

TEST ANOMALY Date: 3/9/09 Anomaly #: 06910327-2 A. IDENTIFICATION Test Specimen / Procedure / Equipment:

Switchgear P/N: PZ-4 / QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 / Square-D PZ-4 switchgear, s/n: Test Specimen Test Procedure / Step:

QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 / Step 4.4.4 Anomaly

Description:

Step 4.4.4 states that the undervoltage relay coil voltage is to be powered from 90-OVdc for the transition test. The coil voltage is 90Vdc, however the sense voltage is 90-OVac to actuate the relay. The AC voltage was reduced to OVac during the test, not the Vdc.

B. DISPOSITION The qualification test plan incorrectly stated to remove the DC voltage applied to the relay. The sense voltage of the relay is the AC voltage. Removal of the AC voltage during the test is the correct voltage to remove during testing.

The testing performed is acceptable and shows proper operation of the relay and demonstrates qualification of the relay and is acceptable.

Prepared by: Date: X1,51102 Reviewed by: Date:

Approved by: Date Page 282 of 285

TEST ANOMALY Date: 3/9/09 Anomaly #: 06910327-3 A. IDENTIFICATION Test Specimen / Procedure / Eguipment:

Switchgear P/N: PZ-4 / QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 I Square-D PZ-4 switchgear, s/n: Test Specimen Test Procedure / Step:

QP-06910327-1, Rev. I / Step 4.4.2.1 AnomalyDescription:

The additional accelerometers used for measuring in-panel response were not mounted in the location as specified in the test plan. Step 4.4.2.1 states to install accelerometers on the top of the breaker cradle. The accelerometers were mounted on the front of the breaker.

B. DISPOSITION The accelerometer used for measuring in-panel response for the circuit breaker was not mounted in the location as specified in the test plan. The accelerometer could not be mounted as specified in the test plan because of space limitations within the test cubicle. Therefore, the accelerometer was mounted on the top front cover of the breaker. This location provides a representative amplified in-panel spectra for the breaker and is acceptable. The in-panel amplified in-panel spectra circuit breakers is provided for information only.

Prepared by: Date: ________

Reviewed by: Date:

Approved by: -Date: S /Aa Page 283 of 285

TEST ANOMALY Date: 3/9/09 Anomaly #: 06910327-4 A. IDENTIFICATION Test Specimen / Procedure / Equipment:

Switchgear P/N: PZ-4 / QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 / Square-D PZ-4 switchgear, s/n: Test Specimen Test Procedure / Step:

QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 / Step 4.4.4 Anomaly

Description:

The in-panel test data in the back-to-front (1800) vertical direction for the accelerometer mounted on the front of the breaker was not accurate data and was discarded.

B. DISPOSITION The data obtained for this location for this one particular run was corrupted due to inaccurate data. The accelerometer did not record data and therefore was not used in the calculation of the in-panel spectra at the breaker location. This is acceptable because the same data was recorded in the front-to-back (0°) direction and used for the calculation of the in-panel spectra. The in-pariel spectra is provided for information only.

Prepared by: Date:__5,.,&O Reviewed by: Date:__i._.__

Approved by:__ ___________________Dt

__ __ __ _ _ Date:_

Page 284 of 285

TEST ANOMALY Date: 4/22/09 Anomaly #: 06910327-5 A. IDENTIFICATION Test Specimen / Procedure / Equipment:

Switchgear P/N: PZ-4 / QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 / Square-D PZ-4 switchgear, s/n: Test Specimen Test Procedure / Step:

QP-06910327-1, Rev. 1 / Step 4.5 Anomaly

Description:

The post seismic baseline functional testing was not performed as specified in the qualification plan.

B. DISPOSITION Baseline functional testing was performed after seismic testing to verify proper operation of the test specimens. Testing and acceptance criteria was accordance with the following NLI Verification Plans:

VP-20K-904C8-2, Rev. 0 - Electroswitch breaker position switches.

VP-XUDO8OV63, Rev. 0 - Square-D auxiliary DC relays (KA-A, KB-A) in the switchgear.

VP-XO1200V02, Rev. 0 - Square-D auxiliary AC relays (K5-A, K5-B, KF-A, KF-B) in the switchgear.

VP-ZB5AVBG1, Rev. 0 - Square-D indicating lights.

VP-41 1R0715, Rev. 0 - ABB undervoltage relays.

The testing was not performed as described in the qualification plan. The post-seismic testing was performed on the individual components of the switchgear instead of the overall assembled unit as documented in Test Anomaly 06910327-05. The VP's are separate controlled documents.

Post-seismic baseline functional testing was performed on the circuit breaker per NLI Standard Verification Plan SVP-109, Rev. 2. SVP-109 is a standard test plan for Masterpact NT type breakers which are used in this application.

The test specimens passed all post-seismic baseline testing. The test data is contained in Appendix D.

Prepared by/ Date: */[~

Reviewed by: [ xj**Date: ""**

Approved by: Date: Ft/Ir Page 285 of 285